VOL. 83 MARCH, 1960 TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED ADELAIDE PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY'S ROOMS KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE Price: Two Pounds Two Shillings a. " — = ee ee —_ “). ox a “sale > CONTENTS B. G. Forses: Magnesite of the Adelaide System: Petrography and De- seriptive Stratigraphy 9, care eae H. K. Fry: Classificatory Systems of Kinship... 2. nes H. Womers.ey: Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea Paraphagic upon Millipedes and Cockroaches and on Beetles of the Family RASSALA RC ee aa | acta | Rw gas re atte H. Womers.tey: New Records of Species of Leptolaelaps (Acarina, Meso- stigmata) from Australia and New Zealand __..... AP fea Ws H. Womerstey: A New Genus and Species Laelaptoseius novae- zelandiae from New Zealand (Acarina, Aceosejidae) 0000 ae H. Womerstey: A Second Species of Pristolaelaps (Acarina, Laelaptidae ) Lome SUSKAlio ee § SEN OP cake De eee ere = ue A. F, Wizson: The Charnockitic Granites and Aseqrintes Granites of GentralAvistrattay” ve Fos. aed. ame wae ua ME tvi.Le: An Aberrant Species of Eclipta from Australia was H. Fintayson: Nomenclature of Notomys (Muridae) in the Lake Eyre Dos we eee oe Le a ee RT. J. N. Buacx: The Relationship between I]lumination and Global Radiation S. J. EpmMonns: Some Australian Echiuroids (Echiuroidea ) ect, ies D. Kinc: The Sand Ridge Deserts of South Australia and Related Aeolian Landforms of the Quaternary Arid Cycles 00 ass Bernarp C. Corron: Distorted Cowries 9s, te M. J. TyLEeR: Observations on the Diet and Size Variation of Amphibolurus adelaidensis (Gray) (Reptilia, Agamidae) on the Nullarbor Plain .... I. A. Mumme: Determination of the Absolute Gravity Values on the Summits of a Number of Prominent Hills in the Mount Lofty Ranges H. H. Fintayson: On Rattus greyi Gray and its Derivatives =... R. V. Sourncotr: Notes on the Genus Sphaerotarsus (Acarina, Smarididae ) Paut G. Wirson: A Consideration of the Species Previously Included within Helipterum albicans (A. Cunn.) DC. 2.0 te H. Worrner: On Some Structural Development in the Central Part of the Great Australian Artesian Basin 0.0000 eee ete C. D. Boomsma: Notes on the Genus Eucalyptus in South Australia _..... G. CurrrenDALe: Contributions to the Flora of Central Australia, No. 1 ..... Henry Kenneth Fry, pD.s.0., M.D., B.S., B.SC., DIP.P-H., 1886-1959 __...... List of Lectures, 1958-1959 __..... i a Tee, i m7 Balincessheet mee ieee tee Ga Wis tesa aes me ie: Awards of the Sir Joseph Verco Medal and List of Fellows, 1959 . Sco Index ee eos © GS. tt oie ae PAGE MAGNESITE OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM: PETROGRAPHY AND DESCRIPTIVE STRATIGRAPHY BY B. G. FORBES Summary A dolomite-magnesite sequence, the Montacute Dolomite formation, occurs at scattered points northward from Adelaide at a constant stratigraphic level within the Adelaide System. The formation is richest in magnesite and contains very little arkose at Copley, while near Beetaloo it is rich in arkose, is thickest and contains much less magnesite. Individual units show little facies change over a few miles. The most common rock is dark grey dolomite, chiefly massive, but also laminated. Magnesite rock is generally a conglomerate, pale grey in colour. Dolomitic arkose forms a significant part of the succession in certain regions. Ripple marks, mud cracks, slump bedding and, in magnesite conglomerate, reverse graded bedding are common structures. Flow direction is indicated by sedimentary structures and by preferred orientation of grains. MAGNESITE OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM: PETROGRAPHY AND DESCRIPTIVE STRATIGRAPHY by B. G. Forsrs* [Read 9 April 1959] SUMMARY A dolomite-magnesite scquence, the Montacute Dolomite formation, uccurs at scattered poinls northward from Adelaide at a constant stratigraphie Jevel within the Adelaide System. The formation is richest in magnesite and contains very little arkose. at Copley, while near Beetalov it is rich in arkose, is thickest and contains much less maxznesite. Individual units show little facies change over a few imiles. The most common rock is dark grey dolomite, chielly massive, but also laminated. Mugnesite: rock is Binet a couzlomerate, pale grey in colour. Dolomiti¢c arkose forms a significant part of the succession in certam regions. Ripple marks, mud cracks, slump bedding and, in magnesite conglomerate, “reverse” graded bedding ure common structures. Flow direction is indicated by sedimentary structures and by preferred orientation of grains. INTRODUCTION The Proterozvie rocks of South Australia have for some time been known to contain deposits of magnesite, but the great extent and sedimentary nature of these deposits have been recognized only in recent years. This paper covers the petrography and stratigraphy of the most notable formation containing these beds, A discussion of their origins is reserved for a later paper. METHODS At most of the fourteen localities examined stratigraphic sections were measured from the top of the Aldgate Sandstones to the base of the Sturt Tillite of the Adelaide System. In addition, detailed examinations were carried out of that part of the section equivalent to the Montacute Dolomite formation, a collection made of oriented and other specimens, together with a record of directed sedimemary structures and the mapping of selected units. Size distribution and preferred form orientation of grains in detrital rocks were determined both in thin section and on flat surfaces in the laboratory. Laboratory procedures included chemica] analysis and qualitative tests, refrac- tive index determinations, insoluble residue studies and routine examination of thin sections, DESCRIPTIVE STRATIGRAPHY GENERAT, Magnesite of the Adelaide System is confined largely (but not entirely) to the Montacute Dolomite or its equivalent, in the Torrensian Serics, this forma- tion in most arcas being easily identified by its distinctive lithology and its stratigraphic position between the Aldgate Sandstones and the Sturt Tillite. The composition and thickness of the formation at various localities are shown in Table 1, The positions of the localities appear in Fig. 1, which also * Department of Geology, University of Adelaide. Trans. Koy. Soc. S. Aust. (1960), Vol. 83. 2 Bb. G. FORBES shows contours of thickness and sand-content. The table and figure are based on my own stratigraphic sections and those of Spry (1952), Wilson (1952) and Wymond (1950) at Hawker, Rhynie and Clare respectively. Fig. 1 is necessarily in part hypothetical. TABLE TJ. Properties of tha Montacute Dolomite \ Locality Thickness Porrentage thickness of | (ft.) magnesite Sand Shale Carbonate 1. Adelaide (Torrens Gorge ) 5ag 2 14 3 83 2. Rhynive 100? oY 07 little? | much 3. Clare 1008 OF “7 little? much 4. Rabertstown \ 470 0 0 little? mutch 6, Bundaleer 45tt 1 25 7 66 6. Crystal Brook 1400 I 40 7 53 7. Beetaloo 2800 1 16 t4 70 &. Pt. Germein 2900 1 22 28 ft %. Mundallio Creek pon 5 5 33 42 10. Depot Creek 00 6 9 23 68 lt, Johnburg 600? 8? 127 437 an? 12. Hawker 1420 10 1 31 68 13. Copley 2000 17 bi | 56 42 14. Arkaroola 2300 7 6 6 88 15, Witchelina 1600-2800 I 35 21 44 The greatest percentage thickness of magnesite is present in the northern Copley region, The formation itself is thickest in the Beetaloo region, where also there is a great thickness of sand of arkose composition, These associated facts suggest that near Beetaloo the area of accumulation was of the nature of 2 zeugogeosyncline (a basin of subsidence with complementary highlands nearby), to use Kay’s (1951) terminology, It has not been found possible to correlate units between distant localities. However, diagrams showing per- centage composition of various constituents per 50 or 100 feet have revealed general tendencies common to most sections. These are (1) a low proportion of dolamite near the middle of the succession and, in the same place, a high proportion of sand; (2) a high proportion of magnesite near the top of the succession. Locat. VARIATION Local facies changes in individual units could only be evaluated along the strike of outcrops. This study in particular is made ‘difficult by the poor ex- posure of most carbonate racks. The Montacute Dolomite has not been recognized as such by the S.A, Department of Mines on either the Gawler or Echunga map sheets (respec- tively north and south of the Adelaide sheet). On the Adelaide sheet this formation shows rather rapid facies changes, expressed mainly in its disappear- ance to the north and east. Thin magnesite beds at localities further north show little change where examined over one mile or more. The magnesite beds once worked by the B.1.P. Company at Mundallio Creek wedge out a little north of the Cardassis workings, but extend north for at least five miles from this point, Dolomitic MAGNESITE OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM 3 arkose beds at Beetaloo, Port Cermein Gorge and Witchelina commonly thin ont after being followed a mile or so along the strike. It thus appears that magnesite beds are thin lenses of great extent (at least five miles diameter; perhaps 10-30 miles), Dolomite beds reach a greater thick- ness, and aré probably more extensive. Dolomitic arkose beds are probably not as extensive as magnesite. PETROGRAPHY GENERAL Rocks of the magnesitic succession are varicd both in composition and fabric. The chief mineral component is dolomite, which forms a dark blue- grey dolomite rock or may be mixed with detrital quartz and feldspar, magne- site or argillaceous material. No calcite, even as a vein mineral, has been found in the magnesitic succession. Magnesite and dolomite were distinguished by determining refractive index or a rapid turbidimetric determination of calcium, where special tests were necessary. Contrasting properties of magnesite and dolomite rock are tabulated below: Magmesite rock Dolomite rock 1, Colour geuerally pale prey to white. 1. Calour generally dark blue-grey. 2. Occurs chicly as a conglomerate, 3. Oceurs chiefly in the massive or laminu- rarely as a breccia or massive. ated form. When fragmental it is a 3. Individual beds are thin, breevia, rarely « conglomerate. 4, Occurs chiefly as pebbles when in 3. Average thickness of beds greater than rocks of mixed compesition, for magnesite. 4, Occurs chielly as matrix when in rocks of mixed coriposition. Macnesirr Rock Components of magnesite rock ure magnesite, talc, dolomite, authigenic albite, carbon, and detrital quartz and feldspar. Most magnesite rocks contain between 5 and 10 per cent. acid insoluble material. Authigenic albite las been encountered only in a few specimens of mag- nesite conglomerate or arenite, Crystals are in most cases significantly located just inside the borders of magnesite pebbles. The idiomorphic albite has prob- ably been derived by solution within the matrix of the conglomerate and deposi- tion within magnesite pebbles, Detrital quartz and albite both show peripheral solution. Dolomite is intimately mixed with magnesite or appears as detrital frag- ments in the matrix. It forms idivblastic rhombs more commonly than mag- nesite, and is gencrally coarser-grained than magnesite crystals, which are about 0-002 mm. in diameter. The term “crystal” is used to avoid confusion with detrital magnesite, such as magnesite pebbles which are aggregates of crystals, as also is massive magnesite rock. Magnesite weathers to a white or cream colour irrespective of the colour of a fresh surface. This is a useful guide in distinguishing the rare dark varicties of magnesite from the normal grey dolomite. Magnesite conglomerate and arenite are composed of rounded magnesite pebbles in a matrix of chiefly magnesite and dolomite. Individual pebbles range in diameter up to about 12 cm. The size distribution of pebble long diameters in section has been studied 4 B. G, FORBES on a number-frequency basis. Results for six fine-grained conglomerates from Copley have been recalculated by Greenman’s (1951) method to give cumu- lative curves. The following data were thus derived (Table 2); TABLE 2. Size Distribution of Magnesite Pebbles, OC: kerr Specimen A77 Median diameter Sorting coefficiuat mm. (Md) (Sa) 40 2-3 1-20 16] 0-94 L338 175A 0-65 146 185 2:3 1+33 193 9:57 1-29 277A 1-7 1-53 The conglomerates are all well-sorted. The average of maximum pebble sizes for some Incalities, together with the average thickness of a magnesite bed for that locality is shown in Table 3, TABLE 2. Properties of Magnesite Conglomerate Beds. Locality Nonher in Average largest Averupe Bed ' Sample pehble, mm. | thickness, feat Adelaide d4 } 23 O-4 Port Germein Gorge 4 5 I Muudallio Creek 25 18 1-6 Depot Creek 25 26 1-7 Copley 28 3) 2-1 Arkaroola 23 8 l-4 Witchelina (rough estimate) 3 It was possible to collect at Copley individual magnesite pebbles which had weathered out of the conglomerate matrix, Sphericity has been calculated and shape plotted according to Zingg’s method by determining for each pebble its volume and its largest, intermediate and shortest intercepts (a, b and c¢ respectively). For 50 pebbles there is a preponderance of dises with b/a about 0-8 and c/b about 0-4. Average sphericity is about 0:65. Certain characteristics of the pebbles—such as pinched or contorted margins, central depressed areas and curvature—cannot be represented numerically. Magnesite pebbles show no internal structure. Most conglomerates show pre- ferred orientation of magnesite pebbles, This feature has been studied in sections parallel to bedding and in the vertical section parallel to the direction of preferred orientation. A distinction may be made between groups of low and high matrix content in the preferred orientation data, Rocks of low matrix content possess « larger number of pebbles at a high angle to the bedding than those of high matrix content. This is perhaps due to mutual interference of pebbles during deposition, Magnesite breccia at Montacute cecurs chiefly as thin zones of fragments which are lath-shaped in section. At Copley the breccias are thicker (up to MAGNESITE OF ‘JHE ADELAIDE SYSTEM 5 4 feet) and compnsed of a poorly-sorted mixture of dolomite and magnesite fragments in a-dolomitic matrix. This matrix sometimes forms valy a small pro- portion of the rock and may be crowded with small magnesite fracments, Large magnesite fragments are chiefly disc-shaped, hnt are traversed by cracks and passess irregular boundaries, Many plates have been bent, Others, in the section offered by the rock face are completely wrapped around portions of fhe matrix, Fragments show preferred orientation. Massive or laminated magnesite occurs in thin beds, often at the base uf magnesite conglomerate and has much the same composition as maguesite pebbles. DoroemitTr Rock Dolomites of the magnesitic succession are nat chemically distinguishable from dolomite rock of other formations. Most of the analyzed dolomites. are the common massive or laminated variety. They centain abuut the same pro- portion of insoluble material as non-fragmental magnesite, but less than that of the average magnesite rock, Individual dolomite crystals are about 0-004 mm. diameter, Irregular dark chert nodules or lenses occur within some dolomite beds, Mussive or laminated dolomite varies between medium and dark grey, This is bused on comparison with the chart of the Rock Colour Chart Committee (1951), The colour depends largely on carbon content and shows no systematic variation. Weathered surfaces of dolomite are pale blnish grey. Dolomite hreecia is very common in the Crystal Brook-Beetaloo region, The composition of angular dolomite fragments is the same as that of massive dolomite. Dolumite fragments are chicHy lath-shaped in section, and up to about 3 cm. long, Many laths are curved and arranged with their long axis parallel to the bedding. The rock contains about 70 per cent. volume of areniceous matrix. Bedding planes are undisturbed. Dotomire-Quarrz Rocks This group forms an important part of the magnesitic succession at Torrens Gorge, between Crystal Brook and Depot Creek, und at Witehelina, ‘The term dolumitic arkose is applied to quartz-feldspar-dolomite rocks containing up to 50 per cent. dolomite. The majority of these rocks have 20 to 40 per eent- dolomite. Their fresh surface is very pale grey to dark grey and they weather tu a pale brown. Some atkeses show lamination due to alternation of fine and coarse layers. Imperfect graded bedding was scen in only one specimen. Large quartz and feldspar grams are chiefly rounded to sub-rounded, while most grains (particularly quarts) are irregular in shape- Irsegularity if shape is partly due ta recrystallization and peripheral reaction with the carbonate matrix. Tiny cubes of pyrile are freyuenlly present in the heavy fraction. Zircon deeurs chiefly as well-rounded elongate grains whose size is proportional ta the mean diameter for the rock, The predominant variety of tourmaline is brown and crystallized. Magnesite js present in small wnount either as matrix ur detwital particles in some dolomite-quartz rocks, Dolomite, whether as matrix or discrete fruyments, is most commouly very fine-grained, Some spherical dolomite particles possess at their centre an angular grain of quarts, A few rocks contain large patebes of reerystallized dolamite as well as the normal fine-grained. variety. The dolumite matrix may be completely recrystallized where there has been dynamic meéta- morphism. This is so at ‘Yorrens Gorge, Arcnaceous dolomites are of wide 6 B, G. FORBES occurrence, At Torrens Gorge they are associated with matmesite breccia and at Crystal Brook with dolomite breccia. Dolomitic arkose possesses a significant regional variation in properties, Table 4 below shows that, with the exception of Torrens Gorge, there aré two petrographic “provinces”, TABLE 4. Properties of ucid-insoluble residues of Nolomitic Arkosé a Place Feidspar®, Feldspar Heavy Minerals {Moan size (mm) ‘Torrens Gorge 11-38 acid plagioclase pink zircon 0-09 — 0-76 Crystal Brook 31-37 mirroline tourmaline 0-24 — ; (piak zircon) 0-43 Port Garmein Gorge 37-47 mitraling pink zircon and (22 — tourmaline 0-41 Mundalio Creel 36-48 microlina tourmaline Q.22— (pink wirvou) 0-42 Copley 35 acid plagioclase =| enlourless zircon 0-10 Arkuroola 51-30 atid plagioclase colourless zircon 0-07 and tourmaling Witchelina 25(—) acid plagioclase culourless zi‘con 07 and tourmaline a a In the northern (Copley-Witchelina) province arkeses are finer-grained, contain acid plagioclase with little or no microcline, and colourless zircon as the chief heavy mineral. The mid-northern region (Crystal Brook-Mundallio Creek) is characterized by a larger mean size, microcline and pink zircon. The feldspar content is a little lower in the Copley-Farina group. Cent Two main kinds of chert may be recognized. One represents the silici- fication of separate fragmental carbonate beds while the other occurs as lenses and nodules within dolomite rock. At Copley some thin chert beds extend for several miles. Other beds of similar fabric and composition occur as lenses within magnesite conglomerates. The cherts are dark-coloured, show a relict conglomerate or arenite fabric and are composed largely of fine-grained quartz and medium-grained dolomite, together with an extremely fine-grained muterial, possibly carbon. Nodular chert within dolomite rock occurs as black or greyish lenses parallel to bedding. Short extensions of the nodules cut across the bedding. Sometimes lamination in the dolomite is diverted around the nodules. Of four nodules exatnined in the laboratory, one showed lamination parallel to that of the enclosing dolomite, while the other three showed outlines of srnall elongate and rounded fragments. It would seem that most chert was formed by the preferential silicification of fragmental carbonates either as distinct and separate beds of fragmental carbonates or as lenses of fragrnental carbonates intercalated in massive rocks, ARGILLITE Rocks of this gronp have been given little attention in the laboratory. Slates or siltstones de not form a significant part of the succession except ut Witchelina. Colour is commonly dark grey or shades of blue- and preen-grey. A reddish variant was noted at Copley. MAGNESITE OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM -] STRUCTURES Ripple marks are common at Witchelina and are observed at the five northernmost localities. They are chiefly regular, with parallel ridges of low relief, They are found mainly on dolomitic arkuses and arenaceous rocks, but HAWKER fo e DEPOT ‘Ck. e os MUNDALLIO cK. | #JOHNBURGH 2 ARE QR OBERTSTOWN ® RHYNIE N ADELAIDE, +s | SO MILES Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 1—Hypothetical lithofacies and isopach map of the Montacute Dolomite. Propartion af sand is shown by stippling: light stippling, 10-30 per cent.; dense stippling, greater than 30 per cent. Heavy lines are contours of thickness: figures indicate thousands of feet. Fig, 2.—Flow directions as shown by sedimentary structnres in the Montacute Dolomite. For explanation see text. are also found in dolomite rock. About one-third of the ripple marks observed are slightly asymmetrical, Compound and arcuate ripples are much less common. kK 5. G. FORBES Mud cracks were noted in largest number at Copley and Arkaroola, They are present also at Depot Creek, Mundallio Creek and Witchelina. The struc- ture is found in dolomite rock (paler-coloured varieties), dolomitic arkose and inixed rocks, Cracks range in size up-to about half an inch across, and generally contain detritus (including small magnesite fragments) contrastingly coarser than the cracked layer. Polygons are up to ten inches in diameter, and are sometimes superimposed on ripple marks, The presence of cvarse detritus within cracks indicates formation before burial of the cracked layer. Slump structures are found in fine-yrained sediments such as mugnesite (iaseye and dolomite rock, The vertical thickness disturbed is generally only a few inches, Brecciation duc to slamping was scen only once, Both the slump- ing and brecciation were on a minute scale, Crests of slump folds are occa- sionally truncated by layers above. _ Wavy bedding is a feature of laminated dolomite and some dolomitic arkoses. Irregularities in most places are only slight, In the sequence of arenacccus dolomites near Crystal Brook the amplitude of the crumpling is about 15 mm. Some of the folds are slightly overturned, At Torrens Gorge the structure is very common in banded dolomites. In some contorted panes the crests were several inches high, broke under pressure and allowed material to pass upward from the lower bed. Differential pressures during compaction of soft sediment would therefore appear to be an important factor here in the production of wavy bedding. “Reverse” graded bedding is a persistent feature of magnesite conglomerate heds, Not all magnesite conglumerate beds shaw vertical trading, but when ivading is present it is normally from fine-grained at the base to coarser-grained ut the top. Beds showing reverse grading are from about 2 éo 4 feet thick. Both normal grading and current bedding are rare, Clay-pellet impres- sions are common in the siltstones and fine-grained arkoses of Witchelina. SuMMaRY oF Drmectionan STRUCTURES Results obtained by various authors (e.g, Brett. 1955; McKee, 1954) shaw the palaeogeographic value of measuring numerous directional structures of sedimentary rocks. In the present study it is unfortunate that in most lodalities information of this kind is meagre. However, what is available is fairly con- eorlant for each locality, and therefore significant, In Fig, 2 is a geographic summary of flow directions interpreted mainly from asymmetric ripple marks. Sufficient data were obtainable at Witchelina, Arkaroola and Depot Creek for representalion by an orientation diagram, In other localities dicections ate indicated by arrows with a letter showing whether the inference is based on symmetric or asymmetric ripple marks (S$ or R), measurement in magnesite or quartzite of preferred orientation of grains (M or Q), or current bedding (CG), The downwards tilt of the depositional surface causing slumping is indicated by a bene line, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Acknowledgment is due to many people and organizations for their assist- ance during the period of research. I am particularly grateful for the kind advice of Professor 4. R. Alderman and the friendly atmosphere of the Geology Departments of the University of Adelaide. This study has heen financed by University of Adelaide Senior Research Scholarships and a James Barrans Scholarship. MAGNESITE OF THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM 9 REFERENCES Bretr, G. Wen ante Cross-bedding in the Baraboo quartzite of Wisconsin, J. Geology, 63, pp. 143-148. Greenman, N. N., 1951, The mechanical analysis of sediments from thin-section data, J. Geology, 59, pp. 447-462. Kay, M,, 1951. North American Geosynclines, Mem. geol, Soc. Amer,., 48. McKer, E. D,, 1954. Stratigraphy and history of the Moenkopi formation of Triassic age, Mem. geol. Soc. Amer., 61. Rock Cotour Cuart Commarrer, 1951. Rock colour chart, Geol. Soc. Amer., New York. Spry, A. H., 1952. Sediments of the Adelaide System in the Mount Plantagenet area, South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 75, pp. 164-180, Wiuson, A. F., 1952, The Adelaide System as developed in the Riverton-Clare region, northern Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 75, pp. 131-149. Wvmonp, A. P., 1950. Unpublished M.Sc. thesis, University of Adelaide. CLASSIFICATORY SYSTEMS OF KINSHIP BY H. K. FRY Summary CLASSIFICATORY SYSTEMS OF KINSILUP By H. K. Pry [Read 9 April 1959] Nearly a century ago Morgan published (1871) his monumental work on Systeins of Consanguinity and Affinity. He had discovered that in many parts of the world every person in a society was included in one of several great clusses of kinship terms. He deduced that systems of kinship could be ex plained “on the assumption of the antecedent existence of u series of customs und institutions, one reformatory of the other, commencing with promiscuous intercourse, and ending with the larnily as now constituted”. This hypothesis has not becn sustained. It is now generally conceded that. the family has always been the fundamental unit in human societies, and that kinship systems are correlated most significantly with cxisting social structures. However, Morgan's separation of kinship systems into the two divisions of the descriptive and the classificatory still holds good, and his tables of kinship terms of the classificatury systems include examples of toost of the types recognised ticlay. There has beeu much coutroversy concerning the significunce of these various types of classificatory kinship systems. McLennan (1876), who intro- duced the term exogumy, claimed that kinship terms were only terms of address, Kohler (1897) postulated that systems of the Omaha type were derived [rom a custum of marriages with the daughters of a wife’s brother, and that systems of the Crow type were based on a custom of marriage with the wife of the mother’s brother, Further observations luye shown that Omaha-type systems ure associated consistently with patrilineal societies, and Crow-type systems nstially associated with mutrilineal sucieties. Kroeber (1909) insisted that kin- ship terminology was not determined hy, nor indicative ot, a partieular social organisation, but that linguistic aud psyebological factors were of primary, or at least equal, importance. Rivers (191+) strongly supported Kohlor’s hypo- thesis, aud considered that social organisation was all-important in the deter- mination of a system of kinship terminology. Radetitte Brown developed the method of tracing the genealogical sequences of kinships, which later (1941) he termed the method of suciological analysis, He emphasised the importance of tie structure of socielies, and considered that the classificatory terminologies caild he interpreted by reference to the principles of the anity of the sibling vrowp and the unity of the linvave group, : For many years I haye been using what may be termed a synoptic method in studying kinship systems, The basis of this method, whieh has been pre: sented in previous papers (1931, 1934, 1950, 1957), is a set of symbuls expressing in a marriage diagram the dominant custom of marriayes between the social units of a society, and in a genealogical pattern the framework of the social structure emerging from such a system of marriages. These symbols are based on the letters A a and Bb representing male and female members respectively of family social units which intetmarry, These are usually representatives of exogumous moieties A and B. Additional letters an be used when the more wumerous primary divisions of phratries are in question, Numerals as prefixes are added to these letters ta indicate member ‘Trans, Roy. Sec. S, Aust. (1960), Vol 83. {2 ff. K. ¥RY ship of successive generations. Numerals as suffixes are added tu the letters to identify members of lines of descent differentiated by the kinship system. Mar- riages hetween members of these social units in each generation are {ndicated by the linkage = in the diagrams of marriage. The genealogical patterns are built up by arranging the symbols for all the representatives of one generation ina horizontal line, and plotting the symbols for sons below thase of their respec- tive fathers, aud those of daughters below their respective mothers, in accord- ance with the appropriate diagram of marriages. Moiety or phratry identifica- Hon of these children will le that of the father in a patrilineal society, that of the mother in a matrincal society, The marriage diagrams und genealogical patterns can be simplified usually by relegating the prefixed numerals to the commencement of the series of symbols appropriate tu each particular generation. Shonld this be done, any reference to any individual unit should include this numeral prefix; ¢.g., an individual unit of a serfes 1, Al al B1 bl should be referred ta as 1A1, Jal, 1HI, or Ibl. Genealogical sequences can be followed readily in these patterns. By iden- tifying brother and sister in one generation lme, fother and mother can be located in the line above, and are also husbend and wife in that generation. In a society with a classificatory kinship system, if all the genealogical inter. pretatiims of eyery kinship term be plotted on an appropriate genealogical pattern from the basis of a brother and a sister in one generation line as Egos, each af these terms will be found to be associated significantly with one recur- ring unit in the pattern. This is a demonstration of the correlation of social structure and kinship termindlogy, It is more reasonable to postulate that a system of customary marriages between family groups determined social structure and therefore kinship terminology. than the alternative improbability that the members vf a society elaborated a system of kinships to enable the obligations and privileges of certain social functions to be allocated to certain individuals and so deter- mined their social structure. Also, in primitive societies. it is most improbable that the acquisition of wives was limited by principles of eugenics; nor does it seem possible that abstract ideas of the unity of the sibling and the lineage groups were compelling farees in determining He sexual associations of men and women, It is suggested that three general principles have applied with paramount imypovtanee to all classificatory kinship systems: 1. Although the fundamental social unit of the family is based on sexual ass@ciation, sexual compstitiun is the most disrupting force which social asso- ciatlons can experience. Therefere the elimination of sexual competition within the Family unit must have been always a basic principle in shaping the de- velopment of human societies. It is the most obvious reason for the institution of exogamy. 2. The avoidance of sexual competition between father and son is of mujor inpertynce in maintaining the integrity of the local family group, 3. The third principle is that in the homan mind prohibitory ideas tend ty radiate and involve associated concepts. Kinship terms, which have the signi- fiewnce uf warning labels against sexual competition within the family, tend to be applied to families of associated or collateral lineages. The operation uf this principle is fostered by the institution of totemism, — The first of these principles is axiomatic, evidence ifi support of the seconsd and the third will be given in this paper. CLASSIFICATORY SYSTEMS OF KINSHIP 13 Classificatory systems reached their most complete development in Aus- tralian aboriginal societies, which also exhibited many hallmarks of primitiveness owing to the isolation which they shared with their native fauna. Their systems, therefore, provide an exceptionally appropriate field for investigation. The members of all these societies were organised in totemic clans and family groups, and the clans were usually combined in two exogamous moieties. (Exact tribal boundaries are detailed in Tindale’s (1940) map.) Throughout Australia, with few exceptions, a man could marry only women of his own or his grandson's generation, and kinship terms alternated in and with alternate generations. Moieties were a feature of most Australian socicties, and the sineital function of the moiety is the demarcation of the clans, whose women the father or the mother's brother could marry, from those which the son or the sister's son could marry. The socictics which divided moieties into named classes (sections) made the first division emphasise this distinction of alternate generations. In the Kamilaroi tribes of New South Wales marriage customs sometimes ignored the usual prohibition of marriage within the moiety and named class division of the same generation, but the class divisions defined sharply the prohibition of marriage between ulternate generations as is shown in Figs. 1] and 2. Dilbt Aupathin 1. A a B b MURRI maths KUMBO butha 2. B a A b IPPALE kubbitha KUBRBI ippotha 1, A a B b MURKL matha KUMBO butha Fig. L Lili Kuputhin 1. A a B b MURRT matha KUMBO butha 8, A a B b KUBBI kubbitha TPPAL ippatha 1, A a B b MURRI maths KUMBO butha Fig. 2 Over a large region in South and Western Australia alternate generations were distinguished as named groups. Many of these societies were even with- out moieties, but where the western peoples adopted conflicting systems of class nomenclature. these were so adjusted that a mother’s class never hecame that of a wife (Elkin, 1940, p. 326). All these facts seem to be significant in relation to the second principle mentioned above. The prevalent custom throughout Australia, with the exception of some northern coastal districts, was that women were exchanged in marriage (a primitive feature ), and that the marrying pairs were cousins “not too close up”, in other words, that the women should not be of the men’s father's or mother’s clans, The marriage diagram expressing the simplest form of such a custom is that of Fig, 3. 1. Al=bl A2=h2 2, Ail=b2 AZ=bl Tig. 3 i if. K. FRY The genealogical pattern corresponding to this marriage Eras in a palri- lineal society is illustrated in Fig, 4, which is also the genealogical puttern typical of a system of marriages between second cousins, AY Al wd hl AZ az B2 h2 Al hl RI wl Ag b2 B2 ol Al n2 Bh b2 A2 al B2 bl Al he BI a2 Az bt B? ul Al ot BL bl Az a2 Bh b2 Fig. 4 om eS This pattern is asvmmetrical in regard to male and female lineages. Matri- lineal and patrilineal forms of this pattern appear to represent the basic social struatnre of the majority of aboriginal societies; that is, they are systems of the Iroquois type, with sister exchange, and with the wife's clan distinguished from that of first cousins. This is known in Anstralia as the Aranda type. Aboriginal kinship systems can be grouped under two headings, those asso- cinted with the inland tribes, and those asseciated with the marginal coastal tribes (cf. Davidson, 1926), The inland systems were matrilineal in the eastern half of the continent, patrilineal in the western half. They were characterised by division into moieties aml usnally also into named classes (sections ). ‘The marginal coastal tribes often had no miviety divisions. They were usually patrilineal, but matrilineal regions existed in recent times in the Swan River district of Western Australia and in the north-western corner of Arnhem Land, A former larger extension of these matrilineal arcas is suggested by the facts that kinship terms such as kemi, kaka, neandri, nupa, and wmnali, or their analogues, are common to the matrilineal tribes of South Australia and the tribes of southern Western Australia: also in northern Western Australia the class af the child of an irregular marriage was determined by that of the mother. The norma] genealogical pattern of Tig. 4 being asymmetrical in regard to male and female lines of descent, the pattern of kinship terms tukes a sume- what different form in matrilineal and patrilineal societies. It is reasonable to expect some simpler forms of kinship terminology as a compromise when trihal unils inlermarry across the borders of these zones (Fry, 1934), Iti the inland patrilineal regions of the Northern Territory and Western Australia where inhospitable conditions could support only a sparse pupula- tion, which made every individual important, the lanship terminologies conform most accurately to the Aranda pattern. Further, kinships in those areas were stabilised and pin-poimted by the development of systems af eight named sub- classes which conform completely with the pattern of Fig, 4, Marriage rules, therefore, in these societies can he described in positive terms related to all of the four male bneages of the Aranda genealogical pattern, e.g., mother's- mother’s-brother's-danghter's-danghter marriage, and so on. The usual condi- tion, as Firth (1930) has painted ont, is “the kinship principle enters not as 2 determinant but merely as w barrier against the union of close relatives”. The marginal coastal tribes were often of wu stockier build than the inland peoples, which might be a racial feature or related to a better food supply. They usudly did not practice circumcision. The clan organisation at times wns emphasised by the application of one kinship term to all the members of the clan irrespective of generation. This again could be @ racial feature, or dependent upon a denser population due to a better food supply. U exemplifies Radcliffe Brown's principle of the unity of the lineage proup, but as a result rather than CLASSIFICATORY SYSTRMS OF KINSIINT bb as a cause of the social structure. Another possible featuce of these systems was the maximal extension of marriage prohibition to any known relative by bluod, exemplifying the third principle suggested earlier in this paper. Under these circumstances the significance of the distinction hetween the children of brother and sister diminished aud wis reflected in the kinship terminulogy, The kinship terrainology of mast of these marginal tribes was basically of the Aranda type with the exception of some northern tribes who did not practice sister exchange in marriage. But this tendency to fail to distinguish between the children of brother and sister meant that cross-cousins could be equated with siblings. Consequently, the kinship system approximated to the Ilawaiian type. Flkin (1939, p. 215) drew attention to this feature in deserilring the kinship system of the tribes between the Bight and the Musgrave and Petermann Ranges, andl suggested that these systems be known as the Aluridja type. Other examples of systems of the Aluridju type are the Bardi (EJkin, 1938a), the Daly River Tribes (Stanner, 1933, 1936), the Kattang (Elkin, 1992b), and the Kurnai (Howitt, 1904). The Yaralde (Radcliffe Brown, 1918) emphasised the clan organisation in their terminology, bat did not adopt the Aluridja-type charae- teristics. ladeliffe Brawn described the Karieva kinship system (1913), as the type uf a system based on a dominant custom of marriages of first cousins, and (1936, p. 452) as the norm of am earlier form of sociely in the evolutionary sense than the systems af second-cousin marriages typified hy the Aranda, If, however, lis male- and female-speaking kinship terms be integrated in one table (Fry, 1950), the Karlera kinship system conforms basically to the Aranda type but with Aluridja-type characteristics. The Kariera class system is frankly of Aranda type, P AL the time of white colonisation the western and northern marginal trihes were apparently in the process of adapting named totemic groupings (phratries ) te the named class (section) kinship divisions which were diffusing from Central Australia. fhe Swan River tribes (Grey, 1941; Salvado, 1866), Ingarda (Rad- cliffe Brown, 1930, p. 213), Bardi (Elkin, 19322), Iwaidja (Wilson, 1835; Spencer, 1914), and the Melville Tslanders (Spencer, 1914; Hart, 1930) may be cited us examples uf tribes with a phratry organisation uninfluenced by the innovation uf classes, and the Mardudhunera, Kariera (Radcliffe Brown, 1913), Karadjevi, Nyul-Nvul, and Lunga (Elkin, 19324) as examples of comprornise systems. Unfortunately, tie coastal tribes bore the brunt of the earliest conflict with colonisation with consequent detribalisation in most cases hefore adequate re- words of their social systems were atternpted. As mentioned previously, some of the marginal tribes on the northern coasts of Australia practised unilateral marriages and sister-exchange, if aecurring, was rather complicated, Miss McConnel (1934, 1940, 1950) recorded the Wik- nyunkan system of this type which is based on marriage with the muther's younger brother's daugliter, and mirriage forbidden with the father’s sister’s daughter, Miss McConnel recognised six lineages in the social structure of this tribe, distinguished by their relative seniorities, The kinship tenminology, huw- ever was relatively simple. The Yir-Yoront was an analogous system (Sharp, 1934). Warner (1930) described the Murnyin system based on marriages unilaber- ally with the mother’s brother's dapghter. This kinship terminology is very complicated. I published (1950) a marriage diagram expressing a eyele of marriages between cight clans. the genealogical pattern of which confurmed accurately with Warner's complex Murngin Kinship terminology. 16 It. K, FRY This marriage diagram is illustrated in Fig. 5, and the corresponding genea- logical pattern in Fig. 6, b?:B2=22;A2—b3;B3 lL I Al ad al AS I ll Bl:bl —A4d:ad4 =P sh4 in all generations. Fig, 5 Al al Bl bl AZ a2 B2 b2 AB’ ad LBB bB At at BS bt Al bl Bl ad AS b2 B2 ol AS bS BB a2 Ad bt HA ad Al a4 BI bt A? al B2 BI AS a2 BS b2 At vB BA bF Al b+ Bl aB AQ bl B2 at AB b2 BI al At LB BA v2 : b4 AS al BS bl At w2 Bt b2 Al b38 Ri a2 AZ bt BR2 a8 AB bl BS at At BY BS al Al a2 Bl b2 A® a8 B2 b3 AB ad BS be Ad wl Bt Dl Al b2 Bi wl AZ b3 B2 a3 AB b4 BS ad At Hl BA at Al al Bl b1 A a2 B2 b2 AS ad BS b3 At ad4 BA bs Fig, 6.—The prefixed numerals refer to the olass system. et ee Oe > _ i TREE? oo I oS w = ws » je x Ww I did not recognise the significance of this pattern, but later (1957) realised that it could be explained by the Wikmunkan system, but that the seniority principle had been extended a stage beyond that of the Wikmumkan. Subsequently I learned that Laurence and Murdock (1949) had preceded me in publishing a description of the Murngin system as the expression of a cycle of marriages between eight clans. Radcliffe Brown (1951) strongly op- posed this interpretation, claiming that it demanded a system of marriages with a father’s father’s sisters dauyhter’s daughter's husband's sister's husband's sister's husband's sister's husband’s sister's hushand’s sister, which Warner failed to observe. This genealogical sequence can be followed readily in Diagram 6 and the woman in question will be found to be also a mother’s brother's daughter who is the normal marriage partner observed by Warner. Radcliffe Brown's pci is therefore evidence in support of the interpretation which he sought to. refute. If the male and female symbols of the marriage diagram of Fig. 5 be trans- posed as in Fig. 7, the corresponding genealogical pattern wil] take a slightly different form from that of Fig. 6, but will present identical characteristics. B2ibY=Azw2—BIib3 l| al A3 Al a3 { | i ;Bl=ad;A4 =)4:Bd Fig. 7 These junior marriage systems provide another mechanism whereby sexual compétition between father and son is avoided. Also, Miss McConnel recorded that when a man marries a woman of his grandson's generation, she must be of senior lineage in that generation. If the marriages of Fig. 5 and 7 take place in alternate generations, father and son marry into alternate clans as in the Aranda system. The genealogical pattern corresponding to such a marriage diagram is of a type expressing a system of marriages with the father’s sister's daughter but not with the mother’s brother's daughter. Miss McConnel (1950) has descrihed the Kandyu, neigh- bours of the Wikmunkan, as a society based on marriages with the father’s younger sister's daughter, CLASSIFICATORY SYSTEMS OF KINSIIY 17 It is interesting to note in these last two systems, where a man marries unilaterally a cross-cousin of junior status, that the forbidden cross-cousin is termed cousin-mother, and that her hushand by the Wikmunkan is called father, and by the Kandyu elma, which is a term applied to a senior lineage, There is a hint here of the characteristics of the Omaha-Crow systems. Sharp (1935) has noted the kinship system of the tribes on Mornington Island and the near-by coast of the Gulf of Carpentaria. Their marriages and kinship terminology normally follow the patrilineal Aranda pattern. Iowever, three types of irregular marriages are permitted. The first is marriage with the mather's brother’s daughter. The second is marriage with the daughter of the mother’s brother's son and is associated with the use of the term cousin-mother far the mother’s brother's daughter, As mother's brother's son's daughter is normally son's wife and te:med mother, the term mother may be applied to three successive generations of women in the mother’s brother’s clan, The third form of irregular marriage is with a wife's father’s sister or with a wife's brother's daughter, In the first and third types of irregular marriages the children are classified in the semi-moiety alternate to that of the father (e.g. A2 instead of Al). The first and second types entail members of the mother’s brother's clan being termed wife's father in two successive generations if both types of may- riage are contracted with that clan. The husband of cousin-mother is termed father. The kinship system of these tribes therefore inclucles several charac- teristics of an Omaha system in association with their irregular marriages. The Kandyu marriage diagram exhibits one form of a permutation of uni- Jateral marriages in alternate generations. Another type is that of Fig. 8. b2:HI=a2:A2—hsiBs h4:54=02:A2=bliBl : | | | ool a3 a Al a3 al At al As ll \ | | Bisbl—Atnds=RP4;ba B3:b9—Adint— BBs bY Pig, &. The genealogical pattern of a patrilineal system corresponding to this mar- riage diagram is illustrated in Fig. 9. Love (1941, 1950) has supplied data which provide sixty-five gencalogical placements of kinship terms for the Worora tribe, a neighbour of the Ungarinyin and with the same organisation (Elkin, 19322). The pattem of Fig, 9 con- forms to all of these complex placements, which is reasonable evidenve far its validity as a graphic representation of the Worora social structure. The Worora, like other systems of the Omaha type, have a marriage custom whereby “a man may, and among the older men often has done so, marry an- other man’s sister and his daughter” (Love, 1950). The Worora also apply nue term, waid, to all the male members of the wife's clan irrespective of gencra- tion, which is a characteristic of the Omaha-Crow systems, The Worora also AL al BI b) A2 av Be b2 AD w8 BS b3 As at BA ht Al bl Bl at A2 b2 KB2 al AK bS TBS af Ad bt Bt wB Al az Bl bY A2 43 B2 b3 AB ad BR D4 Ad oT BY bl Al bY Bl al AZ bé B2 wf AS bt BB aS Ad HI Bt at Al oo8 Bl bd 42 at Be bt Ad «al BS bt Ad v2 Bt D2 Al 63 Bt s® 42 bt BY aX® AS bL BS ot Ad 2 Ba al Al at Bl bt AP al BE bt AS a2 EB b3 Ad nv BA ho Atobd Bi a® AY bl BE at AS b2 BS sl At bB Rt az Al al BI bi A® a2 Be b? AZ ad BI bS At ad BS bad Fiv, 9 HBO RSE oHS H, K, FRY 18 apply the same terms (ibaia and ibanga) to paternal eross-cousins and tu nephew and niece, again an Omaha feature. The kinship terms of the mother’s father’s clan, however, alternate in alternate generations, and the maternal cross- eonsins are equated with Egos generation, although the wives uf a mother's brother, his son, and his son's son are all termed mother's mother ( kadjanja). The Ungarinyin apply the terms kandingi, mother's brother, and ngadzi, mother, to all members of the mother’s, father's clan irrespective of generation. Con- sequently, maternal cross-cousins are equated with mother’s brother and mother, the paternal erass-cousins (malengi) again being equated with nephew and niece. The Ungarinyin kinship system therefore comes into full conformity with the type examples of an Omaha system. There js one point in Elkin’s description (1932a) of the Ungarinyin kin- ship system which can be challenged, He states that as the mother’s mother (keiingt) is the mother of ngadzi, mother’s mother’s brothers daughter cannot be « wife's mother. But actually ngadst is of the clan kandingi, which is no reason why a woman of the clan toolmingi could not be a wife’s mother, Elkin dues nut give the term for mother’s mother’s brother, but by analogy with the Worpra system it should be wolmingi, The uvoidanve vf sexual competition between father and son is particularly interesting in these Jast-mentianed tribes. [f Egu be 1AL his wives are Ib? arid 2b2, whose sons respectively are 2Al and 1A3. The wives of 2A1 are 2b4 and Ib4; the wives of 1A3 are lh4 and 2b, The clans of many American Indian tribes were much more numerous than thase of Australia, It is interesting to note that if the kinship terms of the Fux tribe (Tax, 1955), which is of the Omuha type, be plotted on the Worora genealogical pattern, all the lineages noted by Radcliffe Brown (1941) and many mare will be found to be aligned with the clan lineages of Fig. 9. Nu examples of the Crow type of system have been described in Aus- tralia. Spencer (1914) recorded marriages with the widow of a futher and the widow of a mother’s brother in the Kakadu tribe, but there is no evidence that these were customary practices or that they influenced the social structure. Probably these marriages were of no more signficance than the information given to me by members of the detribalised Wailpi people that marriage with the lather's sister was in ordet. Kinship terminologies of the Crow Lype, such as thase of the Banks Islanders (Codrington, 1891) or the Cherokee (Gilbert, 1955), da not conform toa matrilineal version of the Mutnyin pattern, but fall into neat lincages when charted on a matrilineal form of the Worora pattern, This suggests that although the Kinship terminology may be influenced by marriage with the tmother’s brather’s widow or xite, yet the social structure on which the terminology is founded is determmed by marriages with women of clans which are more distantly related, This suggestion is supperted by a stutement of Codrington (1891, p. 244) concerning the Banks Islanders: “a woman when once the proper payment has heen made for her, belongs to those that have paid, the family generally: hence a man, as In the story of Ganaviris, will set up his sister's son in lite by handing over to him one uf his wives. not because the young mar has a right to his uncle’s wives, but because the woman is already in the Emily”. The coastal tribes of Cape York Peninsula apparently exhibited another exaniple of the operation uf the principle of the radiation of prohibitory ideus, Miss MeConnel (1950) las described the Kinship systems of the Yaraidyana and Nggamiti tribes. These systems are apparently dependent upon the mar riage of women of one lineage in three successive generations to men of different lineawes (Fry, 1957). CLASSIFICATORY SYSTEMS OF KENSITIP 19 REFERENCES Comuneron, R. H,, 1891. The Melanesians, Oxford, Davey 0. §., 1926. The Basis of Suuial Organization in Australia, Amer, Anthropologist, 28 +P, 033, ; Tiatn, A. P., 19328. Social Organisation in the Kiraberley District, North Western Australia, Oceania, 2 (3). p, 296. Fram, A. P., 1939b. Notes on the Social Organisation of the Worimi, a Kattany-spenkiny people, Oceaniu, 2 (3), p. 359, ‘ Eves, A. P., 1938-1940, Kinship in South Australia, Oceunia, 8 (4), 9 (1), 10 (2), (3), (4). Finvn, H., 1930, Marriage and the Classificatory System of Relationship, J,K, Auth, Inst., 60, p. 235. Fay, H. K., 1931. A ‘Table Showing the Class Relations of the Aranda, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 55, pp. 12-19. Fry, H. K., £934. Kimship and Descent among the Australian Aborigines, Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 58, pp. 14-21. Fay, H. K.. 1950, Aboriginal Social Systems, Trans. Roy. Suc. S. Aust.. 73, pp, 282-294, Fnv, If. K., pet Concerning Aboriginal Marriage and Kinship, ‘Iraus, Mey, Soc. S. Aust, 80. pp. 1-16, Givver, W. H., 1955. Eastern Cherokee Social Oryanisation, in Serial Anthropology vf North American Tribes, ed. F. Eggan, Chicago. Gary, G., 1841, Journals of Two Expeditions in North West and Western Australia, London, Haar, G. W.M,, 1990. The Tiwi of Melville and Bathurst Islands, Ocenia, 1 (2), p, 167. Keita, t4 1897, Zur Urgeschichte der Khe. Zeitschrift fii Vergleichende Rechtswissen- achaft, 12, p. 187. (Quoted from Rivers, 1414.) Knorunn, A. L,, 1909. Classifieatory Systems af Relationship, JA, Anus, Tnst., 89, p. 58, Launenou, W. E., anp Murnocr, GC. P., 1949, Murngio Social Organisation, Amer, Anthito- nologint, 51, p. 58. Love, J. BR. B., 1941. Worora Kinship Gestires, Trims. Roy. See. $. Aust. 65, pp, 108-109, Lovy, J. BK. B,, 1950, Worora Kinships, ‘Trans, Roy. Soe, S. Aust., 78, pp. 260-281. Mcdoesnet, U. H., 1934. The Wikmunkun and Allied Tribes of Cape York Periusula, Oceunia, 4 (3), yp. 20. McCants U. > emis Social Organisation of the Tribes of Cape York Peninsula, Oceania, 10 . pb 434. SECON NED ag 1950, Junior Marriage Systems: A Comparative Survey, Oceania, 2b 2), p. 107. McLennan, J. F., I876. Studies in Ancient History, Lumlon Moncan, L. H., 1871. The Systems of Consangninity and Affinity, Smithsontua Contrilen- tions to Knowledee, 17, New York, pp, 12, 143. Tancurre Buown, A. R., 1913, Three Tribes of Western Australia, J-R, Anth. Inst, 43, p, 143. Rapcuurre Baown, A. R., 1918. Notes on the Sacial Organisation of Austrslian Tribes, )-R. Anth. lnst., 48, p. 222. Rape ge Soya i R., 1930, The Sacial Organisation of Australian Trihes, Ocrania, | 1), (2), (3), (4). Hasicctte Beawae AS ., 1941, ‘Yhe Study of Kinship Systems, JW. Anth. Inst. Tl, p. L. Naneaacre Brown, A. KR. 1951. Murngin Social Organisation, Amer, Anthrupologist, 53, p, 57. Rivexs, W, H. R., 1914. Kinship and Social Organisation, Tendon. Sauwapno, K,, 1886. New Norcia and Leschenault Bay; in The Australian Race, el, E, M. Curr, Melbourne, Val, 1, p. 320, Snapp, L., 1934. The Social Organisation of the Yir-Yuront Tribe, Cape York Peninsula, Oceania, 4 (4), p. 404, Snare, L,, 1935. Semi-Moietios in North Western Queensland, Oceania, 6 (2), p. 158 Spencer, B., 1914. Native 'Pribesx of the Northern Territory of Austratia, London, Svanner, W. EB. H,. 1933. The Daly River Tribes, Oceana, 3 (4), p. S77. Siannen, W. E, H., 1936. Murinbata Kinship and Totemism, Oceania, 7 (2), p. Lob. Tax, §., 1955. The Social Organisation of the Fox Indians; in Sueia! Anthropology of North American Tribes, cd, F. Meggan, Chicago. ’ Yirpare, N. B., 1940, Distribution of Australian Aboriginal Tribes; A Pield Survey, ‘Tras. Roy. Soc. $ Aust., 64, pp. 140-231, Wannen, W. L., 1930. Morphology and Function of the Australian Murngin ‘ype af Kinship, Amer, Anthropolopist, N.S., 82, p, 207. Winson, T. B., 1835. Narrative of a Voyage Rownd the Warld, Landon, p. 163. CORRIGENDUM Tn my paper Trans. Roy. Soe. &. Aust, 1957, 80, p. 4, line 3, instead of refovenee (Matthews and Biveritt, 1900), substitute (Matthews, iguay, the latter reference im full being: Mat rucws, A, H., P00, Marriage und Descent umong the Australian Aborigines, Journ. Roy. Sov. N.S.W., 34, p. 126, SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA PARAPHAGIC UPON MILLIPEDES AND COCKROACHES AND ON BEETLES OF THE FAMILY PASSALIDAE BY H. WOMERSLEY Summary A new species of the genus Heterocheylus Lombardini, 1926, H. lombardinii sp. nov., is described from under the elytra of a Passalid beetle from Mt. Lamington, Queensland. This is the first record of the genus from Australia. The only other two described species are H. fusiformis Lomb., 1926, from Brazil and H. lomani Tragardh, 1950, from Africa. A key to the three species is given. SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA PARAPHAGIC UPON MILLIPEDES AND COCKROACHES AND ON BEETLES OF THE FAMILY PASSALIDAE By H. Womerstey* [Read 9 July 1959] SUMMARY A new species of the genus Heterocheylus Lombardini, 1926, H. lombar- dinii sp. noy., is described from under the clytra of a Passalid beetle from Mt. Lamington, Queensland. ‘This is the first record of the genus from Australia, The only other two described species ure H. fusiformis. Lomb., 1926, from Brazil and H, lomant Triigardh, 1950, from Africa. A key to the three species is given. Pt. 3.—-The faurnily Heterocheylidae (Acarina-Trombidiformes ) Family PSEUDOCHEYLIDAE Oudemans, 1909. Oudemans, A. C,, 1909, ‘Lijds. y. Entom,, 52 (1-2): pp. 19-61. Subfamily Herrrocieyiar Triigardh, 1950, Tragardh, I., 1950, Entom. Tidsk,, 71 (2), p: 109, Genus ITETEROCHEYLUS Lombardini, 1926, Lombardini, G., 1926, Boll. Soc. Entom. ltal., 57 (1), pp. 160-1. Type Heterocheylus fusiformis Lom., 1926. In 1926 Lombardini erected this genus for H, fusiformis n. sp. found on a Passalid beetle from Brazil. In this paper he described and figured only the female, but later (Mem. Soc, Entom. Ital, 17 (1), p. 120, 1938) he briefly de- seer and figured what he regarded as the nymphal male, also from a Brazilian assalid. In 1950 Tragardh described and figured a second species H. lomuni n, sp. from a single specimen from a Passalid trom the Belgian Congo. Trigardh placed fusiformis in the subfamily Heterocheyletinae, a mis-spelling for Hetero- cheylinae, now. raised to family rank as the Heterocheylidae. In my present studies of the Acarina paraphagic on Passalid beetles, millipedes, etc., from Australia and New Gninea, a third species, I. lombardinii sp. nov., has been found on a Passalid (Mastochilus sp.) from Mt. Lamington, Queensland, December, 1948 (eoll. H.W.), Lt is represented by three females and three nymphs (? males), now in the South Australian Museum collections, Heterncheylus lombardinii sp. nov. Text Fig, 1, AJ Holotype female.—Fig. A-H. Shape as figured and as in other species. Length overall 638, of idivosoma 5222; width of idiosoma 278). Dorsal—Gnathosoma somewhat triangular, but slightly swollen apically just behind the mandibles, with a pair of minute setae immediately behind the chelicerae. Propodosoma anteriorly with two pairs of widely separated minute * South Australian Museum. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust, (1960), Vol. &3. 22 I. WOMERSLEY setae, the posterior pair slightly nearer together than the anterior pair, posteriorly and near to the posterior margin with a pair of closely adjacent conspicuous clavate papilliform setae. Hysterosoma with four segments, the anterior (J) somewhat hexagonal in shape, as long as wide, with a long 150, lateral seta at Fig. 4 Heterocheylus lombardinii sp. nov. A-T1. Mernale; A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, chelicerae; D, palp; FE, leg I: F, tibia and tarsus leg I; G, tibia and tarsis Ieg IV; HW, genitalia. [-J. Nymph: I, dorsal view; J, ventral view. the lateral angles; slightly in front of these and 132, apart is a pair of minute setae and midway between these and the posterior end of the segment is an- other pair equally distant apart; segment Il is rather collar-like, slightly more than three times as wide as lony, with a long setae 127, in each posterior angle SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GLINEA 23 and with a minute seta in front of each of these; segment UI is about twice as long as LL, with tapering sides and with two pairs of long setae, a mid-lateral one on each side 130) long and a submedian subposterior pair 108, long: segment IV is more iviangular, hilohed with a longitudinal incision, a pair of lateral setze 127 long and a pair of apical setac 66, long sitnated one on the tip of each lobe, The mandibles are smalt with the chelicerac outwardly curved und edentate, Falpi as figured, curved inwards and forceps like; femoral segment large, as broad as Jong with a long 62). dorsal seta reaching to tip of palp; next segment as long as broad at its base with a finer dorsal seta 33, long; the apreal seyment is a strong edentate claw wilh an inner basal aceessory tooth and 2 pair of minute sctae, Ventral.—Gnathosome with a pair of minute setae just behind the chelicerae ind a longer one on each side at the base of the palpi. Prepodosomue withiut cepimera to leg T, but with a seta just behind the basal segment of the leg; epimera of leg TL soughly rectangular, its inner margins confluent with each other in the medial lme for about three-fourths of the length, the posterior mirgins are outwardly oblique a little in front of the propodosomal suture and not confluent therewith, there is .a short seta on each side placed medially and near to the inner margins and not on shicldlets. Hysierosoma with the epimera of legs ILL and IV coalesced to form Jong shiclds separated medially by a strip of enticle only slightly narrower than the shields, cach shield is fue- nished with one seta near the anterior margin and ane in the middle of epimera ILI, near the posterior end of the intervening, yentral strip is another pair of sumtll setae: posterior of legs TV, segnuenis 1, TE and FV are confluent to Porn a single unit, which is tapering, and which bears the elongate genital orifice, Legs—All 7-seemented, short, fairly stout and tapering, I-IV of equal length L974; I is antennaetorm, somewhat more slender than the others, and the tarsus without carnncle or claws; U-LY ave much stouter, the tarsi ending in a strong small claw-like spine which is much larger on IL than om IIT and TV. each tarsus also with a cdistinet carmmele, pack and a pir of fine minute claws. Nymph, Pig. T-J. As figured. Length entire 5800p, of ieiasoms (BAp, width idiosoma 278). Dorsal —Gnathosomy as in adult. Prapodesoma with shield completely covering dorsally, with two pairs of widely separated minute setae anteriorly as in adult, without the median posterior clavate setae of the adult but with a pair of long simple setae 108 long, $9. apart and 36. from the posterior margin. Hysterosume with four dorsal shields indicating the four segments as in the adult, but these shields except the fourth do not nearly cover the dorsal surface of the segment being surcounded laterally by longitudinal striations and separated from each other by transverse striations, the large shicld of sepment T, however, is divided medially into lwe parts, of which the anterior is reetangular, wider than long, and slightly longcr than the posterior part, Il ts furnished with one pair of minute setae situated in the anteru-lateral angles; the posterior part of this shicld tapers posteriorly to a margin of about half the wrilth of the anterior margin, ib is wider thau long and also furnished with wo pair of minute setae in the antero-lateral angles, the pair of long lateral setae, 1i8u long, are situated on small shields on the extreme margins of the hedy away from the shicld itself; the shield on segment LL is rather transversely oval, nol extending right across the segment and furnished with one pair af sub- lateral long 1044 setae; the shield of segment U1 is similar hut narrower, with one pair ob lateral setac 75 Tong and a pair of subposterior setae T3y long; 24 H. WOMERSLEY the shield of segment IV covers the whole segment, is bilobed with a longi- tudinal fissure as in the adult and with two pairs of long setae 56 and 33u. Legs.—As in the adult, all 1744 long: the claw-like spine on tarsi is small und of equal size on legs U-LY. Veniral—No epimera to leg I. Epimera of Jeg IT roughly rectangular, not touching in the medial line and the posterior margin not confluent with the propodosomal suture, with one small scta in the medial angles, Epimera of legs {11 and [V confluent as in the adult forming two wide longitudinal shields separated hy a narrower strip of the venter with distinct longitudinal striations, each shield has one small seta in the epimeral area of leg IU, and there is an- other pair at the posterior end of the intervening striated strip. There is only a single roughly quadrate shield on segments I] and III together which is furnished with one pair of small subposterior sctae, this shield is encircled by striations. Seyment [V is as figured, bilobed as in the adult. Remarks.—This species is readily scparated in the adult from the type species H. fusiformis Lomb. from Brazil in the pair of propodosomal clavate setae being set close together, In his species H, lomani, Tragardh was unable to see these setae, but this species differs from both fusiforniis and lombardinii in that the posterior margins of the epimera of legs IJ are confluent with the propodosomal suture, Lombardini in his description of the nymph regards his specimen as a “nympham maris”. This is somewhat hypothetical. In his figure he does not delineate any shiclds dorsally on the segments of the hysterosoma, but as. he probably failed to notice their outlines by the striations it cannot be assumed that they were not present in his specics. He does not figure the ventral surface. Modifying Tragardh’s key to. the species (fusiformis and lomani) the three species now known may be separated in the adult stage as follows: Key to the species of Heterocheylus, 1. Posterior margin of epimera I] wblique and not confluent with propodosomal suture, 2 Posterior margin of epimera LI straight and contiguous with propodosarmal suture, Ventral strip between epimera HT and IV of equal width throueh- wut—Belgian Congo. H, lomani Trig,, 1950. 2, Clivate setae on propodosoma closely adjacent. Ventral strip between epimera TT and [V slightly narrower than width of epimnera and almost equally wide throughout — Australia, H. lombardinii sp. nov. Clavate setae on propodosoma widely separated by about four diameters. Ventral strip wider than epimera IIL and YV und much wider anteriorly than posteriorly — Brazil. HA. fustformis Soomb,, 1926, It is a pleasure to name the above new species after the creator of the genus, Prof, G, Lombardini of Florence, Italy. REFERENCES Topeeanianit, G., 1926. Duo neva Genera Acarorun:— Boll, Soc. Entom, ital., 38 (f-I0), p. 160. Lomaaroint, G., 1938. “Acari novi", Ment. Soe, Ent, ital. 17 (1), n. 44, Tracanpn, I,, 1950. Description of a new species of Heteroeheylus Lomburdini from Afrier van dd on the classification of the Psendocheyletidae —Entom. Tijds, Tl (2), pp. 04-110, NEW RECORDS OF SPECIES OF LEPTOLAELAPS (ACARINA, MESOSTIGMATA) FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND BY H. WOMERSLEY Summary The New Zealand species of Leptoluelaps, L. reticulatus Evans, 1957, is now recorded from moss from S. Australia, and L. macquariensis (Worn., 1937) is recorded from New Zealand. The hitherto unknown male of macquariensis is described. NEW RECORDS OF SPECIES OF LEPTOLAELAPS (ACARINA, MESOSTIGMATA) FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND By H, Womersiry* [Read 9 July 1959] SUMMARY The New Zealand species of Leptolaelaps, L. reticulstus Evans, 1957, is now recorded from ynoss froin S. Australia, and L. macquariensis (Wom., 1937) is recorded from New Zealand, ‘The hitherto unknown male of macqyueartensis is described. The genus Leptolaelaps Berlese, 1918, has recently been revised by Evans, 1957, and a key given for the six known species. These are elegans Berl. (the genotype ) from the Transvaal, lambda Evans from Knysna, capensis Evans rom Cape Province, and lawrencei Evans from Natal, reticulatus Evans from New Zealand and macquariensis (Womersley) from Macquarie Island. All the known species are free living Mcsostigmata occurring in moss and humus litter, except perhaps macquariensis which was recorded from “between tide marks, West Coast, Macquarie Island, 1913”, In the present paper two of the known species are recorded, namely, Leptolaelaps reticulatus Evans from South Australia, and L. macquariensis (Wom.) from New Zealand. Fresh drawings of these species are given, chiefly for accessibility by Australian students. Genus LurrotarLars Berlese, 1918 Leptolaelans (subgen. of Wypeaspis Can.) Berlese, 1918, Redia 13, p, 122; emend. Evans, G. O., 1957, Ann. Natal Mus., 14 (1), p45. (Type Leptalaelaps elegans Berl,, 1918.) Leptolaelaps reticulatus Evans Fiw. 1, A-E Leptolaelupa reticulatus Evans, 1957, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.. 14 (1), p, 45, Specimens of this. New Zealand species have recently been obtained from moss from Upper Sturt, S. Australia (3 females), 24/8/58 (G. F. Gross), and moss from Myponga, $. Australia (3 females), 4/11/58 (H.W.). A comparison of the accompanying figures of this Australian material with the description and figures of Evans of the New Zealand specimens confirms the specific identification. The only slight and unimportant differences are the lighter reticulation of the ventral shiclds and the prolongation of the sternum scarcely reaching the posterior margin of coxae Ill. Also the lateral selerites of the genital shield, which in Evans’ description and figure project posteriorly beyond the lateral margins of the shield as far as the posterior pair of adjacent lateral cuticular setae, only reach as far as the first pair of these setae. The male is still unknown. The figures given here were made before a separate of Evans’ paper was received when it was thought to be a new species of Leptolaelaps Berl. * Sonth Australian Museum. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust, (1960), Vol, 83. H. WOMERSLEY Fig. 1—Leptolaelans rveticulatus Evans, female: A, ventral view; B, dorsum; C, chelicerae; D, seta of palpal tarsus; E, tectum. NEW RECORDS OF SPECIES (He LEPTOLAELAS at Leptolaelaps macquariensis (Womersley, 1937) Mig. 2, A-T Pachyloelans macquariensié Womersley, 1937, “Avaurine” in “Sel Kepts: Austrodasian Antaretiv xpecitiom, 1911-1014". Leptolaclaps macquariensis Evans, 1957, Ann. Nato) Mas, 14 (1). p46. This species was originally described and figured from a single fenule collected “Grom between tide marks, on the West Coast of Macquarie Is.", by the Austrulasian Auturetic Expedition, 1911-1914, led by the late Sir Dotiglas Mawson. Tt was placed hy Womersley in the genus Pachylaelaps Berlese, 1888, but Evans has shown that although closely allied to Pachylaelaps it is more properly to he put into Leptolaelaps Berlese, 1918. In the South Australian Museum are a female and a male specimen received some years ago from an old correspondent, Mr. Bi. D. Pritchard, and collected from moss fram Manurewa, New Zealand, 14th July, 1934. These specimens have now been studied and found to be con-specifie wath the specimen from Mueyuurie Island. The male sex has not hitherto been knowm and is herewith described and. figured, while the opportunity is taken to re-describe the female sex from the additional specimens and to give fresh figures. Re-description of female (trom the New Zealand specinien )- Dorsal shield covering entire body and underlapping narrowly on to the venter right around, with about 35 pairs of setue to 50p long, and some pares. Ventrally—The sternal shield is strongly reticulate with a more strongly marked median strip, auteriorly it is 178. wide and the median leugth ix 2028p, it is furnished with the usual 3 pairs of sctac and 2 pairs of pores, it extends posteriorly (o between coxae UL and TV; the pre-endopodal shields are trans- versely elongate with concave anterior and convex posterior margins; the meta- sternal shields are distinct. small und roughly oval with seta 50. long und at pore; the genito-yentral shield is flask-shaped with broadly rounded posteriar, and only slivbtly longer than broad, 188 by 164, it almost touches the anal shield and is furnished with only one pair of setae (genital) 30; long, the luteral sclerites are distinct and reach ta between the first and second of the adjacent lateral setae; the anal shield is pyriform and as wide ag long, the anus is situated unteriorly and the puranal setae are in line with its posterior edge; the metapodal shields are small and roughly elliptical and lie in a line between the two setae laterad of the fenito-ventral shield; on the cnticle between the venito-ventral shield und the anal is ene pair of setae and on each side laterad of the anal is anether paw of setae; the podal shields are well developed and extend slightly beyond coxue LV, and ure coalesced with the exopodal shields; the endopodal shiekls of voxsae UH und LI wre couleseed but separated by a fine suture fram those of coxae IV; the stigma lies between voxac LIL and IV and the peritreme extends te the level of voxae 1, the peritrermal shield is arrow und extends postcriad tq middle of coxae IV and at the tip it is furnished with a small pore, anteriorly the shield is coalescel with the underlapping edge af the dorsal shield. The base of the tritusternum is elongute and about 4 times as Wmg as wide, it is furnished with the usual pair of ciliated laciniae. The gnathosima is as figured with vormal arrangement of setae; the palpi are 5-segmented und 216, long with the specialised tarsal setae 2-tined; the cornicles are long und slender, 94 long, and reach almost to the tip of palpal segment TT, they are flanked by the cqually long and elongate salivary stylets. The tectum is as figured with a short median mucro and abont Y denticles on cach side, The 28 H. WOMERSLEY Fig. 2.—Leptolaelaps: macquariensis (Wom.). A-F, female: A, ventral view; B, dorsum; C, gnathosoma; D, chelicerac; E, seta of palpal tarsus; F, tectum. G-1, male; G, venter; H, mandibles; I, femur, genu and tibia leg I NEW RECORDS OF SPECIES OF LEPTOLAELAPS 29 chelae are as figured, the movable digit with two ile lg strong teeth be- tween which is a number of minnte teeth, the fixed digit has two moderate teeth and several smaller ones, with a short pilus dentalis. The legs are generally slender, I and IV being longer than the idiosoma; 1 730. long, tarsus with slender geniculate caruncle and paired claws; IT rather stouter 580» long with normal caruncle; ILL 4874 long; IV 696« long; ILL and IV more slender than If and the setae on tarsi to 70 long. Dimensions of idioyoma, length 6034, width 370... Description of Male Allotype—General facies as in female. Dorsal shield covering body and underlapping venter more than in female, especially postero- laterally (see Fig. 2G), Ventrally, the sternal, genital and ventral shields coalesced into a single shield which is broadly rounded posteriad of coxae IV and almost reaches the anal shield, anteriorly it is reticulate much as in the female, it is furnished with 9 pairs of setae and the usual pores, it is 376 long; the anal shield is 564 long by 56, wide and shaped as in the female. Gnathosoma as in female; palpi 211n long; cornicles S83. lung. The cheliccrae as figured, movable digit 66). long with only one strong tooth and furnished with a fairly thick and long spermatophoral process. Legs as in female, except that femur and genu of IL with strong processes as in Fig. 2 I, T 696, long, I 522, [I 452n, TV 626. Dimensions of idiosoma, length 5224, width 324,, Locality—One female and one male from moss, Manurewa, New Zealand, 14/7/34 (coll. E. D. Pritchard). Type.—The male allotype and the female specimen are in the collection of the South Australian Museum. The female has been dissected, the gnathosoma and mandibles on one slide and the rest of the mite on another, REFERENCES Bervasr, A., 1918, “Centiria Quarta di Avari Nuovi", Redia, 13, p. 122. Evans, G. O,, 1957. Annals Natal Mus., 14 (1), pp. 45-57. NEW RECORDS OF SPECIES OF LEPTOLAELAPS (ACARINA, MESOSTIGMATA) FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND BY H. WOMERSLEY Summary The New Zealand species of Leptoluelaps, L. reticulatus Evans, 1957, is now recorded from moss from S. Australia, and L. macquariensis (Worn., 1937) is recorded from New Zealand. The hitherto unknown male of macquariensis is described. A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES LAELAPTOSEIUS NOVAE-ZELANDIAE FROM NEW ZEALAND (ACARINA, ACEOSEJIDAE) By H. Womensiey* [Read 9 July 1959] SUMMARY A new genus Luelaploseins and a new species Li noreeselandiac are described from New Zealand. Genus LAKLAPTOSEIUS DOV. With entire dorsal shield with scabrous retirulations. Legs I and IV longer than body. Pre-endopodal shields present. Sterna) shield with three pairs of setae and reaching to middle of caxac II. Metasternal shields present with seta and pore. Genital shield with truncate base. Peritreme on the inner margin of well chitinised, strongly reticulated, wide, lateral shields which extend posteriorly beyond coxae IV. Metapodal shields conspicuous and round. Tectum denticulate, Laelapltoseius novae-zelandixe sp. n. Fig, A-I Types—Two females collected from humus from Manurewa, New Zealand, 2/9/34 (coll. E. D. Pritchard). Location—The holotype and one paratype are in the collection of the South Australian Musenm. Description—Female: A rather large, broadly oval, well sclerotised mite, Idiosoma 1088, long, 760, wide. Dorsum—Dorsal shield entire and covering the whole body with scale-like reticulations and about 32 pairs of simple setae which are fairly thick basally and tapering to a fine point to 70, long. Venter—Pre-sternal shields present, transversely ovoid; tritosternum with elungate base and a pair of ciliated lacinia; sternal shield as figured with lightly concave anterior margin and somewhat Icss so posterior margin, anterior width 197, posteriorly across arms between coxae Il and HU 235,, length in median line 188, furnished with rather strong reticulations especially medially, with three pairs of sctae to 56» long and two pairs of pores; metastermal shields con- spicuous with seta 47» long and a pore; genital shield about us long as wide, with truncate posterior marvin, leugth 210,, width across base 210y, with one pets of setae 47, long and 160, apart, with strong reticulations; immediately ehind the posterior margin is a line of four transverse lentionlar small shield- lets; the anal shield is well separated from the genital shield, it is roughly triangular, about as wide as long with rounded anterior and on each side with a conspicuous ontstanding pare on the margin; the cuticle carries about eight setae on each of which two pairs lie between the genital and anal shields; the metapodal shields are fairly conspicuous and round; the stigma lies between coxae I and 1V and the peritreme runs forward to coxae I on the inner edge of a large podal shield which extends laterally to the body margin and pos- teriorly beyond coxae IV, laterally this shield is confluent with the body margin to the shoulders, and is remarkably reticulate, length of shield 487), width 200; * South Australian Museum, Trans. Roy. Soc, 8. Aust, (1960), Vol. 83, 33 H. WOMERSLEY Gnathosoma as figured with four pairs of hypostomal setae, cornicles small: palpi with 2-tined tarsal seta, and a pair of specialised setae (Fig. Hl) on inside of genu. Chelicerae as figured, movable digit with two teeth, Fred digit with two teeth. Tectum denticulate. Legs~Generally slender, tarsi with car- uncle, a pair of claws and a pad; I and 1V as Jong as or longer than idiosoma, 1 1250p, U $49n, TIT 8394, TV 1110p, Male—Unknown. Remarks—In the form of the genital shield, and in the truncate. posterior margin of that shield, this genus is provisionally in the absence of the male placed in the family Aceosejidae Baker and Warton, 1952, as given in the key to the families of the Mesostigmata-Parasitoidea by Evans, 1957, ~ ~SNNS B Ny | , ( 1 | ) Fig. 1 Luclaptoseius novae-selandiae g, et sp. WV. Female: A, ventral surface; B, lorsum; C, chelicerae: D, pnathosoma from helow: FE, peritremal shield; F, tevtura: G, palpal tarsal seta; H, seusitlye on gwenu of palp, REFERENCES Bakrx, E, W., and Wrartox, G. W., 1952. An Introduction to Acuralazy, New Yark. Evans, G. O.. 1957, An Introduction to the British Mesostiymata (Acarina) with kevs to families and yenera, J. Linn, Soc, London, 43 (291), pp, 203-259, A SECOND SPECIES OF PRISTOLAELAPS (ACARINA, LAELAPTIDAE) FROM AUSTRALIA BY H. WOMERSLEY Summary The genus Pristolaelaps was described by Womersley, 1956, with P. tasmanicus sp. n. as genotype. Further records of this species are here given for South Australia and a second species P. obovata sp. n. is described from Victoria. A SECOND SPECIES OF PRISTOLAELAPS (ACARINA, LAELAPTIDAE) FROM AUSTRALIA By H. Womrns_ey® [Read 9 July 1959] SUMMARY The genus Pristoluelaps was described by Wornersley, 1956, with P. tas- manicis sp. n. as genotype. Further records of this species are hete given for South Australia and a second species P, obouata sp. nis described from Victoria, The genus Pristoluelaps with P. tasmanicus sp, n. as the type was described by the writer (1956) and the genus defined as follows: “Female.—Elongate oval, with undivided dorsal shield entirely covering dorsum, Palpal tarsus with 2-tined seta. Pre-endopadal shields present, Sternal shield longer than wide with three pairs of setae. Metasternal shields only represented by seta. Genital, ventral and anal shields coalesced, the combined shield widened behind coxae IV. Exopodal shields fused and ex- tending widely behind coxrae 1V. Peritremal shield separated from exopodal by a narrow line of cuticle, ending opposite coxae IV and with stigma between coxae IIT and IV. Legs slender, unarmed. Male—Unknown, Genotype—Pristolaclaps tasmanicus sp, nov.” With the discovery of the following second species of the genus, the above diagnosis requires amending in some minor details. The shape varies from elongate oval to broadly oval and the sternal shicld may be about as long as wide as well as longer than wide. Genus Prisrotariars Womersley, 1956. Pristolaglaps Womersley, 1956, “On some new Acarima-Mesostigmata from. Australia, New Zealancl and New Guinea,” J. Linn. Sou, Loudon, Zoology, 42 (228), p. 571. (Type: Pristolaelaps tasmanious sp. ney.) Pristelaelaps oboyata sp, noy- Fig: 1, A-E Types.—Holotype female and one paratype female in the collectian of the South Australian Museum. ; Locality. —Koroit. Victoria, August 23rd, 1935 (coll, BR. 'l. M. Pescott). Description of Female—A very strongly chitinised, dark brown species of broadly oval shape. PDorsum with entire dorsal shield which underlaps narrowly on to the venter, surface smoath and apparently without sclae execpt for a few minute ones on the underlapping strip. Venter.—Generally as figured and us in the genus with the genital, ventral and anal shields couleseed and expended behind coxsug LY. Pre-endopodal shields present und transversely elongate; sternal shicld about as long as broad with concave anterior margin and almost straight posterior margin, with 3 pairs of setae 47, long and in almost straight oblique lines, with 2 pairs of pores, * South Australian Museum. Trans, Roy. Soc, S, Aust, (1960), Vol. 83. 34 H. WOMERSLEY length of shield in median line 99, maximum width 197,; metasternal shields absent and only represented by the setae; genito-ventri-anal shield large and oceupying most of the venter behind coxac IV, anterior margin lightly rounded and fibrillated, expanding behind coxae IV to 300y, then rounding to include the anus, with 5 pairs of setae besides the 3 anal setac, surface faintly reticulate; endopodal shields of coxae III and IV distinct; exopodal shields coalesced and produced behind coxae IV as a triangular podal shield; metapodal shields Pristolaclaps obowata sp, nay. Female; A, yenter; B, gnathosoma from bclow; C, chelicerae; D, tined seta of palpal tarsus; F, tectum. elongate oval. Stigma between coxae IIL and 1V and peritreme running for- ward to coxae 1, on a distinct peritremal shield well separated from the exopodal shields, rather widened in the region of the stigma and extending posteriad to the margin of coxae IV. On the cuticle laterad of the genito-ventri-anal shield with 3 long setae on each side. A pair of well chitinised spermatheca are clearly to be seen (Fig. 1 A). Gnathosoma. as figured; palpi and cornicles normal. PRISTOLAELAPS FROM AUSTRALIA 35 Chelicerae as figured, movable digit with two small teeth, fixed digit with a prominent subapical tooth and four smaller ones, two on each side of the pilus dentilis. Tectum denticulate. Legs all shorter than idiosoma, I 5984 long with normal ambulacral arrange- ment, II 383y, III 360u, IV 4874; all without special armature. Dimensions of idiosoma, length 580, width 464y. Remarks.—This species differs from the genotype in the much greater sclero- tisation, its broader shape and in the length and shape of the sternal shield. Pristolaelaps tasmanicus Womersley, 1957 Pristolaelaps tasmanicus Womersley, 1957, J]. Linn, Soc. London, Zoology, 42 (228), p. 571. New Records—Originally described from Burnley, Victoria, on strawberry plants imported from Tasmania, this species has now been found in moss from: Upper Sturt, S. Australia, 19/9/58 (G, F. Gross). Naracoorte, S. Australia, 8/1/59 (P. Aitken), THE CHARNOCKITIC GRANITES AND ASSOCIATED GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA BY ALLAN F. WILSON Summary Igneous rocks from a long E.-W. belt in Central Australia vary in type from orthopyroxene granites in the Musgrave Ranges through augite-hornblende granites to hornblende granites and sphene- biotite granites in the Ayers Ranges and Kulgera Hills. Ferrohypersthene granites form large meridionally-trending discordant masses in meridionally-trending synclinoria of hypersthene granulites in the Musgrave Ranges. Field study indicates a fluid (or magmatic) emplacement of the partly crystalline granite. In the Ayers Ranges similar pseudophacolithic granite masses are hornblende-bearing (and devoid of orthopyroxene). The basement metamorphic rocks there are of amphibolite facies. A regional deep-seated E.-W. downwarp (possibly associated with deepseated E.-W. transcurrent shearing) may have been sufficient to have caused a thorough reconstitution of the basement rocks (now represented by hypersthcne-bearing, or hornblende-bearing granulites of many types), and the development of "pockets" of potential magma in favoured areas. It is further postulated that subsequent emplacement of the resulting rheomorphic masses would have been assisted by pre-existing weaknesses such as those due to the N.-S. attitude of many of the original rocks. This may explain the apparent anomaly of E.-W.-trending granites which are often found within rocks of N.-S. tectonic trend, and could throw light on some of the lineation problems in parts of Central Australia. A superimposed metamorphism (initially more thermal than dynamic) of already highly metamorphosed rocks could explain some of the "anomalous" mineralogic and textural features of certain charnockitic granulites. Thus, in the Musgrave Ranges charnockitic rocks of more than one origin have been found. The charnockitic granites, for which a part-fluid, part-metasomatic origin is postulated, differ structurally from the charnockitic granulites of the basement, for the granites have been magmatically emplaced. They also differ mineralogically, that the mafic minerals of these granites are consistently more ferriferous (and otherwise different) than the corresponding minerals of the basement rocks. This is well illustrated by the different trends of compositional tie-lines of co-existing pyroxenes in the two groups of rocks. The Ernabella Adamellite, the Ayers Ranges Adamellite, the Kulgera Adamelhte are formally named and described. Eight new chemical analyses of granites (including three of orthopyroxenic granites), much mineralogic and petrographic data, are included in this paper. THE CHARNOCKITIC GRANITES AND ASSOCIATED GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA by Attan F. Witson® [Read 9 July 1959] SUMMARY Igneous rocks. from a long E.-W. belt in Central Austealia vary in type frum orthopyroxene granites in the Musgrave Ranges through sugite-hornblende granites to hornblende granites and sphene-biotite granites in the Ayers Rauges aud Kulgera Hills, Ferrohypersthene granites form large metidionally-trending discordant masscs in meridionally4trending synelinoria_ of hypersthene granu- lites i the Musgrave Ranges, Wield study indicates « fluid (or magmatic) em- placement of the partly erystalline granite. In the Ayers Ranges similar pseudo- phacolithic grauite masses are hornblende-bearing (and devoid of orthu- pyroxenc). The basement metamorphic rocks there are of amphibolite facies. A regional deep-scated E.-W. downwarp (possibly associated with deep- seated E.-W, transcurrent shearing), may have been sulficient to have caused a thorvngh reeunstitutiun of the basement rocks (now represunted by hypers- thene-hearing, ot hornblende-hearing granulites of many types), and the de- velopment of “pockets” of potential magia ui favoured areas. It is further postulated that subsequent emplacement of the resulting rheomorphic masses would have buen assisted by pre-existing weaknesses such as thase dne to the N.-8. aititude of many of the original rocks. This may expluin the apparent anomaly of E.-W.-trending granites wlich ure often fouml within rocks of N.-S. tectonic trend, aod could throw light on some of the lineation problems in parts of Central Australia. A superimpose) metamorphism (initially more thermal than dynamic) of already highly metamorphosed roeks could explain some of the “anomalous” mineralogic and lextural features of certain char- nockitie granulites. Thus, in the Musgrave Ranges charnockitic rocks of more than one origin have been fmind. The charnockitic granites, for whiel: « part-fluid, part-meta- somatic origin is postulated, differ structurally from the charnockitie granulites of the basement, for the granites have been miagrmnatically emplaced, ‘Whey alsa differ minéralogically, im that the mafic minerals of these granites are consistently more ferriferous (and otherwise different) than the corresponding minerals of the basement rocks. This is well ilustrated by the different trends of cor- positional tie-lines of co-existing pyroxenes in the two groups of racks. The Ernabella Adsinellite, the Ayers Runecy Adamellite, the Kulgera Adamellite are formally named and described, Eight new chemical analyses of granites (including three of orthopyroxenic granites), much mineralogie and petrographiv duta, are included in this paper. INTRODUCTION Large masses Of granite occur throughout the arid mountainous country which extends E.-\W. for 300 miles along the South Australian-Northern Territory border in Centra] Australia (Fig. 1). In hand-specimen some of these granites (especially the orlhupyroxenic) camut be distinguished from typical charnock- ites of India, Others are angite-, or hornhlende-, or biotite-bearing granites, and some are very coarsely porphyritic. The granites cut a gneissic complex of granulite facies throughout much of the Musgrave Ranges, and of high amphibolite facies in the Ayers Ranges. and Kulgera Hills, * Department of Geology, University of Queensland, Australia (formerly of the De- partment of Geology, University of Western Australia, Nedlands, Western Australia }. Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust. (1960), Vol. 83. a5 ALLAN FL WILSON Brie! mention of some of the ceomorphologie feaiures of this area has heen made in other papers (Wilson, 19474, 1947b), THE FIBLD WORK The field work was done from Dee, 1943-Feb. 1944; Dec. 1945-Jan, 1946; Dec, 1918-Feb. 1949. und Jan-Feb, 1952, The feld work was hampered by bad seasons und summer heat, and by inadequate equipment and research funds. Air-photographs were available only tor the Avers Ranges for the fourth ex- redition (see foot hote, p. 39). Sone of the difficulties of mapping, this terrain Lave been mentioned elsewhere ( Wilson, 1947b, p. 196), PREVIOUS WORK Although most of the early explorers remarked on the large expanses of “granite” ovcurring in these regions, few geuloyvical details were given (eg, Giles, 1874; Gosse, 1874; and Forrest, 1875), Brown (1890) and Streich (1893) make brief mention of the coarse porphyritic granite of the Uverard Ranges, but Basedow (1905) seems to have been the first geologist to attempt a structural sytthesis of the granitic rocks of the Musgrave Block. His petrographic notes, however, are scant, Robinson (1949) has since published good descriptions of some of Basedow’s rocks. Lockhart Jack (1915) made valuable structural observations of the granitic rocks. especially of the Everard Ranges, and suggested that the granites of the Musgrave Ranges were probably co-eval with the Everard Ranges granite (p. 16), In 1947, the present author published the first of several papers dealing with petrological and structural features of the main granitic rocks of the Musgrave Ranges and the Kulgera Hills (see list of references). Sines this paper was first written, maps of parts of the Musgrave Ranges (1 inch = 4 miles) have been published (1955) by the Geological Survey of South Australia, NOMENCLATURE The classification used by Hatch, Wells and Wells (1949) is here largely adopted, In addition, a prefix to the general name “granite", or to a mare specific name (¢.g,, adamellite) is also used, thus—hypersthene adamellite, The prefix “micro” denotes a mediam-graincd rock (thus, micro-adamellite ). The term “charnockitic granite” is used here to draw attention lo the fact that sume of these granites show important similarities to the echarnockitie rocks al the type locality in Madras, India. The term has almost ontlived its usefulness. Rueks of charnockitic type normally are very dark greasy bluish grey or arevnish grey, medium-grained and coarse-grained racks with xenornorplic texture ranging (in composition) from granite through norite to pyraxenite, and characterized thronghout by the presence of orthopyroxene, Fur purposes of general description the charneckites may be referred to as acid, intermediate, basic and ultramafic in much the same way that igneous rocks have been subdivided by Hatch, Wells and Wells (1949. p. 181). For further details of characteristics of the acid and intermediate charnockites the reader is referred to Holland (1900). Washington (1916), or Pichamuthu (1953), In the type areas of India it would appear that the charnockites ( orisinally considered to be igneous rocks) are rocks of diverse types (igneous and mefa- morphic) which have suffered more than one metamorphism The metamor- phism which has produced the charuovkitie rocks has produced at the same tine khondalites aad other rocks which belune ta the cranulite facies, In Western Australia charnockitic basic rocks appear to have formed in fone different environments (Wilson, 1958b). hy KULGERA Ne ‘S \ hah woes Gaby 30138 HILLS VICTORY DOWNS ee: nt ae a Pa, a Ok ce CREEK 94 REGION { TIEYON LEGEND STRIKE AND DIRECTION OF DIP OF aw GNEISSES & CHARNOCKITIC GRANULITES DIRECTION OF PLUNGE OF LINEATION MAJOR SHEAR ZONES / (MOSTLY SHALLOW DIP SSE.) MOSTLY INTRUSIVE GRANITES STRIKE AND DIRECTION OF DIP OF MAJOR PLATY FLOW LAYERS IN GRANITES SOME MAJOR GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURES HOMESTEADS OF THE SPECIMEN NUMBERS MUSGRAVE AND AYERS RANGES 20 MILES a a on Come, Fig. 1 GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 30 CENERAL FIELD CHARACTERS AND STRUCTURE MAPS A map showing the distribution of the major rock types, as known after my first two expeditions into the Musgrave Ranges, has already been published (Wilson, 1947b). During two subsequent expeditions several weeks were spent re-stutlying restricted areas and mapping certain new arvas in reconnaissance. In the absence of air-photographs, only » xeconnaissance map, showing strike and dip of the banding, and lineation of the basement rocks (the gneisses and srannlites ) and the contacts of the main intrusive masses, has been prepared.* The attitude of dolerite dykes is not shown, but some dykes are plotted on a previous map (Wilson, 1947b), and others appear on the new maps published by the South Australian Mines Department, Another area of about 400 square miles (the Ayers Ranges and Kulgera Hills) has been mapped in reconnaissance with the assistance of air photographs used in the field, This area will be de- seribed in detail in later papers. THE GNEISSES AND GRANULITES The oldest rocks in the area are gneisses and granulites in which banding appears to be parallel to bedding planes of original sedimentary rocks. De- tailed petrological and structural descriptions of these rocks appear elsewhere (Wilson, 1954b, vol. 2). Fig, 1 shows that the trend of banding or foliation (= bedding) is roughly meridional for about 150 miles across the strike, ic. Uironghout the central and eastern Musgrave Ranges, In many places the gneisses have been thrown inlo tolds, many of which are tight, and all of which are ornumented with minor folds. The trend of the fold axes, and of » lineation is also sub-meridional. There can scarcely be any doubt that the tectonic strike of the nviginal meta- morphic rocks of the central and custern Musgrave Ranges is sub-meridional (Wilson, 1953b, 1954a, and 1954b, vol. 2). In the Ayers Ranges (particularly in the eastern half) the gneisses are fulded on sub-tmeridional axes, and the lineation is sub-purallel to the fold axes. In the Kulgera Hills the tectonic trend (as shown by tight fold axes and lines- tion, and average strike-trends) is 330 deg. to 340 deg. The basement rocks of the Musgrave Ranges ure mostly of geanulite facies, but many of those of the castern portion of the Ayers Ranges and all of those of the Kulgera Hills are typical of higher leyels of the amphibolite facies. THE ORTHOPYROXENE-BEARING GRANITFS OF TITY MUSCRAVE RANGIES (including the Frnahella Adamatlite) The shape of the largest granite mass, which has been called the Ernabella Adwmellite, is shown in Fig. 7. (For a4 more detailed map showing actual hills anil extent of sand cover, see Wilson, 1947b,) tn the Ernabella and Alalka regions it is meridionally-trending, and secms tu occupy the axis of a south- plunging synclinorimm in the granulites. Notwithstanding its position within a synclinal structure the granite rarely shows traly eanvordaut contacts (Pi. 1, Fig. 1). Wherever studied, the transgressive contacts are marked by xenoliths * Air-photograph mosaics of the Musgrave Ranwes were kindly forwarded by the Sonth Australian Mines Department in 1954 but they arrivecl too Jate to allow any stanifcant addi- tions to the map to be made. Subsequently, the Mines Department hus published geological mups af part of tho Musvrave Ranyes based on the use of these air-photographs in the fell, but these are also of reconnaissance type, Tor the gneissie complex has not bear systematically subdivided, My map is published as completed iu 1054, for it shows inany futures not included in the zaps of the Mines Department (and vice versa), 40 ALLAN. ik, WILSON containing hornblende und biotite. The xenoliths are so alincd as to demon- strate that the granite has moved into its present position, Angular xenutiths freshly broken from the wall rocks have been found. Xenoliths are best seen near Murris Springs in the vieinity of Mt, Carruthers, and ut the Alalka rock-holes. In the Alalka region (sce p, 46) not only are Aow-banding and corroded xenoliths of the country rocks aliued parallel to the sharp transgressive contacts, lit « marked decrease in grain-size is evident close to the contact (PI. 1, Fig. 2). ‘The gneisses and granulites of the wall rocks have been rendered garnetiferous by the intrusion, At the eastern contact just N, of Aeroplane Well the granite shows some metasomatic action on the granulites, but this is not a feature of the granite asu whole. The contacts are usually sharp and distinct. Newr Tiatja, about 5% miles S, of Ernabella, the granite mass appeurs to swing in trend toward the SW. Insufficient field work hag been done fi say whether or not this granite is related to the somewhat sheared granites suid lo peeur between Upsan Downs and Possum Well (which is 5 or 6 miles 5, of Upsan Downs). Notwithstanding the presence of xenyliths near the main contacts, and a weak alinement of rare plagioclase phenocrysts and mafic clots, these granites are so massive that in many places no reliable structural data could be ahbtainel, The oyerall dark greasy appearance of the rocks in field and hand-specimen greatly hinders a macroscopic structural study, Such data as are avuilablo, however, suggest that the intrusion is similar to several in the Ayers Ranges and Kulgera Hills, where the granites tend te occupy synclinal positions in the gneisses, These granites, however, do uot seem ta he true phacoliths, tor the flow-layers, which are fairly shallow aud dip into the intrusion near the edges, steepen to almost vertical near the uxis of the clongate structures (see Fig. 2), Althouch the structure is fairly clear in the Ayers Ranges and Kulgera Hills, it is unwise to assume that the available data are suffivient to prove a similar structure for the Ernahella Adamellite. The occurrence in the Keli Koli and Tjakiaja regions of outcrops of rocks almost identical with the Emabella Adamellite is difficult (a explain, The assumption that they are cupolas on a yranite mass upon which the gneisses “Hoat” is too great an extrapolation of the scanty fleld data. There is very strung wvidence, however. that the granite of the Harris Springs area, which underlies the: gneisses to the west, re-appears in the valley to the cast of the Koli Koli ridge. In this area a hypothesis somewhat similar to that put forward for the Kakamas charneckitic adamellite shoild be tested in the field. (This has not yet been possible; field work in this area was dene in 1944.) At Kakainas the adamellite (which petrographically is somewhat similar to the Eynabella Adamellite) occurs xs a sheet which “generally oecupies the synelinal tronihs of the folded terrain, while the crest of the anticlines kirm ridges within the intrusion, “False windows’ of older rocks are a conspicuous feature throughout the sheet. Contacts with the associated rocks often transevess across the foliation at a low angle, but both non-transgressive and highly-transgressive contacts are also observed . . - . It is thonght that the mugma spread out alone the aynciines if the folded terrain...” (Poldervaart and ven Backstrim, 1949, p. 453). The development of some such hypothesis may thraw light on the problem in Central Australia where there is the apparent contradiction of a lone K.-W, string of petrologically closely related magmatie granites, many of which form N.-S. bodies sub-parullel to the major fold structures of the basement rocks. In the Sentinel Hill region (see p. 49) the trend of the granite intrusions GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA al and associated granulites to the west is approximately meridional, but the gneisses and granulites to the east have a north-west tectonic trend, In this region the granite is orthopyroxene-bearing in most parts, but coarser burn- blende facies are voranon, In the nearby Bald Hill, and elsewhere, the racks are devoid of orthopyroxene, yet on petrographic evidence should he con- sidered “co-magmuatic” with the orthopyroxenic rocks. THE CLINOPYROXNENE-BEARING AND HORNBLENDE-BRARING GRANITRS OF THE AYERS KBANGES “AND FASTRRAN OUTLIERS OF ‘THE MUSGRAVE BRANGES In the Alenrra Creek Region a group of low hills of coarse granite appears la lorm petrographic anc geographic links belween the orthopyroxene-bearing granites of the Musgrave Ranges to the west and the hornblende-rich granites of the Ayers Hanges to the east, A stractural link hetween the two ranges, huw- ever, is nat so abvious. No attempt hus been made to map this area of poor outcrop. Keeonnaissance, however, has shawn that contacts with the eneisses are rare. The available evidence (see p. 51) is that the granites have been empliced as a (palingenetic) magma into meridionally-trending gneisses antl granulites. Flow-structures are very weak except near contacts. The veneral trend of platy-fow layers appears to be between 325 deg. and 335 dex. Althangh random recording of platy-How layers may be dangerous and misleading, it seems sigmificant that pluty-flow layers which trend K.-W. have not yet been found. Ht would appear, then, that if the granites of the Musgrave and Ayers Ranges are related, they are linked in a much more complicated fashion than by a “normal” elongate mass of granite which extends westward from the Ayers Ranges rons the Musgrave Ranges, and beyond. In the Ayers Ranges the structure of the granite is more casily mapped, for although xenoliths are uncommon, platy-flow layers are revealed in most places hy the alinement of large K-feldspar phenocrysts, With the aid of air photo- graphs the greater part of the Ayers Ranges was mapped in reconniissance. Only the main structural features are mentioned in this paper. As sbown on Fig. 1, the main pranite muss lies west and north-west of Mt, Cavenagh Homestead, whereas to the cast major and minor folds and lineation in. the gneisses are approximately meridional in Lend, The southern contact with the gneisses was not mapped, hut near Victory Downs Homestead (which lics clase La the WSW- contact of the main outerops of the granite of the Ayers Hanges) the gneisses strike E-W., and are meridionally lincated. The attitude uf the fow-layers of the granite shows what may be considered to be a large curved structure, crescent-shaped in plun with shallow plunge m a narth- weslerly direction. J The structures of the granite ure swh-concordant with gametized gneisses on parts of the castern side of the inteusion. Within the granite area no yneiss has been found, but some may be covered by the sand through which the more resistant hills of granite protrude. ‘The How-structurés of some of the hills (such as Mt. Reynolds, and a smaller hill 3 miles lo the west) show that the mode of emplacement of the granite was complicated within the main granite area. In these hills the flow-structure presents the picture of a synclinal granite budy, elosed on the eastern end and plunging ut a low angle to the west. These granite buries can searcely be phacoliths, however, foc on the western end, where snbhorizotal flow-layers could be expected to complete the syuclinal atructnire, there are vertical or steep dips. A similar structure on a small seule wus ure closely mappel in the Kulgera Hills, some 10 miles ENF, of Me. Reynolds (sce Fig. 2). It appears that structural weaknesses in the basement 42 ALLAN TF, WILSON GEoLoGicaL Sketch Map AND SECTIONS OF PINNACLE HILL KutGeRAHILLs CENTRAL AUSTRALIA vv Srrine, Dip of 30 GNEISS —* Lineanion, Foup- Axes oF GNEISS ==> Fiow Line oF GRANITE —w~ Flow Laver oF GRANITE VA C me A SKETCH SECTIONS Contorted E> Gneiss Cc. Fig, 2—Ccological sketch map and sections of Pinnacle Hill, Kulgera Hills, Central Australia, GHANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 43 tocks (faults or fold-axial “planes”) have been utilized by upsurging palingenetic magma, Insofar as it remains within old synclinal structures, the outer Huw- structures appear to delineate a syncline, but the “feeder dyke", situated nearer the axial “plane” of the fold, may well be steeply-dipping. By analogy with the Kulgera Hills, it is concluded that gneisses may lie buried at shallow depths bencath the sand from which protrude the more resistant granite masses. The Kulgera Hills are separated from the Ayers Ranges by a westerly- trending trough in which (?) Mesozvic sediments are the only outcrops. The uranites of Kulgera Hills themselves may be considered to lie about 15 miles NE. of the main granite area of the Ayers Ranges. Since a large manuscript deseribing the gealogy of the region is awaiting publication, only a few of the major structural features will be mentioned here, Study of platy-Aow and linear-flow structures in the granites indicates thit, notwithstanding marked local trausyressive structures, the general trend of the yranite intrusions is sub-parallel to the fold axes and lineation of the gneisses, Le., 330 deg. to 340 deg. The most instructive granite intrusion is that seen at The Pinnacle, a small pointed hill two miles BE. of Kulgera Homestead. In Fig, 2 the main structural features are shown. The Pinnacle is the end of a granite body similar to some of those in the Ayers Ranges. The contact with the contorted gneisses is sharp and feldspathized only in places. It dips inwards on the S,, E, and N, contacts, but near the middle of the stnicture the flow-luyers are vertical. On top of the hill the bottom contact (which is here also the Li, contact) is found to dip about 30 deg. to the WNW. This dip is also the plunge of elongate plagioclase pheno crysts, and represents the plunge of thie lincar-fow of the intrusion at that pofnt. On top of the hill, although the intrusion is synclinal, the contorted meta- sediments art’ not conformable with the intrusion. As one proceeds WNW. along fhe “axis” of the structure the plunge appears to steepen, but the platy- How layers rapidly steepen. At the bottom of the hill both granite contacts dip into the granite but near the middle of the structure the dip of the flow layers is vertical, not horizontal as would be expected if the body were synelinal Ae Fig. 2, E-F). The granite body takes on the appearance of a wide, steeply- ipping dyke as it is traced KNE. along the strike, It thas appear that the intrusion at The Pinnacle is really a special type of dyke. The mayms (which has given rise to a rock very similar to the Kulgera Adamellite) has been forcibly injected up shears sub-parallel to the regional structure, and in favourable structural positions has formed tension-controlled gashes which are eresccnt-shaped in plan, The other granite masses of the area appear to be of similar type. Microfacies of the main granite, and pegma- tites, ucuur in the encisses, especially near the contacts of coarse granite and gneiss. PETROGRAPITY ORTHOPYROXENE -BEARING GHANITES ERNAHELLA TiRcron In an earlier paper (Wilson, 1947b, p, 208) the heliet was expressed that these rucks are probably mostly granodioritic in composition, Since subsequent work has shown that in this region adamellite is more common than granodiorite, the name Ernabetla Adamellite is thought to be suitable as a general term of reference, notwithstanding the fact that the only available chemical analysis from the immediate vicinity of Ernabella was carried out on a rock which has 44 ALLAN F, WILSON been lound to lie between adamellite and granodiorite in composition, Two related orthopyroxenic granites trom the Musgrave Ranges are adamellites, according to chemical analyses (Table 2). Ferrohypersthenc granodiorite (close ta adamellite) (30789).°—Collected quarter mile due west of Ernabella water-hole; typical of arauitic rucks ip viewity; 110 primary planar or linear flow structures noticed in Lhe field (Fig, 7), In hand-specimen: massive coarse-grained greasy bluish dark wrey rock composed of bluish grey feldspars, small bluish grey glassy quartz irregularl distributed, and small ragyed clots of greasy datk hruwn mafic minerals: dat nature of rock renders mafic minerals less conspicuous; rave pyrite; plagioclase comninly shows albite-twins, and K-feldspar commouly contains numerous small round {nalusions of quartz; phenocevsts of plagioclase rare, bat one well-twinned urystal measuring 40 mm & 12 mm was found; common accessory zircon fluuresves yellow; weathering commonly deeply penetrates boulders, rendering collection of fresh material very difficult; tendency for uniform discolouration to resinous brown very deceptive — cympare the “Brown Granites” of Mozam- bique (Assiuicao and Pinto Coelho, 1955), Tn thin-section: xenomorphie granular, with mafic minerals and quart~ fn smaller grains than feldspars; average urain-sizc between 1-5 mm and 2 mm (sec PJ, 2, Figs. 3 and 4), Plagioclase (49%) —andesine, An 39, nun-zoncd; unhedral, mostly 2 mm dium., well-ewinned on albite-periclino laws, but development of twinning ap- prirs related to warping and shattering of many grains; cerroded on large scule by K-feldspar especially where shearing has developed weaknesses in grains, weakly micro-antiperthitie, with irregular inclusions of K-feldspar apparently produced by K-feldspar corrosion rather than exsolution (Pl. 2, Fiy. 3), inensions of sagenitic rutile common, and clouds of squat rutile rods and distorted magnetite octahedra in some grains; apatite and zireon crystals iy sume K-feldspar inclusions; quarts inchisions noglizible; extinction = 20 deg. K-feldspar (24) gushoelass mictoperthite partly inverted to microcline as shown by incipient shadowy eross-hatch extinction on (QOL), and Jarec, negative optic axial angle (about 80 deg.); mostly 2 mm_diam.; moderately micro- perthitic; round quartz inclusions about 0-2 mm diam, corrodes plapioelise, and thns occurs as small irregular patehes of micro-antiperthite in playioclase; needle inclusions very rare, smudges of iron ore dust plentiful. Quartz (15%) — mostly ragged grains | mm diam; also small corroded round grains (“millet seed" type) sBonut 0:2 mm diam. in K-feldspar (PI. 2. Fie. 4); needle inclusions rare, smudges uf iron ore dust and bubbles plentiful; somewhat shadowy extinetion. Orthepyroxene (4%) —ferrohypersthene, Fe 644, neon-zoned: rounded an- hedral; mostly 0-8 ram * 0:4 mim, commonly as core of irregular mafic clots whieh are mostly 2mm 1 mm (but up to 20 mm * 10 mn, as seen in hend- specimen), and in which it is closely associated with clinopyroxene, iran ores, apatite and zircon; fine lamellar steucture (including some narrow clinopyroxene exsolution lapel) // uptie plane (010); lamellae commonly bent und frac- lured as in plagioclase, but clinapyroxene which is occasionally found corrod- * Specimen numbers refer bo tHe mek collection of the University: of Western: Australia. Duplicates are housed in the University of Adelaide. Tu onserve space the following con- tractions ure used in this paper. ‘The extinction angle of plogioclase (always measnred as a* AOL in sections Ja) is reserded thus: “extinetion = 20°70" Unless athenvise indicatest, Thousurernnents of 2Yo sue correct ta + 2, deg. For pyrexenes and bietite and + 4 dey. for amphibole, refractive indices to = 0-001, estinetion angles to 42 1 deg. Plevchtnie colones are listed in the order a, 8, 4. ura. §- y and absorption iso e for anpbibole. Phrureseence is always as for 2537 ORANILES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 43 ing orthopyroxene shows no evidence of such (?) protoclastic stractures; alters along irregular cracks and poor cleavages to dull light brown chloritic muller, whereas associated clinopyroxene tends bo remain ynitltered: pleachroisin weak — pale pinkish fawn, pale fawn, very pale greenish grey; A — 1'745; IV /a = 59°; dispersion v > r, moderate. Iron Ores (3-59) — apparently ilmenite and magnetite equally represented, together with a few ywrains of pyrite; anhedral masses, about 0-3 mm diam. mustly associated with orthopyroxene, apatite und zircon in mafic clots; several graing corroded by hornblende or biotite; also. tiny distorted octahedra of magne- tite and iron ore dust in several larger plagiocluse grains. Clinopyroxene (2%) —ealcic angite, Cad0h Mg32@ Fe2?, non-zonel; an- hedral grains mostly 0-4 mm diam.; commonly us geoups of two or (hree grains associated with jron ores, or as irregular grains adjoining (and in some cases apparently corroding) orthopyroxene; clear, unaltered and exceedingly weakly pleachvoie (or not at all) in very pale greenish greys; (110) cleavage, promincat partings // (100) and (001), and Icss prominent // (010); cleavage and parting sutfaces not bent and fractured as are those of associated orthopyroxene; narrow pyroxene lamellae // (100); 4= 1-726; 2V/y = 5l° > 1°; y Ne 42°. Apatite (1-5%)—squat subhedral colourless grains (commonly 0-15 mm * 0-1 im) mostly associated with iron ores, zireon and hypersthene in mafic clots, or as clonpute euhedval grains associated with K-feldspar inclusions in plagio- clase; non-Huorescent; tubular inclusions //c; = 1:°635, indicating Huor-apatite. Homblende (0:5%)—mostly small irvegular anheclral grains (syith rare patches up to 3mm ¥ 1+5 mm) corroding iron ores: associated blebs of clear quartz may be derived frow transformed pyroxene; maltered non-sheared, clear; pleachraism strong — fawn, dark khaki-brown, greenish khaki; A= 1-701, Zireon (0°3%)—mostly very pale pink eubedral crystals up te 0-3 mm i}-2 mm, and usually associated with apatite and iron ores: yellow fiorescence, Binlite—vave ragged flakes adjoining iron ores; pleochroism, light steaw- vellow. chestnut-browr. Calcite — very rare alteration prodnet of plagioclase. A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this ruck are set out as 10 in Table 3, and also in Table 2, fon percentazes are sct gut in Table 4, and further refer- ence is made in Figs. 4 and 6, Discussion of these data is reserved for the petrogenesis section. Ferrohypersthene adamellite—(308)6)—Within a few feet of the summit of Mt. Carruthers, a promiuent landmark 1-5 miles W. of Emabella, anc fied tnile from the intrusive contact with the gneisses and grunulites; similar to 30789, but a nwre normal adamellite, and orthopyroxene much: less ferriferatts, exsolution lamellae of clinopyroxene coarse, and there are no large plagioclase phenocrysts, See Table 1. Ferrohyperstheue microadamellite (close to adamellite )—(3U871)—At the month of a gorge 2 miles WSW, of Erhabella, and (+4 miles SSW. of Mt, Cir ruthers; aot far from. basernent granulites; considerably finer yrain-size than most of the hypersthene granites of the area (feldspars average 0-6 mre diam., nroxenes averuge 0-2 mm diam. ); textures and mineral relations as for 30789, mt plagioclase more micro-antiperthitie than in 30789; although pyroxenes contain corroded masses of ivam ore, and the rock contains more iren ore (11 per cont.) than any other granite sa fur studied from the area, several rocks in Muserave Ranges eoutain more ferriferuus pyvoxenes; iron ore alsa plentiful as irregulur plates “healing” shears and gashes in mast minerals. See Yable 1. Ferrohypersthene adamellite—( 30638 ),—About halfway down the SW- side of the promient hill 3 miles NNE. of Ernabella; probably typical of cunsinler- 46 ALLAN I") WLLSON able portions of the group of hills about 4 miles NNE. of Ermahella, although amphibole-bearing variants may be present among some of the coarser-grained yaeks in the area; although finer in grain-size, textures and mineral relations as in 30789; calcite, apparently of late magmatic origin, as small irregular patches mostly associated with biotite and rare chlorite. See Table 1. ALALEA Recron The largest masses of the Evnabella Adamellite are developed in the Alalka region, about ten miles N, of Ernabella (Fig. 7). Where contacts were studied (e.@,, at the Alalka rock-holes, and at Razor Hill) there is very gond evidence of the maymatic emplacement of the Frnabella Adamellite. A typical contact near Alalka is shown in Pl, 1, Fig, 2. Not only are fow-banding and corroiled xenoliths of the country rocks alined parallel to the sharp transgressive: contact, but a marked decrease in yrain-size is evident close to the contact. The yneisses and gramulites of the wall rocks have been rendered garnetiferous by the tntrusion. Ferrohypersthene granocliorite (close to adamellite)—(30476)—Near the contact with granulites 24 miles NNW. of Alalka rock-hole and 3 miles SE, of Wardulka rock-hole, and also only a few yards from a small olivine dolerite dyke; fawn in colour due to superficial weathering: dull dark brown mafic clots only faintly oriented; texture and mineral relationships as for 30789, but mafic clots somewhat more prominent, magnetite in the form of in-fillings of cracks more common, quartz sagenitic apd with tendericy to be flattened parallel ta weakly developed streakiness of mafic clots (Pl. 2, Figs. 1 and 2). See Table 1. TyaTyA-Omaacunna Region The map (Fig, 7) shows that the Ernabella Adamellite, as developed in the Tjatja area, continues ENE. into the Ombagunda area. Mt, Ferdinand, how- ever, which is midway between the two areas, is composed of banded acidic pyruxene granulites, Jt is not known whether there is any visible link between the igneous rocks of the two ureas. To the south of Mt. Ferdinand most af the rocks appear to be gneisses and gramulites. Ferrohypersthene adametlite—( 30385 ),—Typical of the granitic rocks about ane mile SSE, of Ombagunda Well where they inject the acid pyroxene grann- lites which make up the basement rocks of larye parts of the eastern Musgrave Ranges; collected about 20 yards S. of the junction of a norite dyke which cuts the granite; dull greasy brown, typical of incipient weathering of an iron-rich rock, In thin-section; similar to 30789 (p. 44) in texture and mineral relations, but with following differences: mafic minerals notably less ferriferous and not so obviously in clots: K-feldspar more microperthitie, and closcly associated with yrotesquely poikilitie hormblende (pleachroism—fawn, brown, greenish khaki) wd clear vermiform quartz where plagioclase is corroded; quartz mostly as sagenitic “millet seed” inclusions 0-35 mm diam. in K-feldspar, apatite murky light grcy duc to acicular inclusions // c; zircon pale fawn with dusty inclusions. Details of minetal compositions are set out in Table 1, A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this rock are sct out us 6 in Table 3, and also in Table 2, ion percenlages are set out in Table 6, and further referenwe is made in Figs, 4 and 6. A discussion of these data is reserved For the petro- Henesis section, Tyakunya Rectan On the ENE. side of the prominent mountain, Tiakunja (about 9 miles NW, of Ernabella), and a few hundred yards N, at a small pinnacle-shaped hill, “STITH. ered (ny “TIA, ered gy ‘op Tawepr a7 y0Iq-apuarquaoA “gETOE ‘SUT SOA Y ‘PwaISOULOY YARUUAD IAT ANN BATU) Sp ‘aqyallepy apuatyuIoR ‘wooFE "HOBIUY SA RIES PY SI WITNILY ‘dQ [SULEPR OpUsqosoy-apauy 'OTsos “SORURTT OAUBSIUL “B[UQBUTG 10 Ey Salud LL “UA -dui p- ALOT: “Ba WIA-T UATE af ONy-eIA Yd s-apUayquIoRy BLEU! “SHOMBY DAISBUTC “ILA PIA Teac ‘aqTSWepe apiarquaog, 'FOHOR NTU UE: B aAnatarh TU, SOI g ‘Ap eEpY SUNY ss AqoLAT ‘Kecog “saSUT yy AAS A CELIO SpAly, Say pacoupT auayysral yoda '1OL0e “ROBUPY DATIDAN YT “VION YLT, Awall “ar TTaWEpE oUIyJeTAdAYyoIIayT “OOLOE ‘SOHNUY OARS “YPUNFYCIUg WHYPWepY UNoyjsuAd Aouad ‘oseug “SaRUNYT JATIASN YL SURELY JO AANIN Bap fz ‘apUo(pouwsa suayysaad Aouad PLPOL ‘SOTUBY GARIZEN DY ‘VTAQCLIG JO ANN Sala 2 ‘ad Tfatepey auarpferactAyoriag “gong ‘SOHN, DABS ‘BPAQ GUAT JO AMABAA, SOL g ‘oR POLULEpKOTOIM OUOYIsIATAYOLIOT 'TLROR “‘SOBULIT SATABEN YY ‘NIBIPPLIeD. “qn Cadpawwerpr aueygssedlAyoeT “TROL SORUEY], DARIFENTY “BLIQRUAPL ‘aI WOMpOURIs sNysIOd AOI g ‘'BRLOE “S ALLY, SUS "SIRATHU ITOLUTOD JOT» g | nn ge [eu Int iLiss fa qe | qa [a [ar THe mw So. TOA says 4} pu qy q4 y | 0 a au Ya TOA MING 60 €'0 y 60 20 £0 en T qy | 0 eo <0 270 oo “a TOA WOoNg AEs T LEAT | H89°L | SRE+T ese L Lk 1 at eng 1 GRA L f ™ aT 6'T ae @ 60 oT | eo & e L T 32 L ST eT TOA ayyedy q's OE F z e | F € ¢ ¥ ¢ oe IL oF Ge thy “TOA. Sarg) WOly 0 Ore | $970 | STO 01 4 I 0 OT OL (>) Az OFT MT! Net e971 Lea T | AFOTL spo’ RRO L >. STOUT 4 sai F UO 4 14 a ny H a ST uv 1} 8m “TOA 6T. gt RL aL | eL ap A Sax Sg TL | _ BE é cs sb FL | Lh (- ) Az aig OL | wee L | BBB LE | psy Lk oon 4 | Sa9°7 SOL'L LOA’ L 4 apap Urn Ay o'r Cae g T 4 £ qu T I 4 oF re yy | eo “4 TOA, ft OF tT ig aM rag op & Sugxq eo 14 TS Te LF ¢ ae eg &¢ 1s (+) AE 669' 78) 062° 1 82" OFZ 0 |669° Ts) OFLT 62h 1 bal 7 BELT bel 7 te 4 bata TMS | BB ite Fz OF ite ts Lg Ot) ataxoAdout $ng _fS fa tLe Fes aire 06 $e 4aR BIN Plo “LOW 'sodut0,) SP iF 68 BE 8 £0F a et tOr ROU J WwW ian ig (yu if f g g e or y a a | My WON ! | ‘ zg Te gE #8 és | (Az cele orl: T Loh 68L°1 ord’ Ot2°T. | bl" SFL L ' 4 ataxotdulpag gPe #90 Og ae rt oe eg 4t0 Od By WOT J Rodway fu ih fu Tu wa & & 6 ¥ Q Gg 8 9 t So “TON Sez LT ia OL 6. TL ST 6T OT aa fT 61 ta 0% OlOy 2 eT enyxg 96 cE ts 86 £8 ie 6 LE TE Tt TE 2g OF tit UV % “le tvoduio,) OREPOOLTET Le TF Tr 6 ae ve oF 08 18 UP e 53a “8 6F Ya LON St Le ae ne OG 16 1a IZ 1a ee | Fa Ye TOA redsplj- Lg ta ae L1 0% a ral S20 Fa cL SL Th “TOK 2YIBO eLcoo: | ernoue / aegsog | TOLOE | GOLOS | +fsgo8 | OLFOE | FONE TLeoe | GiROs | +6840 ‘RIPSTISNY TUIpWAD MOY sayuwy Jo WUC IBoperaMNyY Puy jypyyy LOTavi 46 ALLAN F, WILSON greasy bluish-grey ferrohypersthene adamellites geeur as intrusions into ucid hypersthene granulites (Fig, 7). When the W, face was visited in 1944 it seemed that the whole of Tjakunja was charnockitic gneiss, and it was mapped as such, ty 1949, a traverse from Alalka enced at Tjakunja, and it was then that the igneous rock so common in the Ernabella area was found to be present (but ineonspicucns) near the ENE. base of the mountain. Abaut one mile acrass the plain to the E, a minor intrusion of hypersthene adamellite of the type developed at Wardulka makes a well-marked transgressive and intrusive contuet with the acid hypersthene gramulites. No other “maymatic™ hypers- thene granitic rocks are known from this region, but in view of the Jack of detailed study of the mountains to the SE. of Tjakunja some may exist there and thus provide a link with the Ernabella region. Ferrohypersthene adamellite—(30700),—SE. side of the small pinnacle near the NM. of Tjakunja; identical in appearance, and similay in texture and mineral relations, to 30789, but with the following differenees; plentiful grotesque masses of micro-antiperthite produced by intimate corrosion by K-feldspar (Pl. 4, Fig. 1), bnt sneh replacement most obvious where andesine grains shattered and bent and where twinning best developed; undesine inclusions in iyperatane not antiperthitic, tending to confirm that the antiperthite is result of corrosi¢m of plugivelase by K-feldspar rather than of exsolulion af K-4teldspar from plagin- clase; pvroxenes most ferrous yet recarded in Musgrave Ranges. Details of mitieral composition ure set out in Tuble 1, Terrohypersthene adameltite (close to granadiorite)—( 30701) —ENE. side of ‘Tjakunjas mineral composition identical, and mineral relations similar to SU700. but with the following differences: although andesine heavily corroded by K-feldspar, the micra-antiperthite so formed is not as grotesque in appearance (ef, Tl, 3, Figs. 1 and 2. Pl. 4. Fig. 1); in 30700 the K-feldspar is microperthitic excopt where it oceurs as filaments and impregnating, bands in the andesine, bul a me the impregnating K-feldspar itself is very finely perthitic (PL 3, Pigs. und <). Seisieex Hin Reewn A small mass of ferrohypersthene adamellite appears to inject the sub- meridionally-trending gneisses and granulite of Spinifex Hill, a promiment hill about 6 miles NW. of Kenmore Park homestead (Fig. 7). No time was avuil- able tu make a structural survey of the hill, but its relative case of access and excellent outcrops should encoirage detailed study. Ferroliypersthene adamellite—(30558),—Near the sumunit of Spinifex Hill; meditin- to coarse-grained fresh greasy dark grey massive rack composed of dark-columved feldspars and quartz, and subordinate greasy clots of mafic minerals: in Chin-section, minerals roughly orieated, and quartz somewhat elongate as is quartz of basement grannlites; features linking this rock more with Ernahella Adamellite than with the (older) basement granulites are appurént intrusive relations, typical and distinctive “charmockitic’ appearance tn hund-specimen, distinctive mineralogy and similar chemical compesition; similar tu 30789 in texture and mineral relations but with the following differences: dignelase, much correded by K4eldspar, irregularly antiperthitic: hornblende sheaths pyroxenes and iron ore; clinopyroxene corrodes orthopyroxene. Details Ol mineral compositions in Table 1- A chemical analysis, norm and niede of this rack are set out us 4 in Table 3, and alsa in Table 2, ion purcentages are set out in Table 6, and further reference is mude in Figs. 4 und 6. A disenssion of these data is reserved For the petro genesis section, CHANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 44 Senwinwen Hint. Recroy Sentinel Hill (also called Mt, Carnarvon) is a prominent monntain ol granite which forms the NE. outpost of the Musgrave Ranges. Fig. 7 shows other pranitic hills in the vicinity. Where contacts have been seen the igneous rocks appear to have been emplaced! magmatically. The trend of the Sentinel Hill intrusion and of the associated granulites to the W. is meridional, but the gneisses and granulites to the Fi. have a NW. tectonic trend, The Sentinel Hill and assuciated intrusions to the NW. were studied in reconnaissance only, but suffi- cient was dane to show that the bulk of the igneous rocks are orthopyroxene- bearing adamellites. Some of the coarser facies, however, are hornblende adiumellites, which are devoid of hypersthenc, and may only contain a fow relics of sucite. One of the most striking features of the orthopyroxenc-bearing adamellites at this cesion is the development of micro-antiperthitic musses by the heavy currosion of plagioclase by K-feldspar. Moreover, the orthopyroxene is com- monly corroded by clinopyroxene. Textural details (illustrated) are set out elsewhere (Wilson, 1954b, Vol. 3). CLINOPYROXENE-BEABING AND HORNBLENDE-BEARING CRANITES Four rocks of this group have heen chemically analysed, and shew seme striking similarities to the three analysed orthopyroxene-bearing granites. Baro Hine Recon Bald Uill is a sruall prominent bare hill about % mile NE. of Donald Well, which is twelve miles ENE. of Ernabella (Pig. 7). Bald Hill and some of the nearby hillocks are composed of a coarse hornblende adatnellite which is cut by rare flat-lying microgranite dykes, The basement racks, whiel are ent by these maymatically-emplaced adamellites, are mustly meridionally-trending acid hypersthene granulites and acid hornblende granulites. On the N. side uf Tiet- kin’s Creck at Donald Well, however, a remarkably contorted cordierite-silli- tanite pneiss (30606) was found, This is the furthest west that this type of rock (which is commonly developed sear intrusions of hornblende adamellite in the Kulgera Hills which are 75 miles GNI. of Bald TLL) has leon found, Owing to the difliculty of collecting sufficient I'esh rock trom Bald Hill Itself, the specimen for analysis was taken from a nearby knoll. Tt is represeutative of the region. Hornblende adamellite (close to hornblende granodiorite )—( 30504). —l'rom a knoll wbout hilfaway bebween Bald Aull and Donald Well, whieth is alnent 12 miles NE. of brnabella; coarse-grained, composed of fawn-grev feldspars and dull black mafie clots of hornblende amd pyroxenc, very faintly oriented; rare pale fawn andesine phenocrysts (up to 16 mm long); in thin-section, xeno- morphic granular and similay to, but somewhat coarser than the lerro-hypers- thene-hearing rocks of comparable cheraical composition (ew. 30789) from Ernabella region; any of same replacement structures and rmincral associations uppear, but absence of orthopyroxene, rarity of clinopyroxene, und coarse de- velopment of hornblende, link the adamellites from Bald [ill with many of those of Ayers Ranges. Plagioclase (37%)—andesme., An 37; non-zoned; up to 9mm % 4 mm: albite— pericline twin-lamellae cracked and curved; corrosion by K-Icldspar not as obvious as in many similar rocks from the Musgrave Ranges (bol noble: curved and shatlered twin-lamellae oceur in andesine which is strongly corroded by Kileldspar in almost identical hornblende adamellite (30596) from W. face 50 ALLAN F. WILSON of Bald Hill-see Pl 2, Fig. 5); plentiful inclusions of rutile needles, pink- brownish dust, and some octahedra of maynetite as in some of the ferrohypers- thene granodiorites neay Alalka; no lenticular micro-antiperthite inclusions, and only a few ragged patches of currusive K-feldypar; extinction = 19 deg. Quartz (27%)—teregular grains 1-5 mm diam., and as round grains 0:5 mm diam. in K-feldspar; non-sagenitic. Microcline microperthite (21%)—very fine cross-hatch twinning; irregular masses up to 5 mm diam.; corrodes plagioclase to small degree; a few rutile n¢ed]e-inclusions, Hornblende (7%)—irregular masses up to 5 mm diam, encloses iron ore, corroded pyroxene, apatite and zircon; pleochroism—pale fawn, khaki-gveen, yellowish green; y =1-+682; y Ac=18° = 2°; 2V/u= 738°. Iron ores (5%)—mainly as clots in hornblende. Apatite (1-6%)—in mafic clots, and in plagiveluse, especially where K-feld- spar has corroded plagioclase; tubular inclusions // ¢; w= 1-636, indicating fluorapatite. Clinopyroxene (1%) — similar to calcic augites of Ernabella region; corroded relics in hornblende. Zircon (0+3%) — mostly in mafic clots; yellow Huorescence. Biotite (0-1%) —corrodes iron ores; strong pleochroism— fawn, chestnut- brown, yellowish brown; y = 1-623; 2V/a = LO°-15°: dispersion strong, r < y, Sphene and calcite absent. A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this rock are set out in Table 2, ion percentages are set out in Table 6, and further reference is made in Figs. Sand 6. A discussion of these data is reserved for the petrogenesis section, Sentivnew Hine Recon Although the bulk of the acid instrusions of this region are orthopyroxene- searing adamellites, some of the coarser facies of these are homblende adamel- lites devoid of orthopyroxene (see page 49). They differ in nu essential respect from the hornblende adamellite from Bald Hill (30604), Sroxtr-Jumr-Up Recor A Jarge mass of hornblende-sphenc-biotite granite forms prominent hills about une mile 8, of Stony-Jump-Up about 11 miles E. of Emabella (Fig. 7), The eastern edge of what appears to be a large shallow-dipping dyke shows well-marked intrusive features, but little is known of the western and southern contacts. Micro-facies of this granite cut the gneisses on the S. side of the Stouy-Jump-Up. The intruded rocks of the region are mostly acid hypersthene pranilites, but in the vicinity of this non-pyroxenic granite the basement rocks are biotite-hornblende gneisses and granulites which are apparently devoid of lhyperstlene, This is the only known granite irom the Musgrave Ranges which is devoid of pyroxenes, and contains sphene, biotite and a bluish green hornblende, Hornblende-sphene-hiotite alkali-granite — (30573).—About 100 feet W. of the eastern contact of main granite mass about % mile 8. of Stony-Jump-Up; pale bluish grey coarse even-grained granite, streaked irregularly with greasy dark brown bfotite-rich mafic clots about 20 mm = 5 mm; in thin-section (supple- menting Table 1):—microcline microperthite well twinned, abundant; quartz non-sagenitic; oligoclase sagenitic; biotite, pleochroism— very pale straw, dark chocolate: hornblende, pleochroism— dirty yellowish green, deep brownish green, dirty bluish green; sphene corroding iron ores; zircon Huorescent. GHANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA Nl Tir Aucurka Creek Recton (previously known as Bexfwinnt Cveek Regivn) The Aleurra Creek, a tributary of the Alberga River near its source, rises in a group of low hills which are composed almust wholly of coarse granites of considerable interest (Fig. 1). Although devoid of hypersthone, must vf these rocks are clinopyroxenc-bearing, and display features which suggest a_petro- logical link between the granites nf the Ayers Ranges and the Musgrave Ranges, As these hills have not been mapped, the major structure is unknown. More- over, nost of the individual granite hills probably represent the more resistant portions of a granite and gneiss basement. The gneissic components, have been largely eroded away, are now mostly covered by a thin veneer of sand from which they protrude in favaured positions. The available evidence (best seen oo the track about 14 miles SW. of Victory Downs Homestead and 2-5 miles WSW. of Aleurra Creek Crossing) is that the granites of this region lave been emplaced as a magma into meridionally-trending gneisses and granulites, In addition to outcrops near Aleurra Creek, several smal! granite hills near the Marryat Creek about nine miles SW. of the Aleurra Creek Crossing have heen included, for convenience, in the Aleurra Creek region. Augite-hornblende adumellite—(30210) —At 1952 Crossing of Alcurra Creek (Beefwooud Creek of earlier publications: Wilson, 1947b, p. 199, and 1950b, p, 23(1); no contacts with older rocks were found; rare xenvliths of coarse quartzite and amphibolite; approximate trend of a poor flow-structure between 325° and 335°; fairly fresh coarse-grained pinkish Kxwn homogeneous ruck cumpused af pink plagioclase (up to 15 mm tong), light fawn K-feldspar, very light grey vitreous quartz, and non-oriented mafic clots containing shiny black hornblende and greasy dull greenish yrey pyroxenc. In thin-section (supplementing Table a ae ae -~ tabular grains, necdle and plate inelusions common, patchy development of pinkish dusty inclusions giving andesine pink colour (and fluorescence) in hand-specimen and pale pink culour even in thin-section, grains shattered and twin-lamellae bent, most grains extensively replaced by non-shattered micrucline microperthite; quartz — long rutile needles oriented in three directions; hornblende — poikilitic anhedral masses. enclosing corroded clinopyroxene and iron ores; pleochroism — fawn, dull khaki-ereen, grass-vreep; caleic augite—clear pale greenish non-pleochroie anhedral grains up to 1 mm diam,, (100) and (001) Jamellae and parting not as common as in culcie wugites of Musgrave Ranges even though composition apparently identical, heavily corroded by hornblende; biotite — assaciated with iron ores, pleochroism — pale straw-yellaw, yellowish brown; zircon — fluorescent, and similar to zircon of orthopyroxenic granites of Musgrave Ranges (Wilson, 1950b, p. 229); sphene — encrustrations on some ysaings of iron ore, Details of mineral compositions in Table 1. : A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this rock are set out in Table 2, ion percentages are set out in Table 6, and further reference is made in Figs. 5 and 6. A discussion of these data ts reserved for the petruguncsis section, Augile-hornblende adamellite—( 34598 ).—Typical of several low hills just 8, of track about 8°5 miles WSW, of Victory Downs Homestead and 3 miles ENE, of Aleurra Creek; flow-bunding not obvious, but the attitude of rare xenoliths suggests trend of 335° and possible dip of How layers 40° NE. In outerop and thin-section this rock is similay to that at the Aleurra Creek Crussing (30210); plagioclase (47:2%, An 32) extensively replaced by microcline microperthite (20°5%, see PL 2, Fic. 6): in addition to nurmal anhedral grains of sagenitic quartz, some smaller euhedral grains of clear quartz occur with calcite, sphene TABLE 2 Chemical Analyses, CIPW, Norms, and Mades of Granites from Central Anstratin. 30588 30135 30385 30397 30H04- 3078) | 30210 34568 66.96 66-20 65.92 69.7 G4 82 | 63 52 (13.44 61.48 0 97 0.84 8a 1,04 0 6Y 0 84 1.12 1.16 14,32 14 7) 14 38 It 43 13.27 16.76 15.28 16.07 2 1,78 2.70 1,81 232 2.68 0.96 2 97 3°08 3.85 2.72 4.16 402 3.50 3.97 3.78 3.20 0). 33 0.3% 0.16 0 24 O 2A 09 0.24 O.18 1.12 0.92 1,24 1.37 0.96 0,91 ie 1.38 2.06 3.24 3,23 3.16 4.42 4,51 4.37 4.77 O.16 O04 0 11 tr 0.12 6.04 2.73 3.18 3.33 2.66 2.34 B-RR 3.18 2.92 5 ut 4.50 4,16 4.34 3.71 4.01 | 3.488 3.A9 0.04 O15 O14 (ng 0.14 a 33 On5 0.2 0.18 nil 0 16 1.06 0.04 0 U6 () 05 0.24 0.33 0 56 0.38 0.46 0.76 0.52 O.55 0.85 | 99.87 9996 HH. 95% | 90.94 99. 86 100.544 \ 100077 ad Let 4 ie Includes: *83=0.11, ZrO,=0.08, CL=0.07; CO,=nil; *CO,—mil, CIPW. NORM | qu | 24.12) | 23,58 | 20,99 | 24 16 | 25 GO It 20 | 20 7% 20 93 or | 30.37 25,41 24,58 27 65 21.02 23.70 21,15 21.22 ab 23.10 26,91 28.18 22, 61 21 9 32.83 26.74 23 56 an 8.36 | 12.49 1201 12 82 | 16.97 L648 If H+ 18.10 cor 1.20 0.38 0.08 0 86 0.91 wo iis Lt it 0 Al cdi 4 on 0, 24. 0, 36 O 2 fs 0,40 (BI 0 26 h en 2 78 2.29 2.84 3 41 U3 1.90 2.45 3 44 v {oF 4.42 1.97 409 | 4,19 aE | 4.24 277 1,17 mt 2.58 a 92 2.63 3 46 3_5t) 1,39 4 $1 3.77 il 1 84 1 Ag 1.67 1 ths L Sl 1,59 3.13 2.20 ap 0.78 1.32 O00 | 109 Pad | - 238 1 3 2.01 | qa #441 gwrsv. 2, pyr) 20. MODE 'Val. 3 { Chunrtz 26 24 3 28 a7 15 21 19 7 K-teldapar 33 24 BT 20 21 74 23 24 Plagiocl, 23 37 a7 33 37 ayy 4] Al Orthopyrox, 2 4 4 Clinopytox. 3 3 2 1 2 325 13 Hornblende 3 1.5 1 2 7 0.5 45 5.5 Biotite tr 5 tir 6 O.1 tr ) 6 On+ Tron Ores 4 a5 4 2 5 3.5 4 3. Apatite 0.5 1y 1 1 1.4 1.4 15 1. Zircon | 0.3 0.3 tr tr 1.3 0.3 tr 0.3 4 5 8 z 8 ne eR ee ee EEE ee ee eee ee Add:—. tealeite=tr; ‘aphene=3, overs —U-5; Sgarnet=4; ?sphene—tr; fothers=1, i & 3 SE 30138. d0888. AURRT. 30604, SO7BY. 80210), 4568, » Ferrohyporsthene adamellite, Spinifexs Hill, Musgrave Ranges. Anal., W, H. Herdsman, 1950, Hornblende-biotite adamellite (Kulgera, Adamullite), Kalgera. Hill, Kulgera Hills, Anat, W.. H. Herisman, 1950, Ferrobypersthone adamellite, Ormbagunda, Musgraye Ranges. Anal, W. H. Herdaman, 1031. Garmetiferous pyroxeno adamellite (Upsan Downs Adamellite), The Pass, sast of Upsan Downs. Musgrave Ranges. Anal., W. IL. Herdsman, 1950. Hornblende adamellite, near Buld Hill, Musgrave Ranges. Anal. W. AH. Murdsman. L950. Ferrohypersthene granodiorite, ear Ernubella wator-hole, Musgrave Rangus. Anal, A, PF, Wilson, 1944. s\ngite-lordhlonda adamelite, Aleurra Creek, E, Musyrave Ranges. 4nd... W.H. Herdsman, 1950, Hornblende adamellite (the Ayers Ranges Adamellite), 33 miles NW, Mi, Cavenach homestead, Ayers Ranges. anal. W. H. Herdsman, 1933, GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSERALIA “i and hidtite as late magmatic erystallizations (total quartz —16°9%); hornblende (41%, y= 1°682), irregular poikilitic masses corroding clinopyroxene (1-7, v7 718) and iron ores (4°2%), and closely assuciated with apatite (1:92, ) = 1-638), epidote and (?) lawsonite rare accesseries associated with eblori- lived biotite (2-9%, y = 1-632), calcite, sphene and late iron ores. Tur Avrks RANKS the Ayers Ranges (Fig. 1) is a group of hills which rise “like islands out of a vast ocean of scrub” (Giles, 1874, p. 75), Basedow published a sketch map of the general distribution of rocks in the area, and pointed out in his brief report that large portions of the Ranges are apparently composed of somewhat coarsely crystalline normal to slightly porphyritic granite intruded in a direction north of west ( Basedow, 1905, p. 78, and Plate XX), Ile also points out (p. 78) that “outcrops of identical rock were found intermediate in positian between Mount Sir Henry and Mt, Camarvon (Sentinel Hill), thns geologically con- necting the Musgrave and Ayers Ranges” Buasedow’s “intermediate hills” are probably the hills of the Aleurra Creek Region uf this paper. In a brief petrographic deseription of what he presumably considered to he the typical granite (taken from Mount Sir Henry), Basedow stated (p. 93) that orthoclase was somewhat subordinate to plagioclase, and that the main matic mingral was a green biotite. In a Tater, more detailed description of a tock, also presumed to be typical of Mount Sir Henry, Rubinson (1949, p. 38) pointed out that the rock was a hornblende granodiorite. Since Robinson makes nn mention of biotite but gives details of a grea hornblende it scems likely that Basedow mistook hornblende for hiotite, — Keeonnaissance mapping with the aid of air-photographs was carricd out in the Ayers Ranges in January, 1952. Since papers are being prepared on special aspects of the geology, only the Ayers Ranges Adamellite will he de- sevibed in this paper, Some of the granitic rocks of the arca are course porphyritic udamellites, others are granodiovites. The rock described helaw was chemically analysed, for it appeared (o be fairly typical of the acid intrusions of the Ranges, In all of the rocks hornblende appears to he the prinvipal mafic Mineral, unt! clinopyroxene and biotite occur in some. No orthopyroxene was found, and sphenc is an accessory in some rocks. Hornhlende adamellite (Ayers Ranges Adamellite )—(34568)—NW. end of large low bare granite hill 24 miles SSW. of Mt, Reynolds and 3% miles NW, af Mt. Cavenagh Homestead; probably typical of Ayers Ranges; good platy-flowage of K-feldspar phenoerysts ends NW. with dip 60° SW., nearest known outcrop of gneiss 34 miles E, In hand-specimen; coarse-gramed purplish grey porphyritic; coarse ground- mass of pale pinkish grey K-feldspar and cream-colourcd plagivelase; very roughly oriented mafic clots (mostly 10 mm & 5 tam) of black hornblende, iron ore, dull greasy light green augite; few phenocrysts pale pinkish grey K-feld- spar (15 mm diam. ); oceasional light bluish yrey plagivelase (15 mm * 12 mm). In thin-section (supplementing Table 1): occasional phenocrysts of K- feldspar set in course xenomorphic granular groundmass; andesine, non-zoned, mostly 2 mm diam. albite-pericline twins curved, shattered and healed by K feldspar and sometimes by apatite or hornblende, muny inclusions of dis- torted magnetite octahedra and rutile needles, corrosion by K-feldspar rot as common as in many comparable yranitic rocks of Central Australia, but myrme- kite prosent, K-feldspur, moderately microperthitic, na eross-hatch twinning: non- sagenitic quartz; hornblende corrodes iron ares and clinopyroxene, and smears of magnetite dust in hornblende suggest early replacement ot ferriferous 51 ALLAN F. WILSON pyroxene, pleochroism — yellowish fawn, greenish khaki, green; biutite, mostly enrrading iron ores and hornblende in mafic elots, pleochruism — very pale yellow, golden brown; zircon, colourless, mostly euhedral crystals associated with mafic clots, fuorescent as in other rocks of this suite; epidote, lawsonite, ereenish biotite are rare secondary minerals. Details of mineral compositions are set out in Table 1 A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this rock are set out in Table 2, ion percentages are set out in Table f, and further reference is made in Figs. 5 and 6. A discussion of these data is reserved for the petrogenesis section. Tr Kuicena Hinws The Kulgera Hills are separated from the Ayers Ranges, which are some ten miles to the south, by a trough in which remnants of flat-lying (#) Mesozwic sandstones are the only outcrops (Mig. 1). Gneisses, mostly of amphibolite Facies, trend approxtrnayely 330° to 340° (both strike and lineation), In places these are heavily granitized, and some are cut by magrnatically-emplaced gran- ites, microgranites and muscovite-hearing pegmatites. Notwithstanding marked lowul transgressive: structures, the overall trend of the granite imtrusions appears to be sub-parallel to the fold axes of the gneisses, ic., 330° to 340° (Fig. re The first geological study of this area was made by the author in 1949 when the main distribution of rock types and structure were worked out. Some features of the granitic rocks of the Kulgera Hills have been published (Wilson, 1950b, bp. 228, 230; 19584, p, 78), and other papers await publication. In the present paper a desuntptton is given of the Kulpera Adamellite, the mosl important granitic rock of the region, Moernblende-biotite adamellite (The Kulgera Adamellite) — (30138 ).—Eust face of Kulgera Hill, one mile RNE, of Kulgera Homestead; coarse massive even-gruined rock composed of flesh-coloured microcline, dull white plagivclase (with occasional phenocrysts of bluish grey plagioclase, 30 mm long), shiny black biotite. dull black hornblende and plentiful accessory brown sphene; imicrocline fluoresces pink and zircon yelluw (Wilson, 1950b, pp. 227-228, 230), In thin-section (supplementing Table 1): coarse xenomorphic texture with non-criented mafic clots; oligoclasc, An 26, slightly zoned to An 23 near the edges of Iarge crystals, grotesquely-shaped relies within well-twinned micro- cline microperthite, or as aggregates of subhedral tabular crystals which, by their bent and fractured twin-lamellae, indicate some (?) protoclastic shearing prior to or during their partial replacement by microcline, rods of rutile and Hakes af haematite common inclusions; sagenitic quartz: biotite, corroding horn- blende and iron ores, tends ta occur as buffer between these mincrals and micro- cline, pleochroism — pale fawn, dark brown; iron ores (3-5%) —mostly magne- tite, prominent constituent of mafic clots, in places corroded by sphene, horn- blende or biotite: pale fawn sphene, and a little purple fluorite, are in contavt with microcline and correde iron ores; hornblende, corrodes iron cres and is itself corroded by biotite, pleachroism— pale greenish fawn, kheki-green, clear greenish bine. . Details of mineral compositions in Vable 1. A chemical analysis, norm and mode of this rock are set out in Table 2, dor percentages are set out in Table 6, and further reference is made in Figs. § and 6. Discussion of these data is reserved for the petrowenesis section MINERALOGY Notyithstanding the marked differences in appearanve in hand-specimen, the main granitic intrusions of a large portion of the Musgrave Block show many GRANITES OF CEN TRAT. AUSTRALIA 5 mincralogical and textural features in common. The general range of propertics of the minerals is set out below. 5 4) (QUARTZ Bluish-grey in hand-specimen (as in many Indian charnockitic rocks) in only some orthopyroxene-bearing granites; bluish tint absent from clinopyroxenc- bearmg, and hornblende-bearing granites; quartz not always sagemitic; sagenitic quartz not restricted to pyroxenie granites; may also occur as small rounded gruins (sagenitic or otherwise) in K-feldspar (I'l. 2, Fig. 4); water-clear blebs may be included in hornblende, Kererosvan Mostly moderately micro-perthitic non-twinmed microcline, presumably in- verted from monoclinic phase (Wilsou, 19502, p. 219); typical cross-hateh twinning of microcline best seen in biotite-rich or sphene-bearing granitic rocks where it may show characteristic pale pink Auorescence (Wilson, 1950b, p, 232); pronounced corrosive action on plagioclase: (discussed, p. 49); no phenocrysts of K-feldspar in the orthopyroxenic granites deseribed in this paper, but are important in sume granites from the Ayers Ranges. PLAGIONLASE Similar habit in both orthopyroxene-bearing and orthopyroxene-free granites; mastly as corroded relies 2 mm diam, from probable originals at least 6 mm long; réré bluish-grey non-zoned phenocrysts up to dQ mm & 12 ma tr seme pyroxene granites, but greasy blue phenocrysts about 20 mm » & mm not rare in many hoenblende-bearing granites of Avers Ranges and eastern outliers of Musyrave Ranges. Composition of phenocrysts or groundmass very similar in either ortho- pyroxenie rocks or otherwise {see ‘Table J); determined (by reference to Winchell and Winchell (1951, p. 283)) from extinction a’ A010 in sections 1a (to conserve space, recorded thus; “extinction — 20°"); in orthopyroxenic granites commonly andesiné (about An 37) (contrast (a) “charmockific adamel- lite” from Kakamas, South Africa (Poldervaart and von Backstrém, 1949)): phenocrysts. commonly strongly zoned (An 54-28 with average composition An 45); plagioclase non-zoned in Australian rocks. (b) Finnish “charnockites” at Turki (Hietanen, 1947; p. 1039) with Wwondhjemitic: affinities: comparable rocks much more sudic (An 25— An 33) than the Australian rocks). Dark evlour of plagioclase in hand-specimen probably due to almost ubiqnitous presence of inclusions (? exsolution phenoment) such as slender, hair-like crystals af rutile (as in quartz of many associated rocks), and associated in some grains with enatic davelambent of squat rods of rutile, octahedra of magnetite or fakes of haemutite. Albite and pericline twin-lamellae of almost all rocks bent and trac tured: development of the twinning appears to have been facilitated and even controlled by shearing in many rocks: K-feldspar replacement possibly prenetalerd pari passa with shearing (sec p. 68), and there is probably a similar control for erratic ad poor development of micro-antiperthite which is here of repluce- ment nut exsulution origin (see p, 65). {YATHOPYROXLENE Within restricted areas hyperstherie-bearing and hypersthene-lree vranites clasely associated as though of similar age and renetivally related (e.g., Sentinel Hill); orthopyroxenic grimites restricted (as ir as is known) to Musgrave Ranges; ia some rocks evidence of development al expense of clinupyroxene; in uthers a lamellar structure (// optic plane (010)) in orthopyroxene is some- 58 ALLAN F. WILSON what bent and shattered, and the mineral corroded by unsheared clinopyroxene; in many rocks, no clear evidence of order of crystallization of the two pyroxenes. Composition estimated by measurement of y in immersion liquids in sodium light (accuracy about + 0-001, and reference to the graph by Hess (1952, Fig. 2) ); outstanding feature is very ferriferous character (range Fe 65! to Fe 50 wi average about Fe 57) in marked contrast with less ferriterous basement granu- lites (average about Fe 37 and maximum Fe 50, and marked tendency for most ferriferous orthopyroxenes to occur in granulites of intermediate rather than basic or acid composition); chemical and modal analyses of the Central Aus- tralian granites show that more ferriferous pyroxenes (both ortho- and clino-) are in the more basic of the granitic rocks; contrast the commonly recorded iron- enrichment in acid differentiates of igneous bodies and note that Hictanen (1947, p. 1040) points out that the itou content of the pyrexenes (both ortho- and clino-) seems to rise regularly with increasing silica-content in the charnov- kite series of Turku, Finland, where charnockitic rocks are basic, intermediate and acid types, and said to be magmatic and related to trondhjemites; very ferri- ferous orthopyroxencs also typical of intermediate charnockites from Varberg, Sweden (Quensel, 1951, p. 247), where orthupyrexenes from two typical racks, more basic than the rocks described in the present paper, contain Fe 64% and Fe 774 respectively (using Hess’s graph (1952, Fig. 2)). Dispersion, ry >a; 2V/a = 72° to 78°: y\c=15° to 19°; probably ferriferous hastingsites; con- sistently more ferrifcrous than hornblendes of basement pyroxenic granulites. Hornblende of the clinopyroxenic and hornblendic granites; Habit and mineral associations, 2V and y A c are similar to those of hornblende of ortho- 58 ALLAN F. WILSON pyroxenic granites, but refractive indices (y range 1-682-1-673) consistently lower (unly exceptions: sphene-hearing biotite adamellite from Kulgera, 30138, in which » = 1-692; pleochroism — a= pale greenish fawn, 8 = khaki green, y = clear greenish blue, and a similar rock from Stony-Jump-Up, Musgrave Ranges), Plesehroism (for y= 1-681 to 1-682, y Ac= 18°) —a= pale fawn, 8 = khaki green, y — yellowish green, or (for y= 1-673, yA c=17T°) «=yellowish fawn, &=veenish khaki, y=green. In composition, homblendes of granites [ree from orthopyroxene are less ferriferous than those of orthopyroxenic granites, Biowce. Biotite of the orthopyroxenic granites; Rarc, but may occur as small irregular grains encrusting some grains of won ore and hornblende; strongly pleochroic — u =light straw-yellow; B= y=chestnut brown; y ranges from 1:640 to 1:665 indicating biotite more ferriferous than in granites devoid of orthopyroxene; 3V/u mostly 0". Biotite of granites devoid of orthopyroxene: Plentiful; corrodes iron ores and homblende, and in some rocks (¢.g,, 30135) bivtite tends to act as buffer between those minerals and corroding microcline; pleachroic haloes rare (hest seen in 30573); mostly biaxial (2V/u=0° to 15°, r Na,O in both orthopyroxenic and non-orthopyroxenic granites. Note, however, that if cation % (rather than weight %) is considered, K is almost equal or slightly less than Na in both types of granite (see Table 6). e. Although the range of CaO, and the An content in normative plagioclase tend to be higher in the rocks free from orthopyroxene, the range of An content in the modal plagioclase is about equal in both types of granite. TABLE 4 A comparison of the main chemical features of somu of the granites from Central Australia ! Comparison | Ortbopytoxonic granites Non-orfhopyroxonic | (A)—variation in 3 granites (B)—variation in 4 Weight, | Weight Woight®, I Bid, AwB 6352-66-96 61-48-66-20 Ti», AsB 0-S4- 0-97 0:69- 1+16 Al,O5 A&B 14-$2-16+76 14-79-16+07 Fe,0, B>a 0-96- 1-81 2-GR- 2°98 Fed A>B 3085. 4-16 2-72. 3° 7A Fe,0;4-FeO BoA 4-93. 4-7 5-42- 7:27 FeO 4. MnO \ re = , ) Ki Feo + MnO 1 Fc.0; A>B 0-70. 0-81 0°47- 0°58 Of in CLEW A>RB 61-3 -69-1 25-4 -b9-2 norm arthopyrox, Mn) BSA O-09- 0°23 0-18- 0-32 MgO AaB O-OL- 1-24 0-92- 1-38 CaO BSA 2-06- 4-51 3: 2B4- 4-77 , al An in OUR B>A 26-8 -33-4 Q1-7 441 norm plagio. \ Au in modal plagio, ; AsB 22 = RY 26 0 --BT BaQ >B 0-12- 0-16 tr - U-O¢ Na,0 A=B 2: 73- 3-88 2-54- 3-18 KO A=L 4-D1- 5-h4 3-5R- 4°30 A,0+ BSA O-D4- 0-14 0-05- 0-26 PLO, B>A 0-38- 0-52 0-55- 0-85 f. The most obvious difference is in the state of oxidation of the iron. Al- though the orthopyroxenic granites are somewhat lower in combined Fe.O, and Fc than the granites free from orthopyroxene, they are much richer in FeO. The difference in state of oxidation of the two groups of granites is further em- ory f i Akal FeO+MnO phasized in Table 4 by the contrast in the ratio FcO + MnO + Fe,0, and in normative orthopyroxene. In Table 5 an interesting relation is suggested between geographic location and the content of iron oxides (here expressed as cations—see also Table 6) in the granites. From Emabella in the west to Kulgera in the east the granites tend to become Jess orthopyroxenic and increasingly hornblendic and biotitic, and, chemically, there is a general increase in the state of oxidation of iron from west to east. The basernent gneisses and granulites, moreover, tend to change in facies from granulite to amphibolite from west to east. An important conclusion from the chemical data of Tables 4 and 5 is that the orthopyroxenic rocks are in a lower state of oxidation than the hornblendic and biotitie rocks. On increase in P,O; (and presumably F, since the P.O; is fixed in these rocks as fluorapatite), and on slight increase in H,O+, the Fe has become increasingly oxidized. These features are independent of the SiOz GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 65 content. It is suggested that the availability of oxygen was an important factor controlling the formation and stability of the orthopyroxenic granites, The lack of any significant difference in the total oxygen content of the orthopyroxenic and. non-orthopyroxenic tocks is pnPeeatiog but not disturbing (see Table 5). It should be remembered that the small but significant changes in oxidation TABLE 5 The variation in state of oxidation of iron in the granites, arranged in order from west to eust. Cation ratio i Cation % Oxygen no. Fe?+Mn® Fe" + Mn*+ Fo3 for 100 cations 30758 Inrnabella S28 3-88 163+4 30385 Ombagunda ~726 4-71 166-0 S0558 Spinifex Hill -718 4-51 167°5 30604 Bald Hill *H08 4-40 167:7 30210 Aleurra Hill “99 5729 166-0) $4568 Ayers Ranges +493 6-62 165-2 30138 Kulgera “HAT 4°33 167-1 state of the iron are masked by variations of little or no petrological significance in some of the more abundant cations. Thus, Sit and Al? between them hold about 150 out of a total of 167 oxygen ions whereas Fe* and Fe* between them hold only about 5 or 6 oxygen atoms (readily calculated from cation %— see Tabic 6). In basic rocks, however, the change of valence of Fe shows a more significant change in oxygen distribution among the cations of the rock. TABLE & Ton Fercentages in Granites Orthopyroxenie Ton || 789 | aoaas | uses | Non-orthopyroxenic 30210 34568 30138 Si 59°16 62-25 63-4 60°19 58-48 62°56 Ti 0-58 0-62 + ey 0-80 {I-83 0-60 Al 18-40 16-00 16°08 17-09 18-02 16-47 Fe 0-67 1-29 1-27 2-12 2-85 1-92 ¥Fe® 3-09 3-29 3-06 2-08 2-§2 2+15 Mn 0-07 (13 1-18 0-19 Ole 0+ 26 Mg 1-26 1-74 1°58 1-58 1-96 1°30 Cu 4°50 3°27 2°00 4-44 4:86 3-28 Ba 0-04 O06 0-015 U-OL5 Na FOL 6-10 5-02 5-81 5-20 5-83 K 4-76 5-01 6-22 4-33 4°36 5-18 R Q-41 0:30 0-27 0-44 0-68 O45 (OH) 0-80 0 BS O26 0-32 1-64 O94 0 for 100 163-4 165-98 =| 167-54 166-03 165+18 167-09 cations | RELATION OF THE GRANITES TO METAMORPINIC FACIES OntHorynoxentc GrANIres The country rocks in the vicinity of these granites are rocks of granulite facies. Details of these rocks are set out elsewhere (Wilson, 1954b, vol. 2). Sphene is absent, and where hornblende is present it is the dark brownish, hastingsitic type which appears to be stable in rocks of granulite facies. Where {i} ALLAN F, WLLSON garnet ovcurs’ it is the typical garnet of granulite facics (a pyrope-almandine, very deficient in spessartite, with n=—1°772 to 1-796, and MnO =0:50¥ to 081%). The eranites themselves shuw many features in common with charnockitie tocks from several parts of the world, They are composed essentially of ande- sine, K-feldspar, quartz, orthupyroxene, clinopyroxene and irom ores. Horn- blende and biotite may be present, but ave relatively late magmatic minerals, However, pyroxenic xenoliths are partly converted to hornblende, thus indicat- ing that the “magma™ was not as dry as has sometimes been supposed. The hornblende is more ferriferons than that of the granulites, but is oot the green hornblende so commonly found in rycks of amphibolite facies. Sphene is absent. The potash feldspar is a moderately microperthitic orthoclase ur nun- twinned microline, and is nut fuurescent (Wilson, 1950b, p. 229). In the metamorphic aureole garnet and cordierite-bearing rocks are de- veloped in a narrow zone near most contacts of the orthopyruxenie granite in the Ernabella cegion. The gamet is not the spessartitic almandinc so commonly found in metamorphic rocks of amphibolite facies. The known range of re- fractive index (1) is 1-781 ta 1-794. This suggests. that the granite was em- placed under P.T- conditions equivalent to at least the lower grades of granu- lite facies. Tlowever, the co-existence of cordierite and “granulite” garnet in rocks which appear lo be isoflacial with rocks containing “granulite” gurnet und hypersthene is possibly explained in terms of a more purely “thermal” meta- marphistn, whereby some of the features of the pyroxene hornfels facies (namely, co-existence of cordierite and hypersthene) have been superimposed on rocks of cranulite facies. Indeed, the thermal metamorphism of “dry” metamorphic rocks hy a fairly “dry” granite could be expected to produce rocks haying features in earamnon with both the granulite fucies and the pyroxene hornfels facies. The associated pegmatites of the orthepyroxenic granites contain horn blende: biotite, sphene, alunite and spessartitic garnet (n=1-:517). Such an assemblage is foreign to rocks of granulite facies, but is stable in amphibolite facies, This suggests that, althonyh the parent orthopyroxenic granite could have Leen emplaced under “granulite metamorphic conditions”, the associated pegmatites formed under the lower P,T- cenditiuns of amphibolite facies. Spuexe-Horveresne-Bierrre Gnanires The country recks in the vicinity of these granites belong to amphibolite facics, Details of these rocks will appear in subsequent publications dealing with the Ayers Ranges and Kulgera Hills. Sphene-bearing gneisses, cordierite- spessartitic almandine-sillimanite gneisses, ancl amphibolitie rocks rich in a bluish green homblende (y= 1/690) are characteristic rocks. The spessartitic- almandines have n= 1-807, and MnO = 11-0%. These mineral assemblages are unstable in pranulite facies, but stable in certain portions of amphibolite ficies, The granites Themselves are devoid of orthopyroxene, and clinopyroxene accurs only as relies heavily corroded by a bluish green hornblende (+= 1-692. 2V/'u=55°, y Ac = 19°), whieh is, in tarn, heavily corroded by biotite. Sphene is common and the potush feldspar (microclioe) fluoresces pink under short wave ullra-violel radiation, The associated pegmatites of these granites contain muscovite, beryl, tour maline, bivtite, microvline, and a spessartitic garnet with n = 1-817, These features suggest that both the parent sphene-hornblende-biotite granite and end-phase pogmatitic material were emplaced under “amphibolite metanivwphic conditions”. SRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA ay Horwarennig Granites or Intanarmnate Tye Between the two extremes of the orthopyroxenic granites and the granites containing sphene and biotite there are many granites which are hornblendic bul contain neither orthopyroxene on the one hand, nor sphene on the wther, The hornblende is not the bluish green type noted above, nor the eommon green type. It is rather a brownish green type, in some respects similar to that found in certain metamorphic rocks of the granulite facies, but in other respects it is somewhat like the hornblende of the orthopyroxenic granites, The country rocks are difficult to place in facies as there are portions which may be taken as lypical of the grannulite facies, und others where characteristies oF Che eaaphi- halite facies appear. Tt is thus concluded that the granites described in this paper may be taken to be largely isofacial with their country rocks, The ovthopyroxenic “igneous” rucks were emplaced under P.T- conditions comparable with (but probably a little lower than) those which produce typical metamorphic racks of the granu- lite facies. The granites containing sphene and blue-green hornblende were etuplaced under P,T- eoudilians comparable with those which produce certain high grade rocks in the amphibolite facies. The normal hornblendic granites, however, were probably emplaced «under P,T- conditions capable of producing metumurphic rocks intermediate in many features between those of the granulite facies and the amphibolite facies. THE PETROLOCICAL SIGNIFICANCE OF CERTAIN MINERAL REACTIONS ReybaAGEMeNr OF OnvHOrYKOXUNE, CLINVPYHOXENR AND IRON ORE BY HORNKL ENTE Replacement of orthopyroxene by clinapyroxene, and replacement of pyroxene by hornblende are reactions commonly of considerable importance in the metamorphic rocks which are associated with the wraniles ander discussion in this paper: The latter phenomenon usually represents a fixation of certain cnmponents sich as water, Na, Ca and F from migrating metasumatizing agouts, Since similar reactions are also comm in the associated granites, some petrologists may be tempted to favour a hypothesis of mcetasomatic emplacement for the granites. Towever, the field evidence for magrnatic emplacernent of these rocks iy more easily satished by considering that many of the reactions are due to concersitration of end-phase liquors, as is the case in most Hormal (geneous rocks, This is suggested by the facet that xenoliths of hypersthene-augite- labradorite granulite in orthopyroxenie granite are found to be impregnated with biotite, Huorapatite, potash-feldspar and hornblende, and rimmed with a sheath of brown hornblende, Thus the orthopyroxenic granite cuntained sufficient “end liqnors” to carry out considerahle envrosion of basic xenolillis. On the other lain, the orthopyroxenic granites cannot be considered to be rich in volatile components, for they have had little ravtasomatizing effect on the wall rocks, and they contain only small quantities of minerals normally asso- ciated with the end-phase of normal igneous rocks. In hornblende-rich granites pyroxene is found ta be more completely re- placed by hornblende, and apatite, biotite, calcite and late quartz are more nwoportant than in the orthopyroxenic granites. In the biotite-rich granites sphene and fluonte may he additional end-phase minerals, These reactions are probably strongly influenced by the availability of oxveen as well as of Huorine and water, Connosios or PLAGIOgASR AY K-Frnnspan Corrosion of plagioclase appears to have taken place in at least three waya, resulting in the development of micro-antiperthite, microperthite. and an exten- sive replacement of shattered and bent plagioclase (see Plates 2, 3 ancl 4). 63 ALLAN F, WILSON Miero-ontiperthite —The irregular development of micro-antiperthite appears to be confined in some rocks to these portions must affected by the same stresses which controlled the formation of twinning, In some granites (as in some of the basement eranulites) it would even appeur that the K-feldspar lenses tend to be localized in “potential” tension gashes in the newly formed twin-lamellac, While it is possible that the shearing may have initiated exsohution of dissolved K-feldspur only in thuse zones most affected by the shearimy, it is thuught that it is more likely that the structural weaknesses, such as developing twin-plades and potential tension gashes, have merely assisted to localize the replacement of the plagioclase by migrating K-feldspar or its equivalent ions. True exselu- tiem mierc-antiperthite has not been recognized in these rocks. Microperthite —In some rocks microperthite bas been developed by the replacement of plagioclase by K-feldspar. The replacement of plagioclase has been so extreme that it is difficult to dectde which is the host and which is the included mineral. Pl. 4, Fig. 1 shows how such a microperthite can sometimes be developed from miero-antiperthite, This is identieal with a phenumenen described from the basement granulites of the Musgrave Ranges (see Fig, 25, Wilson, 1954h, val, 2, p, 92), Extensive replacement of bent and shattered plagtoniane crystals.—This is une of the most common replacement phenomena found in these granites. In almost all cases the twin-lamellac are bent and shattered. The petrographic evidence is clear that the twinning and distortion took place at about the same time, and it appears that the twinning itscli has been largely developed hy shearing. In the associated granulites and gneisses, identival bending and shat- tering of plagioclase grains appear to have gone on at the same time as potash- feldspathization. Not only has K-feldspar replaced plagioclase in the solid state, hut emhedral fluorapatite crystals are commonly found in such positions within embayments of the plagioclase that they must represent u fixatiun uf P und F ly some of the Ca expelled from the plagiuelase, For replacements of this type, K, Si. P and F were necessary, Such reactions seem to have tuken lace during a period of shattering and upwarp, or even of active folding which has been supermmposed on the products of a metamorphism which took place under P|T- conditions characteristic of the granulite facies. This is suggested by the fact that in the granulites the plagioclase grains tend to he poorly twinned in mest of those rocks where bending of (OL0) cleavages (and twin-lamellac) and K-feldspathization are not well developed. It is well known that plagio- vlase is very poorly twinned in many rocks of the granulite facies. Develop- ment of un-bent clinopyroxene from the carrosion of bent osthopyroxene and fixation of Ca expelled from replaced bent plagioclase, and the development throughout the rock of irregular cracks filled with bands of magnetite, emphasise that considerable metasomatic adjustments have taken place in many of the original granulites during or just after a period of folding or warping. AU of these features are also common in the granites which appear Eo inject the eranulites. Now, then, can the granites be magmatic. for wherever similar phenomena are present in the granulites it is clear that the reactions have gone im in sitte in the solid state? This is a question of fundamental importance, and must now be discussed. Corrosion of plagioclase by K-feldspar is well known as a late phase of crystallization of silicate melts, is phenomenon is often attended by corre sion and replacement of orthopyroxene by clinopyroxene, clinopyroxene by horn- blende, hornblende by biotite, and by crystallization of Tate apatite, ‘calcite, quartz, iron ores and certain other accessories, Since these mineralogical re- actions are all developed in varying degrees in most of the granites of the area 32” 240 iow aw Be 16E 24E T T =F T T 7 Ly at a | T T —T T T&T GRANITE % \ \ \ 7 weet, GEOLOGICAL SKETCH MAP ! / ! OF A : - ~ cai CENTRAL & EASTERN MUSGRAVE RANGES Yeo / le Oe NSN ee Wem -~ -~ . . WELL * C. AUSTRALIA a 7% unwarees 2-5 or See SR \ ? \ . \e . . ‘ 7 J) cf GRANULITES ano GNEISSES, vominantty a fa Ly . / ‘ 4 ya lee we ‘ a \ T- FA ORTHOPYROXENIC BUT INCLUDING HORNBLENDIC TYPES ff s At \s \ | A 5 ¥ ’ % ‘ c+ + +4 / Pa faptoures rHehso J «es ty" ’ ooo? \ -\ [S77 %} WOODROFFE NORITE GROUP, ixcwoinc : ' 8 Wy tb ce eho” | ‘ \, SENTINEL) 2 WSS ¢) WYPERSTHENITES AND ANORTHOSITES | + a | on \/ 3° t J HILL s — ? he PES oa zt fe eS & ey we 8 / a faye a8 AA A| WATIA BIOTITE NORITE ‘ST ae a \ + igs a P. ' \ © of wa .+t + aA Say ro SONS > a re i eT) & | [| UPSAN DOWNS ADAMELLITE S, ARE \ PAOD apt | + \\ ‘i py + \ j- =~] ERNABELLA ADAMELLITE, optnopvaoxenic a ee | an b ’ \\ 2. * | » « © | AND RELATED HORNBLENDIC FACIES « ls cts \ Pr) f \ ui t" sh © ee TALJARITIA Py oe | SEN MAJOR SHEAR ZONE pa) Sree ae ¢ ae ; eee A _ ° -<7 o) WELL STRIKE AND DIP OF GRANULITES wy * tt I 60870 AND GNEISSES 25 a Via i, . fi . ° , a STRIKE AND DIF OF OVERTURNED ‘! é i od 4 GRANULITES AND GNEISSES ane f% | « + © 8 i : 4 wn 30 F ' aK ee wt S MS Mar 8 8 8 {| 40 DIRECTION AND PLUNGE OF x A tir a ¥ a. / 70 ey A SAL LINE ATION _- ra has both oe Ne ae c/ ~ . 4. & vy 26° 15's -—— va ‘id ( (Foe YF SESS yy," te A fae a wen, 20°15 fo TivEns ‘Or IGNEOUS MASSES D\ GFA susasxicts (Mi CARRUTHERS, of < N woos AE ar 9%, A] sss "8 Mes . 00 j ‘ Aro MERNABELLA 4 oy A PROMINENT HILLS ( City Pie /ie vs aie | FAS w \e/ ew ShENGUNPAS ( Epaeapesgon oH? a Hel? at op a ane " i toy Pop WNP Ye . . ' os Ay Bat WOODROFFE: —— ot EG, ; 4 O”*% a SS 7: ak oe Jy Fi oe Pat ec PASS rst mah Ace i * . t a | SPT TEs rie eer f en “aoe A / ad ip pA WA /. NY lili jPARK | Zs am ye .-—s 8 20 70 ; ~ +> rh oe bet’ PRO aad [- a oo et “7 . -, . A det Borex of if # / NO OUTCROPS \7 ie Ls rs ae wa 5 pias HILL / ! / 3 LN We et \ aig + “st hes as ie ~, a \ Nas. io : : 8s xy rs f N e + <> + + \r | 3 — —____ Ss gute ae? \ Veen SA: aa a “ pe y ie alee ne ped oe UPSAN asa Cw —==— ee ~ ne no ¥ SCALE IN MILES Se \ NN L a -s / ° 2 4 & 8 10 2 \ ‘ f \ ‘ / / Le a ! ies a | | 1 —_t SSS Ses a | {| __ 4 — ee } 1 ! 1 L ff 1 air 168 32W 24w iow BBW oo BE WE 24 s — |32°E GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA fit one could argue a magmatic origin and emplacement of these granites, While it is true that such reactions do occur, certain grave textural anomalies appear if such a view is accepted without modification. If corrosion of plagioclase took place in a potassic liquid, a grain would be gradually disintegrated, and, before completely dissolving, may be expected to drift apart as corroded microxenocrysts with random orientation. Bending and fracturing of the crystals could take place during corrosion by the liquid but only if there were a small amount of intergranular liquid, for free-Hoating crystals cannot he bent. If it can be demonstrated that distortion of erystals touk place during their corrosion the phenomenon could perhaps he called a protoclastic structure. In the granites under discussion, however, the corroding K-feldspar could scarcely have been merely an intergranular liquid for the following reasons: (1) The sheath of K-feldspar is usually much too wide to have allowed protoclistic bending and shattering to go on during corrosion by K-feldspiar. (2) Relies of plagioclase have not drifted apart as they would in liquid, In many cases the plagioclase has clearly been replaced in sift. Tt is thus concluded that the extensive replacements of bent and broken plagioclase crystals would appear to favour a metasomatic mode of emplacement of the granites. A suggested reconciliation of the field and luboratary evidence concerning origin and mode of emplacement of these granites is set out under “Conclusions”. AGE OF THE CHRANTTES The granites and intruded gneisses and granulites of the Musgrave Block are presumed to be of Preeambrian age. Almost unmetamorphosed Upper Proterozoic scdiments of the Adelaide System are reported to lie unconform- ably upon the Precambrian gneisses east of the Everard Ranges (Jack, 1915, figure facing p. 46). Tillites have been recorded in these sediments (Wilson, 1952c). Stas dolerite dykes are found cutting both the gneissic complex and the granites of the Everard Ranges yet have not been found cutting the Upper Proterozoic sediments, it is presumed that the granites of the Everard Ranges are Pre-Upper Proterozoic in age. Similar dolerites cut the granites in the Ayers and Musgrave Ranges, hence an early Precambrian age for the granites vf the Musgrave Ranges is reasonable on the evidence at present available (Wilson. 1948). CONCLUSIONS Two major problems have hecome evident in this study. One is the petro- logical relation between the uranites. and the granulites and gneisses: the other is the structural relation between the granites, and the granulites and gneisses. These are problems because there is strong petrographic evidence that the granites have been derived from the granulites and gneissos by metasomatism, but there is equally strong ficld and petrographic evidence that the granites were magmatically emplaced. Moreover, some of the most important granites are more or less meridionally-trending masses which ave set within more ur Jess meridionally-trending granulites and gneisses, and yet, whem they are considered resionully, they are distributed geographically as an E.-W. string of granites rather than as a N.-S. string. Consideration of these two allicd problems raises many side issues of im- pastariop., but much more field work must be done before these can he discussed with proht. ri) ALLAN F, WILSON PETROLOGICAL RELATION BETWEEN THE GRANITES AND THE BASEMENT GRANULITES AND GNEISSES Three main hypotheses may be brought forward to explain the origin of the granites and their relation to the basement rocks. The hypotheses emphasize (respectively) the role of metasomatism, or of a silicate melt, or of mobilization of « rvuconstituted hasement. None of these hypotheses indicates the ultimate cause of the granite formation, and the favoured hypothesis (mobilization of a reconstituted pasement is to be looked upon as one which should stimulate more fundamental geochemical research, Moreover, it will be noted that some of the evidence which is listed under a particular hypothesis is not strong, und is capable of other interpretations. Metasomatism hypothesis—features which could support the hypothesis of the formation of the granites in situ by metasomatisin, Petrographic evidence: a. K-feldspathization of plagioclase on a scale larger than js normally seen in an end-phase magmatic liquid (see p, 69), b, Replacement of plagioclase by hornblende in some granites. c, Zircon is of une type in the granites, whereas many of the basement erannliles contain a svite of zircons as in meta-sedimentary rocks. In sume granulites, however, a complex vircen suite would appear to be in process of homogenization. Poldervaart and von Backstram (1949, p. 467) give some evidence that zircon may undergo granulation and recrystallization by ultra- metamerphism of a vrade higher than the sillimanite zone. Field evidence,—Nil, Silieute-melt hypethesis—features which could support the hypothesis that the wranites crystallized from a fairly pure silicate melt, Petrographic evidence: a, Orthopyroxene and hamblende are notably different from those of the juteuded basement. b, An order of crystallization for the mafic minerals Ccommonly ortho- pyroxene, followed in order hy vlinopyroxene, hornblende and hiotite) is the sume as that of basic magmas, ec. Zircon is of one type in the granites, whereas many of the basement @ranulites contain a snite of azireons as in meta-scdimentary rocks, Occasional phenacrysts of won-zoned andesine (almost identical m ortho- pyroxenie and non-orthopvroxenic granites) may be found throughout the whole area. (But note that similar, though smaller, non-zoned andesine grains are common in the basement granulites of comparable composition. Moreuver, there is evidence that many of these grains have developed in the granulites in @ manner compurable with the growth of K-feldspar porphyroblasts: Thus, it could be argued that the occasional phenocrysts in the granites do not neces- sarily sapport the silicate-melt hypothesis, for the phenoerysts could be relics of andesine porphyroblasts which. grew during a metamorphic phase prior to mobilization of the granite magma). Field evidence—Xenoliths (sheathed with hornblende) are alined parallel 1G transgressive contacts with the hasement prannlites. Xenoliths are mncom- mon in areas away from the coritacts, Surronnding the masses of orthopyroxenic granite there is an auredle in which cordierite and pyrope-almandine co-exist in the basement rocks of ap» propriate composition. The basement rocks are elsewhere dominantly granu- lite facies. Similar aurcoles, but at.a slighUly lower temperature range, surround the clinopyroxenic, hornblendic and biotitic granites. GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 7L Mobilization hypothesis — fedtures which could. support the hypothesis that ihe granites were formed by mobilization of a magma produced by reconstitution of the basement pyroxenic granulites. (This is the bypothesis favoured in this paper.) Petrographic evideuce: a. Zireon, This is nun-zoned and of one type, whether found in artho- pyroxenic, hornblendic or biotitic granites, It appears to be a fairly “carly mineral” in the granites, If the zircon has been formed by homogenization and recrystallization of heterogeneous suites uf zircons in the basement rocks the process would need to have been very efficient, for no. evidence of “original” zireons has heen found im the granites themselves, Poldervaart and von Back- strém (1949. p. 467) bring forward some evidence that complete recrystalli- zation of this sort can go on during the formation of granite hy “ultra-meta- morphic” processes. b, K-feldspathization, Replacement of bent and shattered plagioclase by K-feldspar is common in both granites and basernent rocks, but is more con- sistently developed and is generally more effective in the granites. The de- velopment of these and other K-feldspar replacement phenomena (as discussed on p. 68) is strong evidence for a replacement origin of the granites (as pointed out above). Towever, it must he remembered that the hyputhesis now under discussion also requires widespread reconstitution of the basement rocks. In- deca], the uct of mobilization itself is thought to be largely controlled by more intense “Hooding” of the reconstituted basement rocks (in structurally favour- able pasitions ) by ions of K, P and #. In a sense, some of the more extensively replaced shattered plagioclase grains may be looked upon as a result of cor- rosior uf the rheamorphic erystal roush by the K-rich “lubricant”. ¢. Fluorapatite. Fuhedra nf fluorapatite commonly have been formed by the fixation of P and F by Ca in process of beimg displaced from plagioclase during K-metasomatism. d. Orthopyroxene. In the granites orthopyroxene is consistently much more ferriferous than the orthopyroxene of both acid and hasie basement rocks, Moreover, the Fe content of the orthopyroxene is not linked with the SiO, or alkali content of the granites. Ilowever. the orthopyroxene of the granites is thus not merely xenoerystal orthopyroxene fram the Fdeietent rocks, as in some granites (c.g. Wilson, 1958a, p. 39). Fram theoretical considerations, one would expect the magma which has been produced by partial melting of the busement to contain matic minerals which are more ferriferous than those of the basement, if for no other reason than that ferrous silicates have a lower melting point than corresponding magnesium silicates, The differences in composition (determined optically) of the co-existing pyroxenes of the granites and of the basement granulites (Fig. 3) may he explained if the orthopyroxenic granites resulted from palingenetic mayrna produced by partial melting of the basement in structurally favourable positions. Lf «a palingenetie granite magma were formed from erustal or geosynclinal rocks rich in volatiles the mafic minerals would probubly be biotite or hornblende. These, too, shontd be richer in Fe than curresponding mineral phases in the original rocks. Hf palingenetic granite mayma were produced by partial melting of igneous or metamorphic rocks which are low in volutile content (such as pyroxene granulites) pyroxenes are likely to be prominent among the new mafic miincrals. Moreover, the mafic minevals tuay be expected to be more fereiferous than corresponding mineral phases in the original rocks. Thus, it is signifieant that in Centra] Australia the orthopyroxene of the orthopyroxenic granites and the hornblende of the hern- 72 ALLAN F. WILSON blendic granites are more ferriferous than corresponding mafic minerals uf the basement gneisses and granulites. Possibly due, in large measure. to an increase in availability Of oxygen in the ureas undergoing injection, orihepyroxenie granites appear to have given way to clino-pyroxenic and hurnblendic granites. A) of these types of granite may he found in a single restricted area, e.g,, Sentinel Hill, This emphasizes the genetic unity of the long E.W, stving of granites which range froin artho- pyroxene granites in the Musgrave Ranges through saugite-biotite granites in the Avers Ranges and Kulgera Hills. Field evidence.—As for the silicate-melt hypothesis. STNUGTURAT. RELATION BETWKEN THE GRANITES AND THE GRANULITES AND GNEISSES Extensive field work must precede the explanation of the apparent contra- diction of the lang E.-W. string of petrologically clusely-related magmatic granites, many of whieh form N,-S, bodies sub: parallel to the major fold strac- tures of the basement rocks. An origin of the granites by an orthodox geo- synclinal-disintegration mechanism is difficult to substantiate. The weight of aveilable evidence is that the granites here described may have been formed by a reconstitution of the basement rocks (now represented by hypersthenic ar horablendic granulites of many types), It is suggested that a regional deep- seated EW. downwarp (possibly associated with deep-seated E.-W. trans- current shearing) may have been sufficient to have caused thorough reconsti- tution of the basement rocks, and to have produced “pockets” of potential magma in favourable aveas. Subsequent emplacement of the resultant rheomorphic masses woukl be assisted by pre-existing weaknesses due to the N\-S. attitude of many of the original rocks. This may explain the E.-W. string of granites which are often found within rocks of N.-S, tectonic trend and could throw light on some of the lineation problems in parts of Central Australia (sce Wilson, 1953b, 1954a, 1959a). EW. downwarping is not tectonically foreign ta this portion of Australia. There have been some major E.-W, downwarpings and archings immediately to the N, and possibly to the S. of the Musgrave Block. The Amadeus Trough seems to be the relic of downwarping and other crustal disturbances which later became the basin for sedimentation ranging from late Proterozoic to at Jeast Ordovician, It is not suggested, however, that the Amadeus Trough as such has had anything to do with the origin of the granites under discussion, hut there scems to be evidence that there has been a very early E-.W. crustal weuk- ness in this area which may have been the ultimate cause of the granite formation. THE SIGNIFICANCE OF TUE GRANITES IN THE CHARNOCKITE PROBLEM A siperimposed metamorphism (which is essentially thermal aud metu- somatic rather than dynamic) could be responsible for some of the puzzling features of Charnockitic rocks. For example, the vrawulose texture of many of the basic granulites associated with these granites is remarkably like that prv- duced by prolonged thermal metamorphism of dolerite. Regional downwarp on E-W. axes may have first developed rocks of granulite facies (or upper levels of the amphibolite facies) from metamorphic or igneous rocks which, inany millions of years previously, had suffered their original metamorphism ur mjection. These have undergone intense granulation in structurally unstable zones (eg., near zones af “plastic shear” which would represent fault zones at GHANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA TW higher structural levels), and reerystallization elsewhere. In favourable zones pos pues oh a granites were develigzed by a reconstitution of the basement TOUKS, The restriction of urthopyroxenie granites tu areas where the associated racks are dominantly of granulite facies, and the restriction of hornblende tranites and sphene-bearing yraniles to areas within the amphibolite facies suggest that the metamorphism of the basement rocks and the generatiun of the granitic magmas are closely related phenomena. Moreover, on the uprrise af the mobilized “igneous” masses the basement rocks have suffered a further meta- morphism (of relatively local extent), This is more akin to the conditions necessary to produce the rocks of pyroxene hornfels facies, As was seen on p. 66, rocks of granulite and pyroxene hornfels facies haye much in common, mineralogically. Whether or not the hypothesis of a downwarping of already metamorphosed rocks can be substuntiuted, there are some important facts which do emerge from the present stucy. In the Musgrave Ranges charnockitice rocks of more flan one origin have been foumd. The basement rucks are mostly hypersthene-bearing granulites and gneisses which are of granulite facies. They are metamorphosed sediments of various types, basic igneous rocks, and rocks whieh lave been so affected by metasomatism that their original character is unknown, Moreover, some af the basement recks shaw evidence of superimposed metamorphism whereby features ot the amphibolite facies, or of the pyroxene hornfels facies, may appear. The orthopyroxenic granites described in this paper may also be called charnockitic. These differ structurally from the charnockitie rocks of the base- ment roeks in that they have been magmatically emplaced, Although there are some important features of these maginatically emplaced rocks which owe their origin to metasomatic metamorphism, there are other important features Which appear to haye resulted from crystallization from a silicate melt, even thuugh this may not have been any more than the interstitial material of the partly crystalline mush fram which these charmmockitic granites were firmed, These “magmatic” charnockitic granites, morcoyer, gradc into augite gran- ites, hornblende granites and even sphene-beariug biotite granites where the P.T- conditions (and possibly availability of oxygen and water) are more like those pertaining to the amphibolite facies than to the granulite Facies, Although these “magmatic” charnockitic rocks cover a large area nf the Musgrave Hanges, charnuckitic racks of purely metumorphic origin (ie. the basement granolites) are more Important both there and elsewhere in Australia, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Part of the cost of the second and third ficld operations was borne by Gom- monwealth Researeli Grants administered by the University of Adelaide. Initial luboratory work was carricd out in the University of Adelaide. Research grants from the University of Western Australia have paid for several chemical anulyses, and the preparation of the manuscript and final drafting of the maps for pub- lication, Tait have borne most of the cost of the fourth field trip. Laboratory work was dune at the University of Western Australia after 1949. Messrs, F, Billing and KR, Morris bave rendered valuable technical assistance. The co- operation of Richard Brock and Lester Russell on the second and third field trips (respectively) was Outstanding. The staff of the Ernabella Mission Station was particularly helpFul during the field work in the Musgrave Ranges. re ALLAN F. WILSON REFERENCES Avan, F. D., 1929. The geology of Geylon, Canad, 4. Res, 1, pp. 425-511, Asstncao, C, F. T., and Pixto Corino, A., 1955. © rocks with charnockitic affinities in Mozambique, Proc, Pan-Ind, Ocean Sei. Comgs,, Perth, Aug., 1954, pp. 20-33. Basknow, H., 1905, Geological report on the caustry traversed by the South Australian Coverament North-West Prospecting Expedition, 1903, Trans Ray. Sov, $, Aust, 2, pp. 57-102. Brasmanr, A., 1933. Syntexis and differentiation, Geol. Mas., 70, pp. 97-117. Beown, H, Y. L., 1890. Report on journvy from Wartina to Musgrave Ranges, S. Aust. Parl. Paper, 45. Fornest, J., 1875. “Explorations in Australia” (S$. Low, Marston, Ete.: Lindon), Grevens, ‘I’; W., and Dunne, J. C., 1943. Charnockitie rocks near Port Edward in Alfred Country, Natal, Trans. Geol. Soc. &. Afr., 45, pp. 183-314, Gires, E., 1874. “Geographical travels in Central Australia, 1872-1874" (McGurron, Bird and Co,: Melbourne), Gossr. W, C., 1874, Reports and diary of Mr. W. C, Gosse’s expedition in 1873, 5. Aust. Parl, Paper, 48, Groves, A. W., 1935. The churnockite series of Ugnnda, British East Africa, Quart, 1, Geol, Sac. Lond., 91, pp, 150-207, Hates, F. H., Weous, A, K., and Wuuxs, M, K,, 1049. “The petrology of the izneans meks”, 10th ed. (Murby: London). Hess, H. H., 1941. Pyroxenes of common mafie magmas, part 2, Amer. Min,, 26, pp. 573-594. Hess, H. H., 1949 Chemical composition and optical properties of common cling-pyroxenes, part 1, Amer. Min., 34, pp. 621-666. Hess, 1. H., 1952, Orthopyroxenes of the Bushveld Type, ion substitutions and changes in unit cell dimensions, Amer. J. Sei., Bowen Vol., pp. 173-187. Hneranen, A., 1947. Archean geology of the Turku disttict in south-western Finland, Bull, Geol. Soc, Amer., 58, 1019-1084. Hoitanp, T. H., 1900. The charnockite series, a group of archacan hyperstlhente rocky in Peninsular India, Mem. Geol, Surv. India, 28 (2). Howe, R. A., 1955. The geochemistry of the churmockite series of Madras, India, Vans, Hay. Soc. Edin., 62, pp. 725-768. Jack. KR. Locesanr, 1915. The geology and prospeets of the region te the south of the Musgrave Ranges, Bull. Geol. Surv. $. Aust., 5. Kuno, H., 1941. Dispersion of optic axes in the orthorhombic pyroxene serias, Proce. lap. Acad. Tokyo, 17, pp. 204-209, Lansen, E. S., 1938, “Some new variation diagrams for groups of igneous rocks, J. Grol. 46, pp. 505-520. Perryjoun, F, J,, 1949, “Sedimentary racks’ ( pil New York). Pronamurne, ©. .S., 1053, “The chatnackite problem” (Mysore Geol. Assoc,: Bangalore, India). Pore A., and vow Backstrom, |. W,, 1949. A study of an area ut Kukamas (Cane Province), Trans. Gool. Soe. 8. Afr., 52, pp. 433-495. Quanse., P., 1951, The chamockite series of the Varberg district om the south-westera woust of Sweden, Ark, Min,, L, nr. 10, pp, 227-332, 7 Rowinson, E, G., 1949. The petrologigl nature of some rocks from the Minn. Tompinsun aad Avers Ranges of Central Australian, Teans, Roy, Sac. & Aust. 73 (1). wp, 28-39, Srnerat, Vy, 1893. The country between the Everard Ranges. qnd Barmw Raner, etc, lrans, Toy. Sac. 8. Aust. 16 (2), pp, 74-115, Wasuiscron, TT, §., 1916. The charockile seriés of igneons rocks, Amer, J. Sea, Lot, pp, 323-338. Winsow, Annan F., 1947a, ‘The Musgrave Ronevs, Walkabout, 14 (1), pp. S-16, Winsow, Arman F., 1947b, ‘Che charnackitie and assoviated rovks of north-western South Australia, pt. 1: The Musgrave Ranges—an introdnetory account, Trans. Ruy, Sou. 8. Aust, 71 (2), pp. 195-211. Wiosen, Arran F., 1948. The charonckitic and iassociated rocks of north-western South Australia, pt. 2: Doleritus from the Musgrave and Everard Ranges, Trans, Roy, Soe, S. Aust., 72 (1), pp. 178-200, Wirson, Antawn F., 195fMa. Some unuswel alkali-feldspars in the Central Atutealiin clon kitic Tocks, Miner. Mag., 29, pp. 215-224. Wirsox, Antan F,, 1950b. Tlnorescent feldspar and zircon as petrologieal airs, Miner. May., 24, pp. 225-233. Wirson, Aroan F., 19524, Metamorphism of granite rovky by olivine dulerits in Contenl Australia, Geol. Mag, 88, pp. 73-86, GRANITES OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 7h Winsonw, Aruan F,, 1952b, The charnockite prablem in Australia, Sir 1. Mawson Anniv. Val, Univ. Adelaide, pp. 203-224. Witson, Atztan F,, 1952c, Precambrian lilites east of the Everard Ranges, north-western South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust., 75, pp. 160-163. Witson, ALLAN F., 1953b, The significance of lineation in Central Australia, Aust J, Sei. 16, pp, 47-50, ; Winson, ALLAN F., 1954a. The significance of lineatian in Central Australin—a reply, Aust. J, Sei, 16, pp. 242-243, Wrison, ALLAN F., 195¢b, Studies on Australian charnockitic rocks and related problems; Vol, 2. The charnockitic granulites and associated gneisses of the Musgrave Rouges. Vol. 3. The charnovkitic pranites and assaciated pranites ot Central Austrulia, D.Se- Thesis, Univ. W. Aust. Veanson, ALLAN Fi, 1955, Charnockitie rocks in Australis—a review, Proc. Pun-Ind, Grew Sei. Congr., Perth, Aug., 1954, pp. 10-17. Winson, Annan FF, 1958. Pyroxenie granites ond related rocks in the Jorrannwigup- Galyerup Greck Area, Western Australia, J. Koy, Soc. W, Aust, 41, ye 34-40, Winsen, ALLAN F,, 1958b, Advances in the knowledge of the structure and petrology of the Precambrian rocks of south-western Australia, J, Roy, Sou, W. Aust, 41, pp. 57-83, Winsow, Arias F., 1959a. Notes on the fabric of some charnackitie rocks From Central Australia, J. Hoy, Soc. W. Aust, 42, pp, 56-64. Witsow, Annan F., 1959b, Co-oxisting pyroxenes: some causes of variation snd anomalies in the optically derived compositional tie-lines, wilh partieular referenee to charnoc- kittie rocks, Geol. Mag. (in press). Wiusos, Attan F., 1959c. The charnockilic rackg of Aristralia, Geol. Runil., 47, pp. 191-510. Wineweci, A. N., and Wincuen., I., 1951. “Elements of optical mineralogy,” pt, 2 (4th ed,) (Wiley: New York). EXPLANATION OF PLATES PLATE 1 ¥ig. 1—Sharp intrusive contact of the orthopyroxenebedting FErnabella Adainellite and stceply-dipping charnackitie cranulites & mile SW, af summit of Mt. Carrnthers, Mus- grave Ranges. The adamellite contuins a few Jark Isluish prey phenoerysts of plagio- ase, ‘Che grauulites do not appear ta have been metamorphosed by the intrusion, which is here shown (in a cliff section) to have been emplaced above the pranulites. Fix. 2—Sharp intrusive contact of orthapyroxene-hearing granite (bottura right) and. gurnet- brering gneiss (top left). Large hammer-head is on contact (which has strike 300° and dip 80° $,, he., parallel to the small hammer handle), and the handle of large hammer is ap- proximately purallel to the strike of the gneisses (which have strike 340° and lip 40° W,), The weanite Is aineh finergrained at the contact and shows rongh platy-flow structure parnilel to the contsct. Looking NE, High up on S. wall of valley near Alalka rock- hole, Musgrave Ranges. PLATE 2 Hig, 1—Elongate mafe clot ¢enmpoved of magnetite (black), ferrohypersthene and Jess common caleie augite (hoth dark grey), apatite (highly retringent white wraius in inafe alot). Most of the salie anineruls shown in this figure are poorly Lwinoed grains of plagioclase. Ferrohypersthene grinodiorite (30476), 24 miles NNW. of Alalka pock- hole, Musgraye Ranges. Field of view: 4 mm. diam, Fig. 2.—Shattered plagioclase: crystal (white, om cross-wire quadrants 1 and 4) replaced by K-feldspur (dark vrey), Note relies of plagioclase in K-feldspar, Most of the. black areas in the plagioclase are K-teldspar. Apatite urystals are commonly associated with these corrosive patches of K-feldspar, Ferrohypersthene granodiorite (30476), 2% miles NNW. of Alalka rock-hole, Musgrave Ranges. Crassed nivols. Field of view: 5 min. diam, Pig, 3.—Micro-anttperthite formed by replacement of sndesine (twinned anineral forming the major portion of the field) by K-feldspar (dark grey irregular patches in the ande~ sine), The patches of K-feldspar commonly contin grains of pyroxene (as tm quadrant 1), apatite, zircon or iron ore. ‘There is no lenticular micro-antiperthite in this rock. Note the healed shatter zone and the shears filled with iron ores crossing quadrants 3 and 4, Tyniecal charnockitic granodiorite, No. 30789, Ernubella, Field of view: 5 nin. diam, Grossed nicols. 76 Fig. Vig. Fig. Fig. F ig. Tig. ALLAN F. WILSON 4.—Texture of a typical chamockitic granodiorite, No, 30789, Ernabella. There is a tendency for alinement of the mafic clots, which are composed of ferrohypersthene (sur- rounded by calcic wugite in wpper part of quadrant 3), caleic augité (quadrant 3), iron ores, hornblende (swrounding iron ores in quadrant 2), und qnartz, whether as granules (eg. on the oross-hairs intersection) or as larger grains (e.g., in quadrant 2) have plentiful dust-like inclusions, Microperthite commonly encloses quartz granules (¢-g., centre of figure). Plagioclase is shown in bottom of quadrant 3 (see also Plate 2, Fig, 5): There are shears filled with black iron otes in quadrant 4. Field of view: 4:5 umn. iameter. 5.—Relies of corroded plagioclase (twinned) in K-feldspar (microperthitic). Attitude of relics suggests bending and shattering of plagioclase prior to replacement by K-- feldspar (cf. Pl. 2, Vig. 4), Hornblende adamiellite (30596), Bald Hill, E. Musgrave Ranges. Crossed nicols. Ficld of view: 5-4 mm. diam. 6.—Relies of plagioclase (white) corroded by K-feldspar, Note erystal of apatite (dark grey needle near A) which occurs in tiny “pool” of K-feldspar introduced into the plagioclase. The round dark objects are bubbles in the thin-section. Augite-homblende adamellite (34598), 8 miles WSW. of Victory Downs, W. Ayers Ranges, Central Aus- tralia. Field of view: 4-8 mm. diam. Crossed nicols. PLATE 3 1,—hregular development of micro-antiperthite due to replacement of plagioclase (white) by K-feldspar (light yrey). K-feldspar content of some portions of the feldspar reaction complexes is such that all gradations may'be seen from plagioelase through niicro-antiperthite to micro-perthite. Very fine micro-perthitic lenses. of albite (probably due: Lo exsolution rather than to replacement) may be seen in the middle of most patches of K-feldspar (e.g., near cross-wires, and see PI. 3, Fig. 2), Ferrohypersthene adamellite (30701), Tjakumja, Musgrave Ranges, Crossed nicols. Field of view: 2°8 mm. diam. 2.—Very fine micro-perthitic inclusions (centre) in K-feldspar lens in micro-antiperthitic plagioclase. Enlargement of central portion of Pl. 3, Fig. 1. Crossed nicols. Field of view; 0:4 mm, diam, PLATE 4. 1L.—Micro-antiperthite (quadrant 2) and microperthite (quadrants 3 and 1) both formed by metasomatism of a single plaginelase crystal, K-feldspar (K) has irregularly replaced plagioclase (P), and the small relics of plagioclase in. quadrant 3 are clearly in optical continuity with the parent plagioclase mass. The plagioclase grain which is shielded by pyroxene from K-metasomatism (white grain, P, in qnadrant 4) is not anti- perthitic. Pyroxene is ferrohypersthene in which Iamellae of diopside show as several vertical narrow white bands, QQ = quartz, Ferrohypersthene adamellite (30700), near Tjakunja, Musgrave Ranges. Crossed nieols. Field of view: 3 mm, diam. A, F. WiLson Puate 1 A. F, Wison PLatE 2 A. F. Witson PLATE 3 A. F. Witson PLATE 4 AN ABERRANT SPECIES OF ECLIPTA FROM AUSTRALIA BY R. MELVILLE Summary AN ABERRANT SPECIES OF ECLIPTA FROM AUSTRALIA by BR. Metvnue [Read 9 July 1959] The composite described below was discovered by Mr. E. IL Ising on the Arkaringa Creek about 60 miles south of Oodnadatta, On examination it was seen to be a member of the Heliantheac-Verbesininac, but at first it did not appear to fit any hitherto described genus in this section of the family. The Verbesininae include a number of weedy species and it seemed likely that the plant was an adventive in Australia {rom some other part of the world. Accord- ingly, a search was made through the available material of the Verbesininae to determine whether the plant was an aberrant member of any of the recognised yenera, either from Australia or clsewhere. It was found to resemble Eclipta ulba (L.) Hassk. and 1. platyzlossa F, Muell. very closely in foliage, involucre sind indumentum and the aspect of the capitula, A comparison of dissections uf the several species of Eelipta with the new plant showed that all were very similar in floral morphology. However, the fruits differed strikingly in the pos- session of rather bread wings, us well as iv. a greater development af the pappns. They were similar to those of Verbesina ¢neelioides (Cay.) A. Gray, which is in other respects widely different. This Verbesina is itself rather aberrant in its own gemis in the possession of winged fruits, but it serves to draw attention tu the existence of winged and wingless fruits in a number of composite genera. Sometimes, as in Verbesina the exalate forms predominate, at others, as in Brachycome alate forms are most abundant. Such variation is not, of itsclf, sufficient to warrant separation as a new genus, in the absence of other dis- tinctive features and the conclusion was reached that the new plunt should be assigned to Eelipta. No evidence was fomd that it occurs anywhere but in Australia. Ecuera Anatocanpa Melville, sp. nov., E. platyglossae F. Muell. affinis, sed dentibus pappormm subulatis et acheniis late alutis differt, Herba annua crecta ramosa 20-30 cm alta, caulibus scabridulis vel sub- glabris. Folia opposita vel interdum alternata, Janceolata, acuta, hasihus cuneatis, supra et infra scabridula, laminae 15-35 mm longae, 5-10 mm Jatae, petiolis 5-12 mm Jongis munita. Capitula florifera 3-5 rom lata, in axillis foliorum, pedunculis 4-6 mm longis appresso-hirsutis; byacteae involucrorum 6-10, 1-2 seriateae, oblongo- vel oyato-acutae, scabridac, 5-6 mm longae, 1-5-3-0 mm Jatae, eae receplaculorum lineari-subulatac, circa 4-5 mm longae breve ciliatae; flores radiati ¢, circa 10, avi, corollis ligulatis, emarginalis, 2-3-3-5 mm longis, 2 vel 3 nervatis; ores disci cirea 20-25; hermaphroditi, tubi corellanun 1-5 mm longi, 4obati; ovaria oblonga, applanata, cirea 25 mm longa, supra hirsuta et setis 2 vel 3 papporum coronata. Capitula fructifera 8-10 mm lata, cypselae Hororum radiatorum tri-alatae, eae Hororum discornm wpplanatac, obovatae, late bialatae, 4:5-5-5 mm longae, 3-4 mm latae, faciebus lateralibus papillis conicis vel ineularibus indutis. South Australia: Arkaringa Ck., 12 mls. N. of Mt. Barry stn., 60 mls. 5. of Oodnadatta, K. IL. Ising No, 3768, Aug. 30, 1955 (K holo.; Adelaide, isa), Queensland: §, Oestrus, Gilruth Plains, Coll, K, C, Baker. No. G830, March 7, 1949 (in Herb., Canberra). Trans, Roy. Soc. 8. Sust, (1960), Vol a. 78 R. MELVILLE During this investigation, a second collection, from the Gilruth Plains, was sent to me by Miss N. T. Burbidge. Both occurrences were of single plants so that the species may be scarce, though, with its undistinguished appearance, it may easily have been overlooked. Eeliplta alatocarpa. Melville, sp. nov. 1, Howering capitulum, scale A; 2, 3, ray floret, adaxial and lateral views; 4, dise floret; 5, inner bract of involucre; 6 receptaciilar scale; 7, stamens and stigmas of dise florct; 8, pappus of disc floret; 9, fruit of dise floret; 10, fruit of ray floret. Figs. 2-6, scale B, Figs. 7-8, scale D, Figs. 9-10, scale C. Camera lucida drawings from the holotype. s NOMENCLATURE OF NOTOMYS (MURIDAE) IN THE LAKE EYRE BASIN BY H. H. FINLAYSON Summary NOMENCLATURE OF NOTOMYS (MURIDAE) IN THE LAKE EYRE BASIN By H, H. Frauarson (Read 13 August 1959] In identifying some recent collections of Notomys my altention has been directed again to the unsatisfactory state of the nomenclature of two of the species which are widespread in the arid districts of the State of South Australia und are particularly important numerically in the Lake Eyre Basin. In 1939, in checking the results of my own field work in that area against the considerable series of Netomys, which had accumulated in the South Aus- tralian Museum from the samne district, | qwas drawn to the provisianal cou- clusion (for reasons fully stated in my subsequent paper), that Natomys aistoni Brazenor, 1934, was a colour phase only of N. cercimus Gould, 1853; this species is known to the local aborigines (Wonkanoorao) as oorarvic, A second species known as wilkintie, which I then considered to be the N. cervinus of Waite and Wood Jones and most modern authors, was thereby rendered innominate; but us any measures towards stabilization depended on a4 re-examination of the type of N. cervinus Gould in London, the matter was left mm abeyance. No further factnal evidence bearing on the subject was published until 1951, when Tate in his review of the genus, made this re-examination in relation to topotypes ul N. aistoné and found sufficient agreement to substantiate my suggestion of 1939, and to relegate the latter to the synonymy of N. cervinus Gould, The way was thereby opened for the recognition of the wilkintie in nomen- chiture, hut this step was complicated by a doubt as to the real status of Notomys fuseus Wood Jones, 1925, of which no type was designated and of which only a single topotype of the Wood Jones series is available for study. Iredale and Troughton (Check List of Aust. Mammals, 1934) have already equated N, fuscus to N. cervinus of Gould, but it is not clear whether this finding was based ou the Wood Jones series from Ouldea or on some of the several “dark forms” which have been recorded from other localities; their synonymy is, of course, no longer acceptuble owing to the revolution in the conceptions of the real character of Gould's species (infra). A critical re-examination of the above topotype of N. fuscus has convinced me of its specific identity with the Lake Eyre Basin wilkintie, but the question remains as to whether the differential characters relied on by Wood Jones (most of which show considerable variation in the Lake Eyre Basin) should be accepted at the sub-specilie level or regarded merely as a phase of polymorphism of which there are already illustrations in the genus. The single specimen available is quite inadequate for a solution of this problem, which will depend ultimately on extended field work. Wood Jones, however, writes (1925) of having had numerous specimens from Ooldea and as he was evidently assured of the uniformity of N. fuseus at that place it may be accepted that the differcn- tial characters at least have a higher frequeucy at Ooldea than in the Lake Eyre Busin. I have therefure chosen the first alternative and now regard N. fuscus as being represented by two geographical forms based on these respective areas. These conclusions may be summarised as follows: Trans, Roy. Soe. 8. Aust, (1960), Yok 83. &0 HB. OH. FINLAYSON 1. NOTOMYS CERVINUS Gould, 1853. Hapalotis eervinus Gould, 1853, Proc. Zool. Soe, London (1851), p, 127. Notomys cercinus Thomas, 192], Ann. Mae. Nat. Hist, 9 (8), p, 425, et seq. (lectotpe). Revlersonresbte § gitont Brazenor, 1934, Mems, Nat, Museum Melbourne, 8 (81), Pl V, Pig. S: ‘ Ww, 0, Notomys aistoni Finlayson, 1939, Trans, Moy, Soe, 5. Aust, 63 (1), p. 108, Th CV, Pigs. 4, H wd P; PL V, Figs. M,N and Q, Natonmys cercinus Tate, 1951, Bull. Am. Mais. Nat. Hist., 97 (4), p. 262. A species of medium size, with no gular pouch, grey based belly fur in- variable in adults, conspicuously shortened skull and grooved upper incisors. A raised nude presternal gland is seasonally developed in the male, but there is no tract of specialised hair on either gular or sternal sites. Pes eom- patitively stout, with large plump pads and the hallucal pad always present; under surface of toes very lightly haired, Ear long, Pelage soft; mid-dorsally from 10-14 mm long; colour dorsally exceedingly variable. ranging feom pinkish cinuamon of Ridgway scarcely pencilled with uctr black tips in the richer phases, through intermediate strongly grizzled drab, to near blackish. Ventral fur white termially and usually pale plumbeous at base, though white-based suh-adults oceur. Skull shoré and broad, with the anterior zygoma root strongly out-thrust and a square zygomatic outline. Interorbital space wide, Anteorbital fossa broad und shallow, with the external wall turned uniformly inward. Free margin of zygomatic plate with a shallow concavity only and with the upper spur little developed, Anterior palatal foramina usually exceeding the anterior murgin of M' and very wide. Mesopterygoid fossa constantly wide and frequently lyrate in outline. Bulla small. Upper incisors distinctly orthodont; narrow and delicate and with the antertur surfaces constantly marked by a broad and shallow groove. Dimensions.—The range of flesh dimensions in 47 individuals and of skull dimensions in 17 is given in my paper of 1939 and Tate (1951) quotes some merastwements of the lectotype. Type (lectotype of Thomas, 1921).—British Museum No, 53, 10, 22, 7; cal- lected by Capt. Charles Sturt m 1845 at 29°06" S. lat. and 141° E. longt. Also recorded from Ooldea and several intermediate localities. Ninety-three exanrples examined, many of them collected by L, Reese, Esy, From 1929-34 this species appeared to be much more numerous in the Lake Fyre pom than the next, but in recent collections the proportions have been reversed, 2. NOTOMYS FUSCUS Wore Jones, 1925 Thilacomys cervinus Waite, L898, Proe, Ruy. Soe, Viet, &, 2, 122; PL V1, Fig. 3 (in part) nee. Tapalotis cervinus Gould, 1453. : Ascupharynx cervituis Waite, 1900, Ann. Mae, Nal, Hist, 7 (5), po 222 ¢in part); aec A. vervinus Waite. 1915, Tratis. Roy. Soc. §. Aust, 89, p. 735 (= N. alexw Thos.1. Aseophargnx cervinus Wood Joves, 1925, Ree. S. Aust. Museum, LEL (1), qs. 3 (in part) Ascopharynx fuscus Woad Jones, 1925, Thid, Notomps cercinus Brazenor, 1934, Mems. Nat. Mus. Melbourne, 8, p. S23 (in part). Notomys certinus Finlayson, 1939, ‘Trans, Roy, Soe. S, Aust., 63 (lL), p. 108; Pl TV, Figs. I, J and O; PI. V, Pies. J, K and L- A medium-sized species with a gular pouch in bath sexes, strongly hatred undersurface of toes and an elongate much modified skull, with tapered zyqu- matic outlines The gular gland is constant and the floor of its pit is densely clothed with shining adpressed white hair, which forms a conspicuous disk in dried skins. NOTOMYS (MURIDAE) IN THE LAKE EYRE BASIN SL Rarely a sternal gorget of glandular hair is feebly developed in males. In the pes the undersurface of the toes is often thickly clothed with bristle hairs obscur- ing the integumental folds and overlapping the apical pads. The interdigital pads are relatively small and the hallucal pad may be absent. Ear very long. The skull is differently shaped from that of N, cervinus Gould with a longer muzzle region, much Jess prominent anterior root of zygorma and a zygomatic outline which tapers markedly forwards. Interorbital region narrower. Ante- orbital fossa narrow and dcep and in fully adult examples the external plate often nearly parallel to the rostral axis. Free margin of zygomatic plate deeply concave and with a well-marked upper spur. The anterior pulatal foramina variable in length, sometimes falling short of M' and relatively narrow. Meso- pterygoid fossa somewhat variable and decidedly narrower than in. N, cervinus Gould and the processes less frequently fared outwards at their extremitics and after parallel. Bulla very large. Upper incisors heavier than in N.. certinus Gould, less orthodont and their anlerior surfaces ungrooved. Subspecies A. NOTOMYS FUSCUS FUSCUS Wood Jones, 1025 (as given by the author op. cif. supra, ) Pes relatively heavy; hallucal pad absent; rhinarium heavier and less hooked. Pelave with dorsal colouration darker. isabelline brown or drab and with the bases of the ventral fur pale smoky. Type (lectotype)—Young adult male in alcohol with skull removed and prepared. Formerly of the private collection of Frofessor F. Wood Jones, sub- sequently No, 524 im the museum of the Zoological Department of the Univer- sity of Adelaide and now registered number M6258 af the South Australian Museum. Type Locality —Ooldea district, South Australia. Dimensions of the Type—Head and body. 105; tail, 127; pes, 34-5; ear, 25, Skull.—Greatest length, 30-0; basal length, 24:5 cx; zygomatic breadth, 15:2; brain case breadth, 14-4: interorbital breadth, 5-3; nasals, length, 10-7; nasals, breadth, 2'6; palatal length, 15-0); anteriur palatal forumina, 4-9; bulla leneth, 5-8 ca.; upper molar series. 4-7. Subspecies B, Notomys fuscus eyreius nov. Hallucal pad present in about 70 per cent. of the series examined. Pelage somewhat thinner and slightly crisper than in N. cervinus Gould of the same districts; the dorsal colour variable but generally brightly fulvous or rufescent; at its richest, orange cinnamon of Ridgway, more vinaceous than N. cerpinus Gould and with light sepia penvilling rather than black, but in a Jarge propor- tinn of specimens scarcely different from the buff forms of that species. A dark ashy phase (about wood brown) oceurs, with a frequency of less than 2 per cent, in the available sample. Ventral fur most frequently pure white to the base, but distinctly grey (pale plumbeous) in 10 per cent. of individuals, Type—Adult female; skin and skull; South Australian Museum, registered number M4595. Collected by G. Aiston, Esq., April, 1934. Type Locality—Mulka (New Well), on the cast side of Lake Eyre ghunat 5) miles ENE of the Barcao inflow. Dimensions of the Type. —llead and body, 100; tail, 141; pes, 35; ear, 25. 82 H. H. FINLAYSON Skull.—Greatest length, 30-3; basal length, 24-8; zygomatic breadth, 16-2; braincase breadth, 15-3; interorbital breadth, 5-6: nasals, length, 10-9; nasals breadth, 2-8; palatal length, 15:1; anterior palatal foramina, 5-1; bulla length, 6-2 ca.; upper molar series, 5-0. The range of flesh dimensions in 22 examples and of skull dimensions in four examples are given in my paper of 1939 (supra). Fifty-two examples examined, including a series of 27 paratypes from Mulka and 25 from other localities in the Lake Eyre Basin, most of the latter having been collected and carefully prepared in the field by Mr. Paul Lawson of the Muscum staff, and Mr. R. Tedford. This species which ovcurs sympatrically with N. cervinus Gould and N. mitchelli vars. both in the Lake Eyre Basin and Ooldea district is readily dis- tinguishable from them hy both somatic and cranial features. From N, alexis Thomas which is now known to occur on the north-east margin of the Basin, the distinction is equally valid, though sometimes less obvious, and is more justly appreciated in series than individually. The chief points in which N. alexis differs are as follows. Both foot and ear are smaller; the ear decidedly so, both length and breadth averaging lower and the overall size therefore markedly less. The dorsal pelage shows a range of ferruginous brown toues in the subterminal band quite absent from N, fuscus, White-based belly fur vccurs in N. alexis, though with much less frequency than in N. fuseus eyreius; but distinction from N. fuscus fuscus in this character may not be practicable. The gular pit is less strongly haired, and in dried material its site is marked by an oval area of nude skin rather than a disk of specialised hair. On the other hand, the sternal tract of glandular hairs in males is strongly developed and resembles the condition in N, mitchelli. The adult skull is generally less modified in outline and more pseudomys-like than in N. fuscus, though examples occur which are difficult to distinguish and in the remaining points listed the distinetion is also of an average character. The brain case is smaller, narrower and less pyriform; the zygomatic process of maxilla in lateral aspect less expanded and differently shaped; the anteorbital fossa broader and shallower: the anterior palatal foramina wider; the bulla de- cidedly smaller and the incisors more opisthodont. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS In the preparation of this note T have been indebted for loan of material and various courtesies in correspondence to Dr. Donald Thomson of the Uni- yersity of Melbourne; to Mr. G, B, Sharman of the Zoological Department of the University of Adelaide; and to Mr, B. J. Marlow of the Australian Museum, Sydney; to all of whom my thanks are rendered. THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN ILLUMINATION AND GLOBAL RADIATION BY J. N. BLACK Summary An examination has been made of the relationship between illumination and global radiation for five stations for which long term records of both factors are available (Helsinki, Stockholm, Kew, Vienna and Jerusalem), to determine whether radiation data can be used as an index of the light climate in studies of agronomy and plant ecology. Despite differences in instrumentation and climate there was found to be a high correlation between illumination and radiation and there is no significant departure of the data for any individual station from the common regression. It is concluded that, at least for the climates of which the six stations are representative, radiation can be used with confidence as an index of the light climate. ‘THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN ILLUMINATION AND GLOBAL RADIATION By J). N. Brack* [Read 13 Angust 1959] SUMMARY An examination bas been made of he relationship between illumination and glohal radiation for five stations for which Jong term records of both factors are available (Helsinki, Stockholm, Kew, Vienna and jertisalem), to determine whether radiation datu can be used as am index of the light climate in studies of agronomy anid plant ecology. Despite differences in instrumentation and climate there was found to be a high correlation between illumination and radiation and there is no significant deparmre of the data for any individual station from the coromon regression. It is concluded that, at least for the cliroates of which the six stalions are representative, radiation can be used with confidence as an index of the light climate. In the study of agronomy and plant ecology there frequently arises a need for data on the average illumination to which plants are exposed, for instance when the growth or geographical distribution of field crops or pastures are under consideration. Recent studies in the relationship of leaf area and incoming light energy (e.g. Brougham, 1957; Donald and Black, 1958; and Black, 1958), which have led to a better appreciation of the basic principles involved in the growth of pastures, have drawn attention to the Jimited understanding of the spatial distribution of illumination. Unfortunately. the number of stations for which long term records of light energy are available is very sinall, and in the absence of such records, recourse has often been made in the past to some general relutionship between light intensity and global radiation such as thut pul forward by Kimball (1924) (e.g. Black, 1957; Brougham, 1958), or to the values given by Moon (1940) for the distribution of energy between various wavelength hands of the incoming solar radiation (Tamiya, 1957; Blackman and Black, 1959). Both Kimball's and Moon’s values vary. as would be expected, with afinospherie conditions; Kimball quotes a range of values for different cloud cover while Moon’s are caleulated for a number of optical air masses. Since it has not been possible to study the distribution of Wumination directly from measured valies, interest has heen concentrated on the distrihu- tion of radiation; a study by Black, Bonython and Prescott (1954) of the relationship between radiation and sunshine could not be extended to the charting of radiation since the distribution of sunshine was itself unknown, except in the broadest terms. A further attempt was made by Black (1956) to relate radiation to mean cloud amount, and this was followed hy the prepara- tiun of monthly maps af the distribution of incoming wlobal radiation. It appears that two other studies were proceeding simultancously with similar objects: Budyko (1955) was interested in radiation balance, but his “Atlas of Tfeat Balance” inchides maps. of global radiation, and a more recent study has been published by Bernhardt and Philipps (1958). Tt is therefore of considerable interest to ascertain to what extent the use of maps of radiation to obtain an estimate of illumination climate is justified. Blackwell (1954), cxamining the * Waite Agricultural Research Distitute, University of Adelaide. Trans, Boy. Soe. 5. Aust. (160), Vel #4. soyourozoyduajeg 961 Pqusy esue'y Aoqddgy O-FSGT ‘sawed Z de-oe N8‘1E wueyesnile ft 861 qosoqneg (Z) | qroypHqaye pe ymeudposr) pun atsolo10040py [e200 uray (Z) THF yesuvpeaquez (T) wuntusTeg §— YoReqrqoxy (1) Of-OFGT ‘stead TT Ab 91 NL-9F euUal A FSG6L TE“ ORI (3) aojourojoyd rysuAzZa104) wa E961 Teayovt_ (1) Suiprooey Moy “HOW TS-LFGT ‘stead g MAE +0 N&-1¢ MOT. Z TaxHOqsy = “qN4ISUy BysoapAT YOO BYSIZOTOIOIOPT SOFIIOAG (Fg) z 6861 U9INyY (Z) q220j0yd $861 Ugany (T) TUN ISse404 wonsduy LE-RB6T ‘S104 OT 1-81 NP-6¢ punsyoo3g an TT290q304d 9€67 punjounT UWINISsB40 qT worssuy £€-6261 ‘sae0d g HO: SE N¢-09 THUISTS eyep jo samag WOlBULWANY TT UOlPRIPeyy Spiooad Jo yysue'T epnyZu0Ty epnqdey aoe] quoeuMaysuy eS Se TS E[QBTLeAB ore VBP YOIYM IG} suOTyBIg 84 TL Wid Vio RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN TLLUMINATION AND CLATBAL BADIATION a series of records of iNumination and global radiation maintained at Kew between 1947 and 1951, pointed out that from the mean monthly values of Juminovs eliciency obtained from these records it would be possible to deduce uppreximute illumination values where only radiation data were avail- able, and that these values would hold regardless of cloud amount. Blackwell further observed that his results were somewhat tentative and were only relevant to the five-year period under observation, to the methods of measurement and to the local conditions of exposure and climete, More révenily, a detailed study af the illumination vlimate of Pretoria, South Africa, has been published by Drummond (1955), which includes a comparison of the luminous cHiciency of daylight for various locations. Drim- memd discussed in particular the values of luminons efficiency an clear days, and its relationship to atmospheric moisture content and turbidity. and showed that for fonr selected months (March, June, September and December) there were differences in Juminous efficiency between the various stations examined, It was felt that a suitable approach to the problem would be to assemble, for as many locations as available, daty of racliation and illumination for average conditions of cloudiness, using mean yalues for each month over as long as possible periods of years. A list of stations for which suitable records are uvailable, with the appropvriate literature references, is given in Table 1, It will be seen that they are all located in Europe or the castern Mediterranean, and that no records are ayailable for tropical conditions, Unfortunately, Drurmn- mond (1958) did not publish illumination values for average cloud enuditinns, arul his data for Pretoria cannot be used in the present study, [t is probable that other records exist but are not known te the author; lor instance, Tapukin (1953) bas published @lumination values fur Tastikent, but it has not becu possible to obtain appropriate global radiation data. There are, moreaver, 4 uumber of limitutions which tust be borne in mind when data fram these various stations are being examined, Firstly, different instruments have been used at the different stations; this is porhaps of more consequence in the illumination than in the radiation measurements, but it hag not proved possible to introduce any correction Factor. Sceondly, the cata for the various stations are for different years. This is unlikely to be of importance, since it is reason- ablo to assume that the relationship between ilumination and radiation will net vary between years, and the data for each individual station were ablained simultaneously, Thirdly, the illumination data for Jerusalem were not obtained hy continuons recording but by instantaneous hourly reudings on clear days omly, (Ashbel, personal communication.) Since there are practically no clends during the summer at Jerusalem, Ashbel considers Hat the data for the months May to October may be accepted as representative for the whole month, whereas the values for the winter months rust be discurded. In view of the marked difference between the climates of Jerusalem snd the other stations, it is wnfor- tunate that the data are limited not only In this way, hat also in having been taken only for a very short time, Two small points may also be noted: firstly the ilhimination values for Helsinki and Stocksund (a suburb of Stockhalin} were published in EsH units, ind have been converted for the purpose of this shidly into Kilolux-hours by the factor 1 Es = 77,000 lux given by Pohjakailio (1952), Secondly, the illumination data for Kew lave been amended in aceord- ance with the snggestion of Blackwell, Eldridge and Robinson (1954). The mean monthly values of illumination and glebal radiation calculated from the available data are given in Figure 1. It will be seen that despite the differences in instrumentation, geographical location, time of year and length of record, the data show little scatter and are, in fael, remarkably consistent. 86 J. N. BLACK There is, in fact, no significant departures of individual stations from the common regression, and any effect of varying cloud cover on the relationship between illumination and radiation has disappeared in the use of long term average data. It may therefore be concluded that the use of radiation data, JERUSALEM g KEW VIENNA STOCKHOLM HELSINK| MONTHLY MEAN [LLUMINATION—K(LOLUX—HRS/DAY X= 1405 Y - 152 200 400 600: aco MONTHLY MEAN GLOBAL RADIATION—GM CAL/CM?/DAY Fig. 1—The relationship between illumination and global radiation. either directly, as indicative of light energy, or by the use of a suitable con- version factor, is a satisfactory method of estimating light climate where no illumination data exist. It must, however, be stressed that the extension of this relationship to other climates—e.g. tropical or sub-tropical—which are not represented in the stations examined, will not be justified until confirmed by further data. RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN ILLUMINATION AND GLOBAL RADIATION AT REFERENCES Asuurs., D., 1956. Global solar radiation and daylight in Jerusalem, Jerusalem, The Hebrew University. Acrén, T. E., 1933, Illumination from sun and sky. Ark, Mat, Astr, Fys., 244, pp. 35. Aunt E., paah Radiation climate in Scandinavian peninsular, Ark, Mat. Astr, Fys., GA, pp. 50. Funaase F., and Panarrs, I, 1958. Die ritumliche und zeitliche Verteiluang der Finstrahhmg, der Ausstrublung und der Strahhingsbilanz im Meersniveau. 1. Die Kinstrahlung, Met. Hydr. Dienst der D.D.R. Abh, 45, pp. 227. Brac, J. .N., 1956, The distribution of solar radiation over the earth’s surface. Arch. Met, Geoph. Bioklim., B, 7, pp. 165-16). Buacx, J. N,, 1957. The tilluence of varying light intensity on the growth of herbage plants. Herb, Abstr., 27, pp. 89-98, Buack, J. N., 1958, Competition bebveen plants of different initial seed sizes in swards of subterranean clover (Trifolium subterrancam J.) with particular reference: to leaf area and the light microclimate. Aust. J. Agric. Res., 9, pp. 299-318. Brack, J. N., Bowysnon, ©, W., and Prescott, J. A., 1984 Solar radiation and the duration of sunshine. ©. Journ. Roy, Met. Soc., 80, pp. 331-5. By.ackatan, G. E., and Buacx, J) N., 1959. Physiological and ccvlogical studies in the analysis of plant environment. 12. The role of the light factor in limiting growth, Ann, Bot., N.S. 23, pp, 131-146, Biackwein, M. J., 1953. Five years continuous recording of daylight ilimination at Kew Observatory, Ait Ministry, Met. Res. Comm., Met. Res. Publ. 831. Brackweus,, M. J., 1954. Five years continuous recording of total and diffuse solar radiation at Kew Observatory. Air Ministry, Mct. Res, Comm., Met. Res, Publ. 895. BrackweL., M. J., Exorwor, R, H., and Rownsos, G. D., 1954. Estimation of the reflection anc! absorption of solar radiation by a clondless atmosphere from recordings at the ground with results for Kew Observatory, Air Ministry, Met, Res. Comm,, Met. Res, Publ, 894, Brovenam, R. W., 1957. Effect of intensity of defoliation on regrowth of pasture. Aust. J, Agric, Res., 7, pp. 577-387. Braounwam, A. W., 1958, Interception of light by the foliage of pure and mixed stands pf pasture plants, Aust. j. Agnec. Res., 9, pp. 39-52, Buvyxo, M, [., 1955. Atlas of heat balance (Russian). Loningrad, 1955. Donauw, C. M., and Brack, J. N.. 1958. The significance of leaf area in pasture growth. Herb. Abstr., 28, pp. 1-6. Drummowp, A. J., 1958. Nates on the measurement of natural illiination. 2. Daylight and skylight at Pretoria; the lominous vfficieney of daylight. Arch, Met. Geoph. Bioklim., B. 9, pp. 149-163, Kinaaur, 1H. H., 1924. Bevords wf total solar radiation and their relation to daylight intensity. Mouth. Weath. Tav., 52, pp. 473-9. Lorukm, E. A. 1953, Natoral daylight in Tashkent (Russian), Bull, Acad. Sei, U.S,5.R, Ser, Geoph., 5, p. 469. Lunrtunp, H., 1936. Virinestealning och Ijusstrilning i Finland. Sv. ‘Tek. Vet. Akad. Fin- land, Acta 12, pp. 126. j Moow, P., 1940. Proposed solar radiation curves for cnginecring use. J. Frank. Inst, 230, pp. 583-617. Ponjakanuo, O., 1952, Ljnsintensiteten i norra och sédra Finland samt dess inverkan pa odlingsviaxterna. Nord. Jordb,, 34, pp. 99-112. Savneren, F., 1958, Meteorologische Lichtmessungen in Wien. Arch. Met. Geoph. Bioklim., B. 9, pp, 164-154, Sveriges Meteurologiska. och. Hydrologiska Institut. Arsboker. Tamiva, H1., 1957, Mass culture of algae, Ann. Rev. Plant. Physiol. 8. pp. 309-334, Zentralanstalt fiir Metcorologie und Geodynamik, Wien. Jatwbiicher. SOME AUSTRALIAN ECHIUROIDS (ECHIUROIDEA) BY S. J. EDMONDS Summary Four new species of echiuroids, Thalassema sydniense, Arhynchite hiscocki, Anelassorhynchus adelaidensis and Ochetostoma autraliense are described and six other species are listed from Australia. Some anatomical details of Pseudobonellia biuterina Johnston and Tiegs are redescribed and a key to the genera of Australian echiuroids is given. SOME AUSTRALIAN ECHIUROIDS (ECINXUROIDEA) By S. J. Epmonps* [Read 10 September 1959] SUMMARY Four new species of echiuroids, Thalassema sydniense, Arhynchite hiscocki, Anelassorhynchus adelaidensis and Ochctastoma qustraliense are described and six other species are listed from Australia. Some anatomical details of Pseudo- bonellia biuterina Johuston and. Tiegs are redescribed and a key to the genera of Australian echinroids is given. I, INTRODUCTION The phylum Echiuroidea consists of a group of unsegmented, coelomate, marine invertebrates that is closely related to the Annelida and the Sipuncu- teidioa: The phylum contains two chief families, the Echiuridac and the Bonel- idae, The present paper describes four new species and refers to the species pre- viously recorded from Australia. Some anatomical details of one of the latter are re-described. The scheme of classification used is that adopted by Fisher (1946, 1948). The species are: Family ECHIURIDAE Thalassema sydniense n, sp, Arhynchite hiscocki n. sp. Anelassorhynchus cegrandis (Lampert), Anelassorhynchus porcellus Fisher. Anelassorhynchus adelaidensis n. sp. Ochetostoma australiense n. sp. Family BONELLIDAE Bonellia haswelli Johnston and Tiegs. Pseudobonellia biuterina Johnston and Tiegs. 9. Archibonellia michaelseni Fischer. 10, Archibonellia mjobergi Fischer. VS 69 bo oN II. DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES I, Thalassema sydniense n. sp. pl. la, figs. 1-2 Thalassema Lamarck, 1801: Fisher, 1946, p, 230, Specimens—4 (2 dissected): Aust. Museum specimens G11219. Locality—Of Watson’s Bay, Port Jackson, N.S.W, Description—The four specimens are small and in the preserved state grey- brown in colour. The length of the trunk is 6-12 mm. and the maximum width 2-5 mm. The proboscis, still attached to the trunk in all specimens, is about half to a third as long as the trunk and gradually narrows anteriorly. The sur- * Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide. Trans, Roy, Soc. S$. Aust. (1960), Vol. 83, go S$. J. EDMONDS face oF the animal iy covered with numerous, very small, rather fat papillae which appear to lie almost in transverse rows. They are more noticeable at the anterior and posterior regions of the trunk, The longitudinal musculature of the body wall is continuous. Only a limited amount uf information about the internal anatomy was ob- tained from the dissected specimens, The setae are comparatively large and prominent and strongly recurved at the tip. They are connected by a very prominent interbasal muscle. Another well-developed muscle runs from the base of cach seta to a point on the body wall posterior to the nephridiopure of the first pair or nephridia. There are two pairs. of nephridia all of which open to the exterior posteriorly to the point of extrusion of the setae, The lips of the nephrostomes are not clongated or spirally coiled and the internal opening is on a short peduncle near the base of the nephridia. No satisfactory information can be given about the alimentary and vasctlar systems. The anal vesicles arc about half as long as the trunk. No pre-cluacal, intestinal caecum appears to be present, but this point should be checked when more specimens ure available for examination. Sustematic Position. This species resembles Thalassema steinbecki Fisher, 1946, which is. found along the Pacific coast of America from California to Ecuador, It differs, how- ever. from T. steinbecki becuuse the uephrostomes ure on shirt expanded peduncles -and for this reason it is considered to be a new species. T. sydniense is known only from four specimens all of which are small. It differs from A. porcellus and A. adelaidensis in that: (1) the lips of its nephrostomes are not spirally coiled: 3} a strong interbasal muscle joins its setae; ‘3 the nephridiopores of the first pair of nuphridia lic between the setac and the point of fixation on the body wall of a well-developed, pos- teriorly directed, seta] muscle, Type Localtty—Off Watson's Bay, Port Jackson, N.S.W. Type Specimen—Australian Museum, Sydney. 2, Arhynchite hiscecki n, sp, pl. Lh, fiz. 3 Arhynehite Sato, 1837, p. 242; Fisher, 1940, p. 485. Specimen—1 (collected by Dr, L, Hiscock, University of Queensland), Lecality—Dug from sand 18 in. down on the sandspit”, Dunwich, Queens- Jand- Deseription—The specimen is long, slender and pencil-like. The length of the trunk is about LO cm. and its width 4-6 mm- The specimen, preserved in aleohul, is yellow in colour. The body is covered with small, nniformly dis- tributed papillae which are shghtly lurger at its anterior and posterior extremi- ties. The papillae give the impression of being arranged in transverse rows. Anteriorly (here is a very delicate and slender proboscis about 3 em. lony and 13 mm. wide. It is still attached to the trunk and its anterior extremity fs flattened so as to make it fan-like, The longitudinal musculature ig continuous and not grouped into bundles. The specimen possesses one pair of nephridia abont 1°35 cm, long that open to the exterior behind the setae, Each of the nephridia possesses a rather elaborate, leaf-like nephrostomal lip. The sctae are ony and are connected to strong, radiating muscles which arise from the body-wall. There is a well- developed interbasal muscle. The alimentary canal is very long and consider- ably coiled. The sesophagus if firmly fastened to the body by well-developed SOME AUSTRALIAN ECHIUKOIDS (ECHIUROLDEA ) 1 mesenterics and the presiphonal segment is very long. No precloacal caecum is present on the intestine, The vascular system consists of a prominent, tubular dorsal vessel that is closely associated with the alimentary canal for a considerable part of its length. Jt then appears to fuse with tlie intestine. ‘The ventral vessel gives off a branch that joins the intestine at a point posterior to the point of fixation of the dorsal vesscl. There does not appear to be a ring vessel. The system re- sembles rather closely that of a bonellid. There are two very thin, slightly brown anal vesicles, the length of which is about one-quarter that of the trunk, On their surface there are numerous very small structures, presumably the ciliate funnels, that are visihle only with the aid of a magnifier. The anal vesicles are fastened throughout their whole length by numerous fine muscles to the posterior region of the alimentary canal, but to the body wall only over the last quarter of their length, Systematic Position. This species differs from other species of the genus in (1) the structure of its vascular system, and (2) the way that ihe anal vesicles are attached principally to the alimentary canal and not ta the body. The tost closely related species is A. arhynchite (Ikeda) described from Japan. The genus Arhynchite as defined by Sato (1937, p. 142) contained echiurids which did not possess a proboscis. Fisher (1949, p. 485), after finding two species that possessed a long decidnous proboscis, re-described the genus, The proboscis of the Australian species described in this paper was still attached tn the specimen when it was callected. A. hiscocki differs from other Australian echiurids in that: (1) its proboscis is very slender and flattened anteriorly: and (2) the lips of the nephrostomes are expanded into elaborate, leaf-like structures. Type Locality—Dimwich (Stradbroke Is.), Queensland. Type Specinen—Australian Museum, Sydney. 8. Anclassorhynchys vegrandis (Lampert) Thalassema teyrande Laropert, 1883. p. 341. Anelasscrhynchus vegrandis Fisher, 1949, p. 481, Australien Rezord—Low Is,, Great Barrier Reef, Queensland (Monro, 1931). Remarks—Monro gives no details of the anatomy of his specimens. A. nezraniis possesses three pairs of nephridia, all of which open to the exterior pasteriorly to the setae. The lips of the nephrostomes are coiled, 4, Anelassorhynchus porcellus Fisher pl. le Anelassorhynchus porcellus Wisher, 1948, p. 274. Speelmens—12 (6 dissected). Collected by the author from under pieces of coral rock lying in loose coral sand near the level of low spring tides: 19/8/ 55, Locality—Heron Is (Capricorn Group), Queensland. Description—The animals are plump and sac-like and when alive sandy-grey i colour, ‘The length of the trunk is 2-5-4-0 cm. and the maximum width 1-5-2-3 cm. The proboscis is 1-2-1*8 cm. long and readily deciduate; it tapers slightly anteriorly. The body wall is wrinkled and made verrncose hy the presence of numerous flat papillae, which are largest on the anterior and pas- terior surfaces of the trunk. The skin appears to be thinner and smoother on the dorsal than the ventral surface. The musculature is continuous and nat 92 5. J. TDMONDS grouped into bundles and two rather inconspicuous golden-enloured setae lie just posterior to the mouth, No interbasal muscle was found connecting. them. The alimentary canal is very Jong and frail, In all specimens it was filled with fragments of coral, small shells and coral sand which had ruptured the thin wall in many places. 'Yhis prevented « thorough examination of the alimen- tury canal being made. The presiphonal section, however, is very long. The dorsal blood vessel is attached only to the anterior-most part of’ the Tordput: There is a ring vessel, two dorso-ventral vessels which unite at a level just posterior to the setae and eventually connect with a rather poorly developed ventral vesscl, There are two pairs of nephridia which open posteriorly to the setae. Their nephrostomes bear long, slender and slightly cviled prolonga- tions which are often entangled in the coils of the intestine. The nephridia vary in size and in shape; in most specimens they are slender, There are two long. anal vesicles with numerous small unstalked funnels which appear to be in longitudinal rows. No caecum was found in the intestine, Systematic Position. J have not been able to find any churacter which can be used to distinguish these specimens from A. porcellus, Fisher described from Hawaii, where it has been found in sand under rocky in Hide pools. The lips of the nephrostomes of the specimens from Queensland are less coiled and the ventral blood vessel appears to be not as well developed as those of A. porcellus, These differences may be caused by diflerent methods of fixation. A, porcellus possesses two pairs of nephridia which open behind the setac Hod which possess long spirally coiled lips. The presiphunal of the gut is very ang, e istriburlon—Hawait: Heron [s., Queensland, 5 Anelassorhynchus adelaidensis n, sp. pl. 2a Anelassorhynchus Annandale, 1922, p. 148. Specimens—8 (5 dissected), Localities—St, Vincent Gull, South Australia. Seven specimens were col- lecteel by the author from the sand and gravel amongst the yoots of the marine angiosperm, Cymodocea antarcliea at Aldinga Beach and one at Cape Jervis by Mrs. P. M. Thomas. Description—This species is clustly allied to A, poreellus Fisher, described from Hawaii and reported in the present paper, from Heron Is., Olcensland, The South Australian specimens when alive are tich dark green in colour, while those Irom Queensland are sandy-grey, ‘The length of the trunk of the specimens js 6-10 wm. and the maximum widflt 1:35-3-0 em. The proboscis, a deciduous structure, is 2-4 em. long and 0-3 cm. wide and tapers anteriorly, J{s murgin, though slightly wavy, is not frilled and its groove or trough is light green in evlour, The skin of the animal is wrinkled and bears numerous. srnall, Hut, glan- dular papillae, The maxinwm length of the setae is 5 mm. and there is no interbasal muscle. The longitudinal musculature of the body-wall is continadus, There are four nephridia which open behind the setae and which possess spirally coiled and clongate lips, The alimentary canal is long and tangled. Its presiphonal section is very long (as much as 8 cm. in one specimen) and thin-walled. There is no precloacal caecum. The blood vascular system consists of a dorsal blood vessel, 2 ring vessel aad lwo dorso-ventral vessels which join the ventral vessel. The latter is clasely pressed to the ventral nerve cord. There are two long and slender anal vesicles which are attached to the budy-wall only posteriorly. The vesicles are brown SOME AUSTRALIAN ECHIUROIDS (RCIUUROIDEA) 93 in colour and their surface is covered with numerous, minute, brown funnels, The diameter of eggs found in the nephridia of one female was 0:13-0+17 mm, Whether they were ripe could not be ascertained. Systematic Position, These specimens resemble two specimens of a dark green echiurid collected at Amboina and described by Fischer (1896) as Thalassema semoni, A, semont possesses four nephridia with spirally coiled Jips, I one of F ischer's. specimens all the nephridia open to the exterior behind the sctao but in the other the first pair do not. Wharton (1913, p. 247) re-deseribed the species from Buquet 1s, (Philippines). Aceording to him the first pair of nephridia open in front of and the second pair behind the setae. Since both pairs of nephridia at the South Australian specimens open behind the setae, it is most likely that they urea different species from A. semont, A. adelaidensis pussesses two pairs of nephridia which open behind the setae and which have jong, spirally coiled, nephrostomal lips. The presiphunal section of the gut is long. It is dark green in colour, differing in this respect from A, porcellus Fisher. Type Locality—Aldinga Beach (near Adelaide), St, Vincent Gulf, S.A- Type Specimen—Australian Museum, Syduey. 6, Ochetostoma uustraliense n_ sp. pl. Sh, fix. 4 Ochetostoma Teuekart and Ruppell, 1828, bisher, (946, p, 24D. Specimens—21 (12 dissected ). Localities—Queensland: Stradbroke Is. (3 three specimens coll, $. Iynd), Myora (two specimens coll. I. Tliscock), Dunwich (eight specimens coll, L. Hiscock), Palm Is. (two specimens, from Univ. of Queensland). New South Wales: Goodwood Is,, near mouth of Clarence River (six specimens evll, P. Durie), Aust, Museum specimens W3375, W3186, W3187, Descripltion—My. P, Durie says that the worms from Coodwood Is, are found “between high and low water marks in rather dark sand, situated close ti some small mangrove clumps. he proboscts is white and fleshy anid pro- trudes from a hole in the sand, It lies Wong the surface of the sand and is about 6 in. long and & in. wide. In this condition it appears to be quite flat (like a ribbon) and does not appear to take on a tube-like shape as in preserved speci- mens, The body of the worm is soft and bright red in colour. Twelve longi» tudinal muscle bundles show up very clearly.” The length of the trank of preserved specimens is 4-3-10-2 cm. and the maximum width J-8-2+8 em. The probuscis is 1-8-4-1 cm. long and not readily deciduate, Living specimens are red bnt peeserved specimens are pale pink or straw coloured, The thickness of the skin varies. In some specimens iL is thick, in others thin, the condition probably depending on the state «f the musculature at fixation, There are usually 12-13, occasionally 1-14 limgi- tudinal muscles which are best counted in dissected specimens. In all speci- mens except two there was one more band in the posterior half than the anterior half of the trunk. Of the 12 dissected specimens the maximum number wt bands was 14 in one specimen, 13 in five, and 12. in six. The oblique musculature between the longitudinal bundles is gromped into numerous fascicles, The faseivles are not always noticeuble in those parts of the body which have been stretchied vonsiderably. The anterior and posterior surfaces of the trunk hear small flat papillae. There are three pairs of nephridia which vary in size and shape; generally they are lang. One pair opens anteriorly to and the other twa pairs posteriorly 94 S. J. EDMONDS np niv niv: Vigs. 1-2.—Thalussema sydniense; 1, anterior region dissected to show nephridia, setae and setal muscles; 2, seta. Fig, 3.—Arhynchite hiscacki; dissected specimen, Fig. 4.—Ochetostoma australiense; dissected specimen showing anterior region of body. Fig. 5—Pseudobonellia biuterina; dissected specimen showing anterior region of body, Legend. —dy = dorsal vessel, Im = longitudinal muscle, mt—=male tube, n= nephridium, niv = neuro-intestinal vessel, np =nephridial process, om = oblique muscle, yy = ventral vessel. SOME AUSTRALIAN ECHIUROIDS (ECHTUROIDEA} to the setae. All the nephrostomes have long spirally coiled lips. No interbasal muscle was found between the setae, The alimentary system consists of a short anterior region, a long intestinal region possessing & ciliale groove and siphon and a short rectum. The anterior region is held in position by strong mesenteries attached to the body-wall and the other regions by numerous fine filaments. There is a precloacal, intestinal caecum, The blood system is similar to that found in a number of species of Ocle- tostoma, es. QO. actomyotum Fisher, 1946. There is a dursal vessel, a ring vessel, two at dacsveriteal vessels and a ventral vessel. The Litter is placed close to the nerve cord and connects posteriorly with the precloacal caecum. There are two lone anal vesicles with small unstalked ciliate funnels. Systematic Position, At least six species of Ochelostoma have heen described that pussess three piirs of nephridia, one pair of which opens in front of and two pairs behind the setae; OQ. erythrogrammon Leuckart and Ruppell, 1628, O- stwhbnanni (Fischer, 1892), O. leptodcrnion (Fischer, 1892). ©, caudex (Lampert, 1883), QO. kukotoniense (Fischer, 1892) and O. griffint (Whartun, 1913). Sato (1999, p. 357) considers the first five of these species tu be synonymous. The specimens from Australia are very close to O. erythrogranrman de- scribed from the Ked Sea by Leuckart and Ruppell (1828), According to Fischer (1927, p, 112) the original description (which was not available to the present author) is “nur oberflachlich”, Fischer (1927, p, 115) re-examined the species and deseribed it as possessing, 14-18 longitudinal muscle banners. This last point has been re-confirmed recently by Wesenberg-Lund (1957, p. 9} who re-examined a number of species of O- enythrozrammon from the Red Sea. She says, “There are 17 longitudinal muscles but at the Jevel of the hooks the two dorsal-most bands on each side unite so that there are only 15 bands in the anterior part of the trunk”. There seems little doubt, therefore, that the species from the Red Sea possesses 14-18 bands, whereas that from eastern Australia possesses 11-14, usually 12-13, For this reason the latter is regarded us new and deserihed as ©. australiense. O. australiense is. a rather large species in which the Jongitudinal museu- lature of the body-wall is divided into 12-13, oecasionally 11-14, bundles. Je possesses three pairs of nephridia, the first pair of which opens in front vf and the other two pairs hehind the setae, Its anatomy resembles that of O. erythro- erammoan. Type Localiiy Dunwich (Suadhroke Is.), Queensland. Type Specimen—Australian Museum, Sydney. 7. Bonellia haswelli Johnston and Virgs Bonellia haswelli Johnston and 'Viegs, 1920, p. 73. Ronallia viridis, Whitelegge, 1880. Australian Record—Port Jackson, N.S.W. (Johnsten and Tiegs, 1920). Remurks—This species is known only from the account of Johnston and Tiegs (1920). The length of the trunk is nver 2 in. and the maximum breadth Kin; the length of the contracted proboscis 4 in, and of each of its arms Lh in, A siphon, ahout # in. long, oriyinates as a very narrow tube on the dorsal surface of the pharynx, widens posteriorly and ends blindly in a lohed structure. A siagle nephridium about 3 in. Jong is situated on the left side of the body, The nephrostome is situated about a quarter of the length of the nephridium from its free end. The ovary is mid-yentral along the nerve cord. There ave two ou Ss. J. EDMONDS anal vesicles into which open about 15 tubes from which are given off smaller tubes with ciliate funnels, Coloured green when alive; the male is unknown. This species possesses only one nephridium and consequently can be readily distinguished from Pseudobonellia biuterinu, Archibonellia michuelsent and A, mjobergi which possess 2-3 nephridia. 8. Pseudobonellia hiuterina Johnston and ‘Ticgs pl. 2c. fig & Pseudahanellix biuterina Johnston antl Tiegs. 19148, p. 213; Wisher, 1946, p. 249. Specimens and Localities49 (12. dissected). ' Queensland: North West Is, (5) (University of Queensland), Arkhurst and Hayman Is. (2) (coll. Dr, Mackerras), Whitsunday Passage (2) (Aust. Mus. Coll, W3029), Heron Ts, a (call. S, J. Kdmonds). Western Australias Fremantle Harbour (21) (Mrs. 1. Marsh), Dongarra (6) (coll. Prof. A. G, Nicholls), Pt, Peron (2) (coll. Prof. T. Hf. John- ston), Trigg Is, (8) (coll. M. J. Littlejohn). Precious Australian Record—North West Islet, Masthead Ts. (Capricorn Group), Queensland (Johnston and Tiegs, 1919). Deseviption and Discussion—Vhe specimens from Queensland, although they differ in a few respeets from Johnston and Tiegs’s description of the species, are considered to be P. hiuterina. Five specimens were collected at one of the type localities and two others at an adjacent island. They possess two nephridia (\iteri) and carry a degenerate male in a small blind tube which opens lo the exterior hetween the two nepliridiopores. The male aperture shows up clearly just helow the setae in all species. The vascular system of the specimens is much more like that of a typical bonclid (Fisher, 1946, Fig. 15) than that described by Johnston and Tiews. There is a dorsal vessel whieh makes contact with the alimentary canal at three points: anteriorly with the pharynx, then (usually) at a point un the ecsophageal wall near the erop and finally at a point where it fuses with the intestinal wall just anterior to the origin of the siphon. A venteal or neural vessel runs along the nerve cord to the pasterior region of the animal. 616 edaprayed Se00-0+ 20GL-6L6 16> L8o88T O° GPOPE LEGL- 616 9e-% 9-011 FFe'l CTT9- 646 PrOy Mer “FAL 0é10-0— OPI L646 /9-LE,881 19+ LEOFE OF0L- 616 I¥-$ 8-86L F90°S 8PLO 616 Rod vA Aosaog £200 -0— IOTL- 6L6 28620881 8° FE oFE 9F0L-6L6 OL°s 6-LIT $96'T 6885-616 | TOUOTP ST WAL £600-0— GEFL-6L6 19 GPoBET 8+ 8O0PE LEGL-GL6 FI-& 0: O0FI Fees 9068-626, ItuUINg AYO'T “HW | SEL+6LG | AqozesdasqQ MAN ‘s1ed sjnd “sed “sTesuL “spesur | qeay “‘S[Bs Aypeurouy Aqrawiry epnysue'yT apnqiyery ALAR IN) UOTqIATIOL) uAigaeido?, ., [P.A9T-BO8 AqAany ualyeyg zensnog [eorpar0ey, psonpoy =| orydwadodoy, | uoreasi gt iin paarasqg | AQLABIN) i nn SHONVH ALAOT LNOOW WH NI SNOLLVLS LINWOS LY ALIAVEY NO SNOLLYANUSHO (1) ATaWL GRAVITY VALUES IN THE MOUNT LOFTY RANCES 121 METHODS USED The Carter Y2 gravimeter was calibrated by measuring the dial interval (allowing for instrumental drift) between the New Observatory and the Mount Lofty gravity station, assuming a gravity interval of 0-1326 gals,, and a factor of 0:0809 milligals per division was obtained for the sensitivity factor. Gravity differences between the New Observatory gravity station and the summits of the hills investigated, were obtained by establishing a number of intermediate gravity stations and measuring the gravity intervals between successive stations and thus obtaining the total gravity interval between the New Observatory and the summit of a particular hill in the Range. Repeat readings were taken in measuring the gravity intervals and curves drawn up to allow for instrumental drift. REDUCTION OF RESULTS The observed gravity values for the gravity stations located on the summits of the hills were reduced to mean-sea-level by applying the following corrections. (1) Elevation Correction This correction is composed of two components, namely the Free-Air correc- tion and the Bouguer correction, The Free-Air correction is a constant correction per unit change elevation and is equal to 0-0946 milligals per foot. The Bouguer correction is to allow for the gravitational effect of the rock material between the gravity. station and the datum Jevel (mean. sea-level), assuming that the material consists of an infinite plate of rock. The correction is 0-0127d milligals per vertical foot, where d is the density of the rock material between the gravity station and mean sea-level, (2) Topographic Correction, Due to the hilly nature of the terrain surrounding the gravity station, a topographic correction had to be applied. A graticule devised by S. Hammer was used. THEORETICAL GRAVITY VALUES The 1930 International Grayity Fornmla was used in obtaining the theoreti- cal gravity values for the gravity stations at mean sea-level. namely; Go = 978049 (1 + 0-0052884 sin?¢ — 0- 0000059 sin*24) gals, Bouguer Anomalies of the gravity stations were calculated by subtracting theoretical gravity values for the gravity stations from the reduced gravity values obtained by applying Elevation corrections and topographic corrections. Wei corrections and theoretical values are brought together in Table (1). RATTUS GREYI GRAY AND ITS DERIVATIVES BY H. H. FINLAYSON Summary RATTUS GREYI GRAY AND ITS DERIVATIVES By II. H. Fintayson [Read 8 October 1959] 3 Prares ann Text Fic, 1 CONTENTS Page 1. Introduction x OF) BE . . 4 . . 123 Distribution and Iabits .. os . ; a a — 125 2. Definition of a Standard Population of R. greyi Gray, 1841-129 (a) External Characters se . s . 180 (b) Dimensions — - be oe . 7 . 134 (c) Pelage .. it . : + ” _ 134 (d) Cranial and Dental Characters 7 : _s . 136 3. Other Populations of R, greyi .. re a ; . 135 (a) Mainland Districts North of Fleurieu Peninsula .. . 138 (b) Greenly Island rd - " . . 138 (c) North Gambier Island . ci . . dl (d) South Western Victoria ... ‘, 3 » 142 4. Rattus assimilis Gould .. os a . - : . 144 5. Interrelation of R. assimilis, R. greyi and R. fuscipes Waterhouse 146 1. INTRODUCTION The original form of this distinctive Australian rat was described by J, E. Gray (1841) from two cotypes sent to London from South Australia. Captain G. Grey, who is traditionally credited with being their collector, visited South Australia unofficially in 1840, before his assumption of the governorship of the province in the following year, and it has been generally accepted that the locality “vicinity of Adelaide” quoted in the appendix on mammals in his Journal, is to be accepted literally in localizing the type. While the circum- stances of this early Colonial time might be thought to render this probable enough it cannot be regarded as definitely established and some evidence lo the contrary is later presented (infra), No further systematic work was done on the species for more than 80 years, during which time several “records” of it were later shown (or have come to be regarded) as crroneous and based on misidentifications (Collett, 1887; Ogilby, 1892: Waite, 1896), It is somewhat remarkable that Gould who also travelled widcly in the State did not recognise the distinctness of “Mus greyi” of Gray, but relegated that name to the synomymy of Mus gouldi Waterhouse (now re- ferred to Thetomys); and later (1858) in describing R. assimilis from New South Wales, which is sa close to R. greyi as to be considered conspecific by Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust, (1960), Vol. 83. 124 W. H, FINLAYSON some authors, he did not alter thal opinion. In 1921, O. Thomas obtained further material from Mt. Compass through the good offices of Professar Wood Jones, then working in Adclaide, and after reviewing the series referred to R, greyi in the British Museum, concluded that it was not homogeneous, and desig- nated one of the former cotypes as a lectutype to represent Gray's species. This specimen [B.M. 41, 1266) jis stated by Tate (1951, 329) to he of the “Gould Collection”, At the same time, Thomas (ep. cit:) deseribed Rattus culmorum austrinus from 2 speciinen collected by J.B. Harvey, and donated to the Zoo- logical Society of London in 1841. Harvey collected both on Kanyaroo Island and ut Port Lincaln ou Eyre Peninsula and the place af origin of the type of austrinus is also quite uncertain, Thomas (1921) and Tate (1951) accepting Kangaroo Island, and Iredale ind Troughton (1934) and Ellerman (1941), Pe, Lineoln. This dispute would have no relevance here were it not for the fact that Tate (1951) has been brought to the conclusion that austrinus is a form vf R. xreyi and not of R, culmorum. Troughton (1920) recorded the persistence of the species (under the psendonym R. assimilis) on both Kangaroo Island and Eyre Peninsula, A second insular representative was discovered by Wood Jones on Poarson Isles in the Investigutor Group of the Eyre Peninsula coast, aud this was de- scribed by Thomas (1923) as a full species, Kaltns murrayi. but now more generally regarded as R. greyi murroyi, Wood Jones (1994, 1925) gave an excellent general account of both the mainland and island forms and provided the first Mustrations of the species, In 1936 Brazenor separated a western Victorian population from the typical form under the name A. 2. ravus; but this being preoccupied by Epimys racus (= Rattus ravus) of Robinsun and Kluss was replaced by peccatys by Troughton (1937); ‘Tate (1940) independently noted the preaccupution of rats atid geestedd brazenoari us a substitute. These described totms have since been noted and discussed in monographie works on muridae by illerman (1940-1949) and Tate, 1951. In spite of this consider able body of work it cannot be said that R. ureyi is a well understood species, Not only the vagueness in the provenance of early types, but still more, the tendency to limit the basis of differential characters to the barest. conventiuns of anuscum systematics, renders the subspecific identification of material from descriptions, 2 hazardous proceeding. The Ioeal interest of R. yreyé derives largely from its insular representatives which are frequently the only mammals on the islets of the continental shelf which can be obtained in numbers, and which if fully studied might give valtealile information on the post-Pleistecene history of this area. The immediate origin of the present paper has heen the necessity of assessing the degree of ditterentiation which fins heen attained by an island population as compared with one from the mainland, and in such wark holotypes, however well de- serihed, are of limited service if unaccompanied by data un topotype series which can supply the key ta the range of yariation normal to the form they represent. The correspondence or divergence of individual specinens of closely related and intergrading forms may be largely a matter of chance, but population trends, as shown by the frequency with which characters recur, is likely to. be much more significant of aflinity’. Although several considerable series of R. ereyi are stated to exist in col- lections, both in this country und overseas, no adequate analysis of their charac- ters is available for such a purpose as T have indicated. Between 1936 and 1939 during the course of field work by the writer in the Fleuricu Peninsula, chiefly upon the associated species R. lutreola, a considerable series of R. greyi wus obtained as a hy-product. This material, personally collected uver a restricted RATEUS GREYI GRAY AND ITS DERIVATIVES 1G area and fully authenticated with field data, Inds itself well in making goad this deficiency, which forms the chief content of the sequel. The series 1s then used as 4 standard in a re-examination of other groups both insular and mainland, which are available here, and in addition, the distribution, status, and habits of the species are briefly discussed and some details given of its behaviour in captivity. DISTRIBUTION AND HABITS The present distribution of the species, as far as it is known, invalves 4 narrow subcoastal strip extending from the Portland district of western Victoria tu the southern portion of Eyre Peninsula in South Australia and some of its off-lying islands, and is thus almost entirely within the territory of the latter State. Its eustern extension in Victoria, however, raay be considerably greater than is supposed, as it tends to be masked by the overlap with the very similar R. assimilis, the most westerly record of which appears to be ut Beech Forest in the Otway Peninsula of Victoria, The range thus interpreted is one of the most restricted for Australian rats, but if Tate's suggestion (1951) is adapted of considering A. greyt as a sub- specific south-western off-shoot of R. assimilis, the combined range is then prob- ably the most extensive, the forms R. a. coracits extending to north Qucensland and R. a. manicatus to the Arafura coast of the Northern Territory, The absence, so far as known, of any representative of the species group in Tastmania and the frequency of its occurrence on the islands of the South Australian coast, is a significant point in its distribution, Shortridge (1936) claimed R. greyi (as distinct from R, fuseipes) as a member of the Western Australian fauna, but this is not confirmed by Glauert (1950). Tate (op. cit.) suggests that such an extension was established during the last pluvial phase of the Pleistocene and has lapsed during subsequent ey times, but he was inclined to underrate the arid tolerance of modern RB, ezreyi as shown, for example, by the dune colonies of Eyre Peninsula and some of its islands, and it may yet be found to extend much further along the south coast in this direction also. In South Australia at the present lime if is well established in the southern portion ef the Mt. Lofty Range and on Kangaroo, Greenly, Pearsons, Nth. Neptune, and Gambier Islands and probably on several other islets off the coast. It occurs much more sparsely in the lower South-eastern Distvict and persists alsa in small numbers along the costal portion of the Adelaide-Wakefield Plain and in the seuthern portion of Fyre Peninsula, The early obliteration buth af fauna and vegetative cover by farming aperations in large portions of lower South Australia, neccssarily leads t 4 patchy, discontinuous distribution common to mast loca) murnmals at present, but how far this was tue of the pre-European era and tw» what extent the present occupied areas were formerly linked, is largely conjectural, Its survival north of Adelaide, in sheltered, umutilized spots, such as the mangrove belts, suggests that it may formerly have occupied many of the timbered portions of the wheat lands of the Lower North ancl sf Yorke Penisula. It is absent from the major expanses of the Mallee, and sub- fossil records do nof appreciably extend the existing distribution. Today, m the hill tracts south of Adelaide, wherever sufficient cover has been left for its needs, it holds out in small numbers and seems uble tu survive the attentions of both the fox and domestic eat, and is ane of the very few native mammals which are at all likely to be taken here by randum trapping. Twenty years ago. before the use of trace elements led to a phenomenal increase of pasture and sheep breeding, the portion of the Fleurieu Peninsula south of the 126 TT, 4. FINLAYSON watershed and including the valleys of the creeks between the Waitpinga in the cast and the Tapanappa in the west, was an almost virgin wilderness and R. greyi was in very large numbers here and almost ubiquitous, Tt could be trapped with almost equal certainty on dry laterite ridges under stands of stringy bark timber , Susalyntas oblique and E. baxteri) and dwarf eucalypt scrubs or in the tangled jungly growth along the swampy heads of creeks; the former, however, and hill slopes with moderate cover of hracken und xanthorrhea were the more characteristic stations. In this area it had no marsupial come petitors and lew effective predatm's and the periodic bushy fires which swept the creek valleys from the divide down to the sea were the only cause of large scale arate From these disasters, however, it made rapid recoveries and re- vecupied the burnt country with remarkable specd. Its relations with R, lutreala which also has a firm hold on this country will be more particularly discussed elsewhere, but it may be remarked that it is a much more wide ranging and adaptable animal than the latter and only comes into competition with it in the immediate vicinity of the vestricted ltreola colonies which are usually in damp areas near the creek heds or in wet swanips. Unlike the west Vietarian and Kangaroo Islund populations which make considerable living burrows in suitable soils the local form of the Fleurieu Peninsula docs not narmully burrow, but shelters in or under fallen logs and in matted banks of grass and sedges and dried fern, Lven where very plentiful it is quite inconspicuions, leaving no well-defined runways and being seldom seen hy day. Some information on the feeding habits has heen obtained by the examina- tion of stomach contents of considerable numbers from the Flenrieu Peninsula; this consists most frequently of a dark coloured, finely ground pulp in whieh setd case fragments form the chief recognisable constitkent. Incineration of the dried mass yields an ash rich in sand which gives colour to the view that sub- terranean materials are largely used for food, This had been inferred indepen- dently from the frequency with which the rat had been trapped on burut clear ings under Hmber where the soil was. much searred by fresh, shallow excava- tiotes, About one-half the stomachs contained appreciable quantities. of insect material representing both Coleeptera und Orthoptera, und in two cases a Neshy muss derived, at least in part, from an Amphibian, No trace: of ereen vegetation could be detected. The available evidence, therefore, suggests that in Uds district at least, seeds, ruots and tubers are the chief eloments of the dict, with 4 not unimportant intake af insects and small vertehrates, Lt is Very easily (rapped with a yariety of haits of which bread, fat and sliced apple were found about equally effective, The stumach frequently carries a heavy infestation af a nematode, identi- fied by Mrs. I. M, Thomas as a Physaloptera species, aut several unidentified ectoparasites uceur, of which the most important quantitatively is a Laelaps species. As regards repraduction, the data is scanty and the evidence mostly negative as the greater part of the Fleurieu Peninsula series was ubtained at times when reproduction was largely suspended, However, by combining such infurmatiun as it yields, bath in the field and in captivity, with that frum other South Aus- tralian mainland localities and fron: Greenly and Gambicr Islands and western Victoria, it may be seen that, in the mule, testes first underse a sndden-enlarge- ment and become serotal in site in July and August and may be found so till the following February; and that in the Female activity in the form: of observed littering of wild caught rats in captivity, and lactation and pregnancy in the wild, extend from September till February. While the evidence from ‘auy one locality is adequate for a positive statement, the combined data might be RATTUS GREY! GHAY ANT ETS DERIVATIVES 137 taken as indicating that the overall reproductive pattern for the species is onc aft activity from lale winter or early spring to lute summer (July-February) and that there is a period of quiescence in autumn and eurly winter (March-Junc), Vulval occlusion is ubseut in the Fleurieu Peninsula series and in other muin- Jand material has becn noted in one example only; a subadult fram the Meadows Creek urea, slightly north of the main scries, in Apmil. 1( is more frequent in a Greenly Island collection (infra). The number of litters per year is not ascertained. In the single littering ohserved in captivity four young were pro- dieed, hut in western Victoria, six full-term uterine embryos were observed in hwo cases, Numbers of R. vreyi taken in the Fleuricn Peninsula were kept in captivity for varying periods under conditions similar tu those described for Pseudomys (Cyomys) anodemoides in my paper of 1944. Ona diet of mixed grain, pututnes and hurd fruit, whieh was always present in the cuges in excess of require- ments, and supplemented by a small ration of egg, honey, powdered milk une fat bacon, it appeared to thrive and produced and reared young. Water svas drunk sparingly when supplied, but is not essential, and two groups, one captive born and one wild, lived through a hot summer without it. in general, it proved to be a vigorous, restless and agressive little evealure. The males made almost ceascless attempts to escape and frequently succeeded by snawing holes in the wire netling, but the escapees made little use if theit freedom, seemed wonplissed by their enlarged surronndings and were usually easily retrapped in the vicinity ot the cages. [ eannot confirm Woud Jones’ 1995) description of its “gentle” character, Its failure to bite when handled \ which is not invariable) seams to be due to a paralysis vf fear rather than to tolerance, and though it may not move away when touched, it frequently trembles, its tail beats an invuluntary tattoo and its eyes bulge in their sockets, Tinpressions of temperament no doubt depend on the soeial balance of the communities observed. The groups whieh € have watched always contained an excess of males and under these conditions it appears in a very differant liylit. Its libido during the season is quite tisatiable and under stress of sexual com- petition it wages relentless wur on all rivals real or potential and either kills or incapacitates them or enforces 2 recognition of its dominance. New additions {a the colony were always treated with hostility though they all came from a very restricted area of the Peninsula, On at least one vecasion house mice straying into the cage were killed and caten, Natural vegetation from the site of @uptire was used lo carpet the cages and hallow logs and nest boxes were provided for shelters; these were generally vecupied by pairs, but solitary males often made grass nests for themselves in the corners, either of an open enp-shaped form (Pl 2. Tig. A) or a much larger domed structure, with an entrance ner the base (PI, 2. Fig. B). Much time and labour were expended in constructing these nests, which are not just random heaps of material, but were made by interweaving selected stems. They were demulished and rebuilt at freqient titeevals, and nest building is evidently am important natural industry uf the species, Transference of 4 yroup to a new cage was always Followed by a tremendous burst of activity. all crannies and furnishings being examined in minute detail and maved it possible, At sich times it ventured out trecly in daylight, but ordinarily its activities were strietly tochirnal, Il gave no evidence of any special clinthing ability, and though it clambered about the netting un occasion, it made na use of the perches provided. The voice is much in evidence in young animals, but adults are rather silent, except when fighting or threatened, when (hey squeal harshly. The ectuparasite Laelaps sp, which is almost always normally present i324 H. HH. FINLAYSON in the wild, tends to increase unduly in captivity but may be checked by fre- quently dusting with pyrethruro. The following serial notes cover some points of general interest in the de- velopment of a litter in caplivitv. The female, having left her mate and begun to make a nest separately, was transferred alone to a smaller cage, where four young Were born next day (September 8) at unascertained intervals, They were uniformly pink on all surfaces and smooth and very vacal, using a shrill bird- like call when left in the cold by the mother. If disturbed at the nest she fre- quently jumped out, dragging some of the young with her, but they did sot adhere firmly to the nipples. Vhe female had but four of the tea mammiae functioning — two inguinals and twa peetorals. At Hanis: The young were removed from the nest, examined and weighed, using a stoppered weighing bottle: weight 5 g. They were now perceptibly darker above than below and wrinkled; the mysticial vibrissac quite apparent and all white. When returned to the nest. the young were immediately flung out by the mother and rolled to and fro on the srass of the floor with her hands for a minute or more, She then took them in her mouth and carefully replaced them in the nest. This decontamination rite was frequently, but not invariakly, curried’ out on future occasions of handling. At 9 days: Dorsum now much darker than ventrum and completely clothed in a fine lead coloured down which is tinged with yellow on nape. The nestlings were vigorous but not capable of locomotion. ct 12 days: All young weighed 8 ».; pelage considerably advanced, the yellow areas extending nearly ta the rump and on the outer aspect of the fore- limb a conspicuous patch of lead coloured underfur bas appeared. Thougli still blind) they could now seramble slowly over a bench, ‘The three males were recognisable by minute paired spots of piginented epidermis on the scrotal sites. it L6 days: Pelage naw markedly thicker, but of the same length and cover- ing Ul the trunk and limbs but not the ears nor tail. The young were able to remnain balanced on all four limbs and to walk an inch or two. At 19 days; Weight LO g.; furring of body and appendages complete; un the tail both seutation and hairs were apparent und its dorsal surface distinctly darker than below; dorsum of the pes haired with pure white on the toes only, that on the metatarsal urea heing slightly darkened at base. The sales of the pes were now darkened ta.2a pale slate colour, but the palms of the manus, pink. Al 4 weeks: Eyes opened on the 22nd day. When removed from the nest the young jumped freely and ran and climbed about the cage and when handled made drbermined attempts to bite: the lower incisors were still white. AtS weeks: 4 13g; 6 lly: 6 13g 9 13g. The pigmented scrotal sites ace still conspicuuus and in the female there is no vulval oeelusion, Though they were not seen to voluntarily leave the nest they undoubtedly do so. at night aud are taking solid tood freely. Both upper and lower incisors were now yellow, but the former much darker. On the 34th day one of the 13 ¢. males was Found dead; head and body, 73; tul, ffl, pes, 20; ear, 15:5 * 105 rhinarium to eye, 12; oye tu ear, 12; skull greatest Jength, 25-6. The third molar had not yet erupted. At 6 weeks; Anuther male finind dead and partly eaten; the survivors weighed ¢ l4g;, 9° 16¢, At weeks: 4 2345 2 334. The young had not been under close obser- vation since Just weighing und the remarkable disparity in size was quite um expected; the male appeared to be entirely normal and healthy and active but was tnuth less bulky than the female. Areas of exposed epidermis were still relatively unpigmented and when exposed to sunlight or handled, the light RATTUS GREYE GRAY AND ITS DIENIVATIVES 125) coloured parts of manus, tail, pes and rhinarium, but not the ears, became deep pink. They were still comparatively leggy and awkward; they climbed ahout the netting more than adults but showed on agility at it. The male. having siven evidence of rut, the dam was removed from the care. At 10 weeks: 3 30 %.; 27 38 & At this time the pair made a grass nest exactly as fabricated by the wiid born rats, and shared it. Regular observation and weighing had to be abandoned at this point, but in the next six months the young weathered their first summer successfully on the standard diet and without water. They were somewhat tamer than wild caught specimens, but the male always attempted to bite when handled. The pelage was now gener- ally similar to that of the duller coloured adults, but less dense and glossy, and with fewer guard hairs and correspondingly reduced grizzle. At 87 weeks: The female was found dead, having delivered four premature young; head und body, 136; tail, 130; pes 27-5; car, 19 « 11-5: weight 80 g.; these dimensions ure still somewhat below the approximate means of adult wild fernales, as selected by molar wear in the sequcl (infra). The surviving male was mixed in with a wild caught group of both sexes, but after resisting steady persecution for six months with varying success, he was removed to a cage of his own where he vutlived the entire colony, dying during w heat wave on January 13, 1939, when day temperatures rose to 113 deg. in the shade; head and body, 151; tail, incomplete; pes, 27; ear, 20 * 12: wt. 145 g.; skull greatest length, 35:1, These values for head and body und weight exceed the approximate means of the adults of the wild canght series, but sume others, notably the pes. are much lower, though all fall within the range except the weight. This exceeds the maximum for the wild caught group by JO per cent. and was due to exeessive fat. The skull length barely attains the minimum for the wild “adult” group subsequently measured (infra). The death of this male at two years four months of age was almost certainly Iremature und probably due to heat apoplexy, Though the skull characters may vive been modified by captivity, they do not suggest an aged condition, when compared with the oldest of the wild series. A life span for the species in nature of three or our years seems probable- 2, DEFINITION OF A STANDARD POPULATION OF R. GREYT CREYT GRAY, 1841 The material examined below, which is later used as a standard series for assessing the status of other populations, was taken near the heads of the Cal- lawonga, First, Boat Tlarbour, Tapanappa und Blacklellows Creeks in the Weurien Peninsula at the southern extremity of the Mt. Lofty Range. That it may be accepted as representative of the primary subspecies is indicated (within the limitations inherent in such comparisons) by the consonance of the lectotype with the range of variation now described and by the specific statement of Thomas (igen) that Wood Jones’ donation from Mt. Compass was in agree- ment with the lectotype; this locality being but x few miles north in the ranges anal presenting very similar ecological conditions to those of the drumage of the creeks named. A. strict interpretation of the term “vicinity of Adelaide” might put the type locality on the coastal Adelaide-Wakefield plain, which has some claim to be considered as a disline! natural region, differing from the highlands fitty miles te the south, which yielded the present material, in lower rainfall, higher mean feed) W. UW. TINLAYSON temperatures and, of course, in soils and vegetation. As will be shown later, the few specimens which are certainly known frum this plain, show slight differ- ences, and give colour to the vizw that the type locality les in the Hills district to the south. The Fleurieu series comprises 45 individuals representing an adequate range of sexual, seasonal and age phases; approximately one half of it is in the form Ps skins and skulls, with the rainainder aleohol preserved. ‘The sex ratio is 254 2229). (1) EXTRBANAL CHARACTERS Size sroall; the plase of the spectes under consideration being, one of the smallest of Australian rats. Limbs and appendages slender and delicate and the body build light and gracile, the dumpiness, which has been remarked (Wood Jones, 1925), being due to posterior lengthening of pelage rather than to a somatic character. The head (Pl. 3, Fig. A) is relatively large in comparisun to body length and gencral bulk and has a well arched profle and but medium rostral development. The ear is thin in substance, bluntly rounded and carricd cunspicuously free from the head fur. The eye is large and prominent, and under emotional stress is capable of a remarkable degree of protrusion. The facial vibrissae are relatively very strongly developed in R. greyt; all sets are well represented and the mysticials, yenals and supraorbitals in par- tictdar are very fosk thongh slender bristles with extremely. attenuated tips. As they are much subject to shortening by abrasion and breaking, the lengths quated have been taken from a selected group of apparently undamaged examples, and except for the mysticials which wlone have been used compara- nvely, the maximum observed length only is quoted. ‘The counts have been made on fully furred examples, which in the case of the smaller bristles, present more diffeulty than in earlicr nude or part furred stages, sa that these numbers are subject ta correction. In the mysticial set, the shorter, anterior, members are white for the greater part of their length, the remainder blackish brown with white tips; length in adults ranges from 42-33 with an approximate mean of 46-7; the three longest examples were supplicd by males, but the mean for females is almost as high (46-U ef. 47-4), The genal set is most frequently reduced to a single bristle, hut rarely two of almost the same length and set very closely together, may he present; maximum 29 mm. Supraorbitals apparently normally two. though only a sinvle bristle survives im some and a third very small member may be present in others: these, with the yenals, have the same colour distribution as the longer mysticials; maximum 32 mm, 4>2>5>1 but 4>3 occurs rarely, and the 4th digit is always the stontest. The claws are moderately developed, yellow horn coloured and with a free projection about equal to the apical pads and lightly fringed with bristles. The pollex is relatively well developed and its nail is large anu cun- spicuous dorsally. The general colour of the palmar surface in life is pink; the central portions are deeply creased hut not punctate nor granular, The ereoves of the palmar surface. of the digits are deeply incised and the 4-3 semi- annular ridges which they enclose are prominent and entire distally, but the proximal two are commonly broken wp into scales, in a more decided fashion than is usual in Australian Retius, The pultnar pads are smooth and rounded in outline but are relatively large and with bold relief; the surfaces are feebly striate. The interdivitals are mounted on prominent folds of integument which in available illustrations (Wood Jones (1925). Brazenoy (1936) op. cit.) ure not always distinguished from the pads themselves, su that very different conditions appear to he attri- buted to the species. The metacarpals vary considerably in shape and arca and have extensiuns on tu the lateral aspects of the manus, which complicate the overall appraisal under these heads. The outer metacarpal (bypothenar) is always the longer and extends lower towards the carpus and in palmir aspect is nsually twice as long as bread, and & pointed oval in shape. The inner meta- carpal is shorter and broader and is sometimes equal and rarely greater in area than the outer; its palmar portion is roughly an inverted U or bell shape, with a depression between the arms and an accessory fold on the lateral aspect towards the pollex, separated from the main portion by a distal notch. The interdigitals arc somewhat more constant, the most frequent shape being an inverted broad piriform for the median pad and inverted cardiform [or the dst and 3rd. The 3rd interdigital has a small circular satellite pad at its postero- external angle with a frequency of about 90 per cent., which, however, may be reduced to a dependant heel or disappear altogether. In point of arca the pre- vailing pad formula is; outer metacarpal > inuer metacarpal > 2nd interdigital eu > Ist', but as shown above the metacarpals may be cqual, or the inner te larger, Neither median antebrachial ner anconcal vibrissae were traced on the forelimb in the available material; (he ulnar carpals are 4-5 in number, arranged in two groups, and are pure white to base with the longest of the set reaching 13 mm, as a maximum, The pes, relative to head and body length, is one of the longest amongst Australian species of Rattus, with an approximate mean value in adults of 19°7 per cent. of the head and body, and also one of the narrowest, the ratio oF breadth across the sole fron the base of the Ist diuit, to the length, averaging ebout 0-22. It tapers gently for most of its lenvth and hus a well constricted calceancal purtions the 3rd digit reaches 7 min., ity claw 305 mm. and the hallux 4 min., as maxima. The digital formula is as in the manus and the 4th digit again usually the stoutest; the claws sharp and delicate, coloured as in the manus, but with longer fringing bristles which may exceed them by their own length, Digital rings increased to 6 on the 2nd, 3rd and 4th and all except the distal member divided into 2 (or basally into 3) large seales. The volour 1 The 2nd of the primitive pentaditctyl manus. 1a2 H, H. FPINLAYSON of the sole is pale pink with the central portions sometimes darkened with an mfusion oF slate, which, huwever, davs nut extend to the pads. The planter pads ave strongly developed and more definitely striate than in the manus, The inner metatarsal in this series is notable in being broader than usual an generally lacks the Jong, drawn-out, comma-shuped tail, commun in the genus; in shape it is an irregular oval narrowing proximally but with its maximum breadth often more than half its length, The cuter metatarsal is broad oval or nearly round and only one-quarter or less of the area of the inner. The median interdigitals are regularly pirifurm and the laterals inverted cardi- farm; the Ist with a slight depression towards the heel, and the 4th with 4 distinct separate satellite pad at the postero-cxternal angle in 50 per cent. of cases only; in the temainder, it may be represented by an accessory fuld or heel ar be entirely absent (20 per cent.): much more rarely a heel or satellite may appear al the base of the Ist interdigital. In adults, the most frequent size relation is: inner metatarsal > 3rd interdivital > or = 3nd >4th > Ist > outer metatarsal: this accounts for 85 per vent, of cuses, but it is characteristic of the species that the lateral interdigitals are large with respect to the median and a conditiun of subequality between all fuur may be reached; in two cases the median inter digitals are larger than the inner metatarsal. Caleaneal vibrissae wure nut traced, The tail is slender and gently tapered, with attenuuted apex and no ter- minal expansion. he relation of its Iength to that of the head and body ranges from 85-110 per cent, with an approxfmate mean of 94-3 per cent. In the group of seven species which have been chiefly used in these comparisons and com- prising R. ereyi. assimilis, lutreola, villosissimus, colletti, norvegicus, and BR. dlexandrinus, this mean is exceeded by the latter alone. In the entire serics of R. areut from the Fleurieu Peninsula, the length of tail equals or exceeds that of the head and hoedy in about 24 per cent. of cases and the distribution of the freguency of this relation shows only slight differences betwoen ¢ und 2 (26 ef. ZI per cent.) and adults and subadults (22 of. 25 per cent,), so that the variation in this feature fs very largely an individual one. Scale counts were wot made upon animals in the ficld, but as the range observed in alcohol pre- servexl material and in filled skins is identical, it is probable that the results uvbtained are characteristic of this furm. The middorsal count in adults ranges fim 12-14 per om., 13 scales haying the highest freqnency (54 per cent.) and 14, 38 per cent. Proximally, the dorsal count averages slightly less, while dis- tally it may rise as high as 21 per cm, at the apex, In subadalt and immature phases the count is decidedly higher, the middursal number ranging from 13-15 per em. with frequencies of 44 per cent. for L5 scales, 31 per cent. for 14 and 25 per cent. for 13. ‘he number of hairs per scale is normally three, but shows cosiderable irregularity dorsally, especially towards the base, where it may vary from one to three, The length of tail hairs is fram 2-25 scales middorsally aid increases distally. The tail is decidedly darker above than below in 4 large majority of specimens, both scales and hairing contributing to the etfect, but the degree of the difference varies widely and it may be almost as pale above as below, but is sever darker below, Light coloured epidermal markings, possibly traumatic in origin, are sometimes present and rarely as mmch as 20 mm, at the apex may be entirely white, both as to epidermis and hair. The mammery formula in lactating females examined is 2-3 = 10, but in subadults or quiescent adults, the nipples are very completely retracted and in many af these the pectoral and sometimes the thoracte us well, could not be traced by ordiniry macroscopic examination under a lens, but whether they are completely suppressed as implied by Wood Jones (op. cit.) remains to be RATTUS GREYI GRAY AND ITS DERIVATIVES 133 shown. As mentioned above, in a female lactating in captivity for four young, only four of the ten were functioning; two pectorals and two abdomino-inguinals. The pectoral and thoracic nipples lie respectively just in advance and just behind the insertion of the forelimb and upon lines which diverge posteriorly, the thoracic being always more laterally sited. The abdomino-inguinals show con- siderable variation in pattern due to changes in both the lateral and antero- posterior intervals separating them. An evenly-spaced cresventic arrangement (Text Fig. 1 A) is frequent, but a rectilinear form in which the 2nd and 3rd 6 © ° fo) © 1] 1©) 6 1) © © © © 0} 0} 10) oOo oOo © [0] U Fig. 1. Diagram showing extremes of variation in the mammary pattern of R. greyi greyi (x 1-0 eu.). are nearer both to the midline and to one another, than to the Ist, also occurs (Text Fig. 1 B) as well as intermediate conditions. The B pattern is apparently that noted by Tate (1951) in the form R. g. peccatus from West Victoria. The intervals represented in the diagrams were measured with the limbs extended laterally to the maximum. The first (lower abdominal) lies well in advance of the insertion of the hind limb. The testis is relatively very large and at its maximum development in the scrotum has diameters of 23 and 14 mm. approximately and weighs about 2 g.; it is as large as in the much bulkier R, lutreola of the same habitats, but a more squat oval in shape. The scrotum is well furred except at the caudal extremities, which are nude and have the epidermis pigmented dark gray. The epidermis of the perineal site in the female is also darkened slightly, but the pigment is 134 Il. H. KINLAYSON diffused and wot concentrated on the two distal sites us in the male, In adults the genital tubercle has a free projection of about 8 mm, in both sexes- Sexual variation in external characters except where noted in the avcount is slight or largely obscured by individual variation. (b) DIMENSTONS The four chief dimensions quoted were obtained as follows: Head and buely—This. is the total length of the dorsal contour, minus the tail length. Tail— The length of the ventral surface of the tail from the posterior margin of the anus ta apex of the last vertebra, excluding the terminal lair. The measure- ment is made with the tail Hexed at right angles to the body. Pes—The length uf che plantar surface from the extremity of the heel to the extremity of the most distant apical pad, exchiding the claw, the digits being straightened and in line with the metatarsal. Zar—Length from the lowest point of the traguid natch to the apex of pinna: The figures give the ranye and approximate mean for two overlapping age eroups; (1) an adult plus aged group of 10 males and 6 females in which all molar crowns have sustained sufficient wear to obliterate the pattern of indi- vidual cusps and replace it by one of transverse lophs and in whicli rostral de- velopment is marked and the zygomatic outline untapered, and (2) an advanced subadult group of 9 males and 13 females in which all cusps show appreciable wear and the rostral development is less. In the adult group the range and approximate mean of the percentage relation of length of tail, pes, and car, to that of head and body, follow the absolute dimensions. Head and body and tail are to the nearest mm,; others to the nearest 0-5 inm, 1, Head and body, ¢ 138-159 (146-7), 9 139-155 (145-0); tail, 4 130- 133 (189-7), S4-7-110-0 (96-1) per cent, 9 127-146 (134-6), 83-9-L04-0 (925) per cent: pes, ¢ 27-32 (29-3), 17-2-22-2 (19--) per cent, 9 28-25°5 (28:2), 18:1-20-1 (19-4) per cent; car Jength, ¢ 20-22 (21-1), 13-3-15-8 (14:3) per cent, ?@ 19-21-5 (20-2), 13-1-14-6 (13-9) per cent.; eur breadth, £ 11-135 (12-2), @ 11-13 (12-1); rhinarium to cye, ¢ 17-19 (18-4), 9 16-19 (17-9), eye to ear, § 13-35-16 (14:3), 2 14-16 (15-1); weight in grammes, 4 80-LI2 (92-7), 9 T0-00 (82-6). 2. Head und body, ¢ 190-146 (131-8), @ 129-145 (131-8); tail, g 1I5- 137 (125-()), 2 115-1385 (123-2); pes, @ 27-30-35 (28-5), 2 26-5-29 (27-8), ear length, 4 19-21 (19:7), ? 18-21 (19-7); ear breadth, 2 10-14 (11-9), 9 10-13:5 (11-8); rhinarium to eye, ¢ 16-18 (17-0), 2 16-18 (16-9); eye to ear, (133-15 (14-1), 9 18-15 (13-8); weight in grammes, g 56-85 (87-4), 9 51-75 (65-7), Though there is a wide overlap in all dimensions between the sexes, it would appear that in folly adult animals, the female is approximately equal to the mule in head and body length, but is decidedly lighter when non-pregnant (10 per cent.) and uverayes slightly shorter in pes, ear and tail. The enormous example quoted by Wood Jones (1925, 304) with a head and body length of 186 mm. has no near counterpart in this series. The very low foot length of 26 inm. associated with it, suggests that the former may be oa typographical enor. (ce) PELAGH The pelage is fne and soft and in prime condition is dense and copious and middersally consists of Uiree piles: (1) a fine silky underfur of nearly uniform diameter and 18 mm. long; the basal two-thirds is a deep slate (near Ridgway’s RATCUS GREYT GRAY AND TUS DERIVATIVES a5 dark plumbeous) and the terminal one-third is broken up into three colour bunds, successively dark brown black, a bright tan between ochraceous tuwny and ochraceous orange, and the extreme tip again brown black; this pile is both quantitatively and chromatically the most important clement in the pelage; (2) # second pile may reach 25 mm. in Jength and is made up of much smaller numbers of hairs with flat shafts which hraaden in the upper third of their length; they are plumbecus at base, but with the terminal 6 mm. brown black and the extreme tip buff or ivory: (3) a sparse admixture of guards whieh reach 350m, in length and darken from plimbeous tu brown black over their distal half. Posteriorly the three sets of hairs may lengthen to 20, 30 and 45 mm. respectively, and over the nimp and sides un imcreasing proportion of the latter are tipped with white or ivory. : The gencral colour effect dorsally is a fine almost uniform grivzle of rich tan, brown black and buff or ivory which almost entirely phseures the basal slate colour and when vwewed from it littl: distance approximates to Ridgway’s cianamon brown in the warmest and lightest colonred individuals, and to bistre in the coldest and darkest. The sides are lighter than the back owing to a progressive weakening of the subterminal band to a butty brown and reduetion in the overlay of black tipped guards, but in most individuals the lateral surfaces remain distinetly grizzled and the passage to the pale ventrum is abrupt. Mid-ventrally, there are two piles; an undertur 10 mm, long with its basal § mm. a somewhat lighter pluinbeous than dorsally and with the tips greyish white or pale buff and a sparse intermixture of guards 15 mm, long which are slate with the distal flat- jened 5 sim, white or near white. The basal slate shows through more than on the dorsum and the general colour here is a wreyish white with a more om less deeided wash of yellow or bulf over the belly. Gray (1841) singled out this variation of the yellow tone of the ventrum in his original description; but in the whole of the present series it is appreciable and sometimes decided over the mid-belly, while the throat, chest and perineal arcas may remain grey white. In a few exampics there is au invasion of the belly area just in advance al the insertion of the hind limb, by the buff or hrown of the sides. The facial areas and crown are paler aud more buffy than the back, Hugh still well grizzled. The ear backs in dried material are usually darker than the head, chiefly owing to the blackish pigmentation of the epidermis, the very seant hairing being a pale brown externally and greyish white internally — in a small proportion, liowever, greyish ear backs lighter than the head are present. The outer aspects of the forelimb are greyer than elsewhere — about Ridgway’s light drab, and long haired, and just above the carpus & conspicuous dark brown black markiny is constantly developed, sharply contrasted with the silvery white carpus and manus; the hairs of the latter, hawever, are usually pale brown at base and there is sumetimes a very slight grizzling of all BNIISNAS NODGYH TVSiG —- 3800RYT SNIVSILNY SPNOH LA 241739 aon TN TePL/N IG FSH AD suDy22IK7 YtPOS. Saji 3) 4 Sp4EYS (oy225- ayesry yo pur wayson) a LIP oSz (UONIIG wJooyag yO pur sez) q 72 aA] PreEU/tOIddy SNITDIINY FTIWEND GNY VL0O.ag NOILI3S YAVA THY, SVT ANID | AWsENS Se ed XU] SNORT ANITHILNY, VLOOLIE po! 1338 THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN 185 This relatively steep dipping limb forms the eastern limit of the Nappa. pra uplift. It dips into » well-developed structural depression, the Haddon syncline, 4 The Haddon syncline is strongly assymetrical. The western limb dips 12° to 20°E,, whilst along the eastern limb an average dip of 24° to 4°W. is fairly persistent (see Fig. 3, Section 2, also Fig. 6). The axial trend is N.30°E. and shows a continuous phinge of 2°N. Due to the steady rise of the long axis to- wards the south, the Haddon syncline becomes less pronounced in its southern extension and flattens out completely after becoming level with the broad Cor- TERTIARY » UNCON FORMITyY — > —= — 2" o 9 a a Ay -& Pas o 5 a CRETACEOUS Fig. 4.—Scarp-section on the south-east lanb of Morncy dome showing angular unconfornit Tbipawen Cretaceous and Tertiary sediments, Cretaceous laip 6°): 1. White and purple shales; 2- White feldspatic sandstone; 3. White: kaolinitic shale; 4. White feldspatic sandstone; 5. White kaolinitiv silt- stone. Tertiary (dip 4°): 6. Grey grit; 7, Fawn, coarse, torrential-bedded sandstone; 8. Pebble conglomerate; 9. Whitish to light brown gritty sandstone; 10. dense, highly silicified, coarse sandstone, “duricrust”. dillo uplift (see Fig. 2). This gentle rise to the south is very well demon- strated by the progressive surfacing of certain stratigraphic members, exposed along the centre of the valley of Haddon Creek, A comparatively narrow, but distinct structure is developed east of Haddon syncline, It is called Mt. Howie anticlme after the highest morphological point within the area occupied by it. Similar to the Nappamilkie uplift, the Mt. Howie anticline consists of a major anticline on the west, and a smaller, lower anticline on the east, The two anticlines are divided by a very shallow syncline (see Fig. 3, Section 2). The western limb of the main anticline dips 2° to 4°, the eastern limb about 3°. The eastern anticline has 14° to 2° west-dip and about 3° east-dip. The long axis trends approximately N.30° to N,35°E. and plunges with 2° to the north, forming a good closure in the northern part of the strac- L5G H. WOPFNER ture. The north-phinge of the western anticline seems to be slightly steeper than that of the eastern anticline, Towards the south a minor local closure of about 40 feet might be present, but generally the Mt. Howie anticline fuses with the broad Cordillo uplift. The culmination of Mt, Howie anticline is reached i the Viclwity of Mt. Howie (800 ft. M.S.L.) and the amount of structural relicf is 440 fect in relation to the Haddon syncline and 450 feet in comparison with the plains south-east of the structure, Neither the Nappamilkie uplift nor the Mt. Howic anticline have an obvious individual closnré in their southern parts. They finally fuse together to the half-lume of the Cordillo uplift which forms the common clusure for both of them tavards south. This gives the whole strueltural unit the shape of a hand, four of its fingers spread out radially between north and north-east, As mentioned previously, the western unticline of the Nappamilkie uplift forms a shallow closure ut its northem end. This structural depression is also murphologically expressed, At the latitude of the border fence (near 10-mile gate) the eastern limb of this structure descends below the present plane of alluvial sedimentation and is hidtlen under alluvial clays and deiftsand. Approxi- mately $ to 10 miles north of the border fence Fhis eastern wing emerges Fram beneath the sand-dunes, and gradually gains elevation to form the eastern limb ot the Betoota dome (see Fig. 2). The Betoota dome is a simple, ellipsvidal-shaped dome with near “orthor- hombic” symmetrical features. The trend of the long axis is about N-IN°E. On either direction from the domal culmination, distinctive plunges of 1° to 2°, slightly inéreasing towards the extreme northern and southern end of the dome, are observed. Both the western and the castern limbs have dips of 3° to 5°. In places, the dip on the western limb might be slightly more. Centrally, over ihout 4 to 7 miles in width, the roof of the Betoota dome has been eroded, leaving only two north-south trending cuestas on either side, nosing together at the ends. The cuesta which is built by the castern limb, forms a west-facing escurpinent, uninterrupted for nearly the whole length of the structure. The western limb, though also forming an escarpment, has becn more deeply eroded and dissected, particularly in its northern half. This may indicate that the western limb of the anticline is slightly steeper-dipping than the ecasiern one. Ou its extreme northern outcrop, the Betoota dome causes a deviation of Farrars Creek. This creek, previously following a south-westerly course, is deviate inte a due easterly divyection. On the nerth-western-most edge of the dome, the eresiim hy Farrars Creek has eut into the structure, isolating a few low, north-west dipping hills. After passing beyond the dome, Farrars Creck retums to its old come, The length of the Betouta dume is about 35 miles, and the maximum width approximately 8 to 12 miles. The maximum structural relief of the dome (situ- ited at a latitude of about 25°41" te 25°45’S. ) is 500 fect, From the Retoota dome going east, drittsand and alluvial Hats dominate the conntry. This type of country fs very typical of structural depressions and persists for about 20 miles. It represents the northern extension of the Haddon syiicline. As far as is knuwn, this northern part af the Haddon syneline forms a wide, but rather shallow, trough, apparently with its long axis nearly harizontal, Miner warping parallel with the strike of the long axis could be present. North of Planet Downs a rise nf the synclinal axis is indicated (see Figs. 2 and 3, Section 3). Tn the east, the northern extension of the Haddon syneline is bordered by a row of low, NNE.-SSW, trending hills, which ure the eroded remnants vf the strongly dissected western limb of the Curalle doine. This dome is the must prominent structure within the whole arca. It is situated north of the Mt, Howie anticline and continues in the same trend. Broadly speaking, the Curulle dome THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN AHTESIAN BAST LAT is a simple. elongated structure broadening markedly in its northern extension. The general symmetrical features are “moriclinic”. The surface expression af the structure is very good. The eastern limb, which dips at 2° to 7°, forms a large eucsta with a pronounced escarpment facing west and trending in a NNE.- SSW. direction, The maximum height of the scarp is 500 feet above the plain, in places pussibly more, The maximum elevation is approximately 900 teet above MS.L. This range is also known as Beal Range. The western limb dips 12° to 23°W., the steepest dips being situated at about 26° south latitude. The strike along the southern part of the western limb is varving between N.5°W, and N.30°R. (see Pl. 1, Fig. 2 and Pl. 2, Fig, 1). ‘Two recently excavated water-dams, exch situated just east of the strongly eroded remnants af the western limb provide excellent exposures of stra. Laght grey coloured shales interbedded with carbonaceous shales exhibit the wesl-dipping structure very elearly. The dips are 14°W, in the southern exposure, and ID°WSW. in the northern one. About @ miles north-east of Planct Downs the strike of the western limb swings into a westerly direction (about N.40° to 50°W,), causing a considerable widening of the dame in the north. The dip also Hattens to 2°-4°S, Alter continuing in this westerly strike for about 4 to 5 miles, the remnants of the western limb become covered by alluvial sediments. I a mayoer similar to the western limb, the eastern limb also Hattens in its. northern virt, and south of Lake Cuddapan shows a slight dip reversal from 24°K, to 1k°W, It cms a small, strongly disseated hump aud leads to a bulging af the limb towards the enst, Tho final east-dip in this part ix 16° (see Fip. 2), The long axis of the Curalle dome trends approximately N,30°E. umd has an obvious phinge in its southern part. In its northern extension it is possible that the axis tekes a more northerly trend. The northern plunge of the long axis is 2", In its southernmost part, the Curalle dome Hattens out slightly (limb- dips 2° ty 3°) und finally plunges 2° south, forming a good closure towards the Mt. Howie anticline. The uverall length of the Curalle dome is about 40 miles. In the south the structure in outcrop is 10 to 12 miles wide, whilst in the uorthern part the width is betwee 14 and 18 miles. The meximurn structural relief at the surface is at least HU) feet. A shallow depression (approximately 250 feet) separates the Curalle dome frum the Morney anticline which follows to the north (sce Fig, 2), The Moruey anticline is a huge ellipsoidal-shaped structure wath slightly “monoclinic” sym- metrical features. ‘The limbs dip with 2° to 3° to the west and 2° to 6° te the vast (see Fig. 4). The trend of the long axis is N.35°R, aud the maximum struc- tural relief abont 500 to 600 feet, The Momey anticline is about 55 miles lang and on its broadest part 30 miles wide. Local drainage palterns have been strongly influenced hy the geological structure. Here. as elsewhere in the basin, it is clearly evident that streatns which originated on the steeper limb (having the stecptr gradient) haye the Ureater crosional energy. These creeks on the steeper limb of the structures were originally “consequent” streams, but in view of their greater crasional capacity, licadwater erosion led ty measure of encroachment and capture across the anti- cline. On most of the anticlines, the centre has heen completely eroded out by these streams, Now they arc superimposed streams, draining through narrow gaps in the remnants of tlie steeper limb (see Pl. 2, Fig. 1), They expanded their catchment areas well beyond the axis of the structure, capturing the headwaters of streams of the flatter limb. In several places one can observe the old creek- bed of deserted “consequent” streams of the flatter limb, Billed with gravel and alluvial sand, dismembered [rom the oppastte stream pattern un the escarpment whine leads down to the drainage srea of the creeks originated on the steeper dip slope- 188 H. WOPFNER The creeks on the flatter limb continue as consequent streams and usually retain shallow channels. For instance, on the Curalle dome, it has been esti- mated that about 80 per cent. of the area is drained toward the steeper western limb and only 20 per cent. toward the flatter eastern limb. The big structural depressions, as, for instance, the Haddon- and the Farrars syncline, act as depositional troughs for the drainage systems of the broad uplifts. Debris from the structural highs still gets deposited in the structural lowlands (e.g. Rainbow Plain, Lake Cuddapan, Lake Yamma Yamma) which surround the anticlines. Generally, the extensive control of the drainage pattern by the fold struc- tures suggests compurative. geomorphic youth of the structures. SUBSURFACE GEOLOGY Very little subsurface information concerning all of these structures is. yet available. Lockhart Jack (1925 and 1930) correlated all available bore informa- tion for the southern part of the area, but within the northern part of the struc- tures only a few water bores have been sunk. These water bores only yield information on the position of the duricrust. #0il and “gibbers} subsequent rete laterite —a¥ ae CROSS SECTION THROUGH THE WESTERN UMB OF HASDON SYNCLINE 23 sa WEENCAL & HeRimanTtAL SAN 2/14 Fig: 5—Section through the western limb of Haddon syncline (also castern limb of Nappamilkie anticline), approximately six miles north of Haddon No. 4 bore, showing the stratiwaphic sequence and the position of strata, A few pastoral bores off the east limb of the Curalle dome show that the duricrust sabrierses underneath the present surface and consequently is now covered by “post-duricrust” sediments. Duricrust was struck at 100 feet below surface level in Long-Hole Well, situated un the eastern shore of Luke Cadda- pan, and at 97 feet in Bloodwood Bore, 4 miles ENE, from Long-ITole Well, In Murphy's Bore, approximately 4 miles due north of Lake Cuddapan, duricrust was encountered at 50 feet. The continuation of the east-dip of the Curalle dome below the present surface level is further demonstrated by a few bores surrounding Lake Yamma Yamma. Apparently the duricrust reaches its deep- est position on the north-side of thé lake, where it is reported at a depth of 280 feet in Duck-Hole Bore. To supplement surface observations, five shallow structural bores were drilled by SANTOS im 1957. The bores were drilled on the apex and on the ‘g “BLY Bre Fee OL} yeyesny sO SAIAaNSOSD AG TIaVIII VIG! Bante HORT "961 NYS OO 2 SZ DNIDTAIG QLENOWE PO ebZ DNiaYED JILENOVA NOZIHOH Band VAN audyseun, Bate sMoaeucaue2 LN tat S2TyUNE 4e€su Aide 2 UO QAR B29 ZeN FUE Ion HERI SSS T= oa A aieus, FNVTIUAK FOAL FNIINAS = NOCOKH : sua spurs Wes WUTLYN AO1TaB NOLLS35 ra > awe 4a34 BWw3S ALNOZIdOn : econ CORZ ‘S00! ¥. ‘ a onNaos1 9 g VS OBlvagIoWta FIWIS TWSHLNIA AAOSyY NOWDAS a3) wid TWVHaAD i ‘sa020 OL 4S08L OL = a SrstL = SEL 2UWNU ea LIB +8518 SUOUEBUT] SSL 9 auoispurs “EEL. HL auarspueg 9 Ge RL Asan Apues =| 163 {8 aullkpueg oo LOB 985 4e BUD WERWH Ons FES PEL“ PSO RS ey FUORI quoypurs Agus SS = =r eS FT 0e7 MEISPUER Bot purg PUe seus Aputs Zuois, Due: sIeUG Apue’ sued uw eBey ae Hg, ,aeuES oO 282 VET SETH eES fe SunEo] Bos Dr ce ie sucepURS (eS PAM GAs 4B sed OF) ae PHEW § —— SIS-105 4 ouoyepues S*E-Q1E BUDYEPUTS A! Ser-S0y Mojapies OF! Humbe EnmaZWaCT] w PUES aH wTUG kbs Bir - fOr WolspuRS BIE- OLE DUCTEPURR SIE-,00% PudisDUrE A. Ges Qed Um seus Asu6-enig ayes hourg ¥ suajspuRs coz seGeay “CUED Yim. aieNg, Kaub-anig BUES AHH ME AUOINORY pdUNO|O2ZLI8) syed un Apwes 9 smomeunqies aeus Abang ¢ DMR AVI (att RRSP, MORPUES PUBS FAY) PUR aTRG ApuS-arig Bue RLOMPAyY AUB ania MUS pow * seus Apurg pur au{EpuTs cor! SwauiBery yensaung pur seus haub-amg SIZ. OOF DOISGUEE < sebeuy TED ym auTpeRy OF swradery erioung Yi miaepny dnd Jub isnyatana OL a9. HUOKEDL a ay_isns Souta Aveyg fue auorspues nn pue LaNpnn mys ee — ASTIN Ove aun spUES oO Ng PS EUS BAYLM! om Cree [| stung pur jos ° ‘ pucyspaw Ames, ——— musing BEE Sigg [OS | ‘ —_ ——_— —— auaepue. - —_-—— Misa 4anusung pue iL ” oO .5S7 ISH len == (BE TSW fon oS SIL TSN ZN 20 JOF Va Den n 4 S2IOH LONS DIWSIZS WOU BNOCG PeN ONY ZN Ndamlagd ,AsNerend, 30 NOVLISod NO NOUYWXOAN! VSYV SNMOQ NOGGYH SNOlLVY1SYxHOD 3YO9d 1 Iv, WOPFNER western limb of Mt. Tlowie anticline and across Haddun syneline. ‘The position ef bores Nos. 1 to 4 is shown in Fig. 6. Bore No. 5 is not shown in this plan and was situated about 4 miles south from No, 1. The bores proved the con- tinuity of the particular structures to a depth of at least 750 feet (see Fig. 6). As a marker horizon, the ‘ippesogt section of the “Betoota” Limestone horizon was used. As mentioned previously, this zone has a very widespread occurrence for it is exposed in the ventres of the Betoota and the Curalle domes as well as im the centre of the Morney anticline, ‘The calcareous beds oceur at an average stratigraphic depth of 7O0 feet and are inecr- bedded with green, friable, medium-graincd sandstones, The thickness of the individual limestime bed varies between 6 inches and 2 feet 6 inches, and usually two to four limesteme heds were struck. The author is aware of the possibility that some of the thinner calcareous beds quiwht be sey lenses with limited luteral extension. but the whole zone. itself repre- sents a type of sedimentation with definite calcareous tendencies, Far more thin normal far the dominantly clastic sediments of the Winton Formation. According jo ay analysis, carried out by A, Grasso, Geosurveys of Anst. Ltd., the hard ealeareous Leds haye an average compasition of 47 per cent. valcium carbonate, 33 per cent, pelitic materiil and 20 per ecnt: finepsamunitic material. Due to a high content of dark minersls in the sand-fraction (mainly horubleade .and biotite), these sandy limestones have a rather unusual and charucteristic appearance. A second marker horizon, a hard pyritic pelite, was struck between 1352 feet and 1357 feet in No. 1 bore and between 935 feet and 942 feet in No. 5 bore. This sediment is built up of ininute, interlocking crystals of pyrite sus- pended in a very fine-grained clayey matrix. Both No. land No. 6 bores are situated on the crest of Mt. Howie anticline and the different position of the pyritic band corresponds with the north phinge of the anticlinal axis of 14 to 2 egrees. ‘ A preliminary seismic survey, undertaken by the Bureau of Mineral Re- sources, showed that at least the east-dip of the sayne structure is still present at a depth of 6500 feet (Smith, 1958). DISCUSSION Concerning the origin of these structuyes, cousideration of the nature of the sedimentary system comprising the basin is essential. The Great Australian Artesian Basin, as a Mesozoic structure, way an epicemtineutal development which has experienced no orogenic deformation. in marginal areas, reflected structures due to sedimentary “draping” ef- fects aver old, pre-Mesozoic morphological highs are quite common, Examples of reflected structures have been observed along the Peak and Denison Ranges and recently at Oodnadatta (Wopmer, 1957), This explanation can hardly be applied to the structures described above, situated in the cental part of this deep hasin. The seismic survey by the Bureau of Mineral Resources, for example, indicates probably 8000 feet of Mesuzvic sediments in the Haddon syncline (Smith, 1958). Such a thick sedimentary blanket would even out all but the most extreme morphological features of buried ald relief, Rather it is felt, it must be assumed that the only forces which could create structures of the ob- served type within this part of the Great Austealian Artesian Basin, would be af the epeirogenctic type. Fpeiragenetic forces could have acted either as normal uplifts or as differen- hel movements along planes of dislocation both in vertical and/or transenrrent direction. As regards these latter possibilities, pre-existing dislocutiim planes iu Lhe basement could have been re-activated, with the movements transferred tu the nverlying younger sediments. THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN Iyl While the movements within the mare rigid rocks of the basement weuld be expressed in straight dishication planes (vertical or horizontal) the over- lying, more pliable Mesozoic rocks (in particular the Cretaceous) would tend to absorb some of these stresses: e.g. a normal fault in the basément would be extensively modified and/or compensated through the several thousand feet of overlying sediments, and be expressed on the surface by a monoclinal fold, Depending on the type of movements and their directions, various patterns of deformation can be predicted. The marphology of the contact between the rigid “basement” and the pliable “basin” sediments, and also internal inhomu- gencities within the pliable sedimentary body itself may alsv influence the final structural pattern. For the following reasons, i.c. the epicontinental character of the Great Australian Artesian Basin, the gathering of the axial trend within the north- east sector and the en-cchelon arrangement of the anticlinal axes (see Fig, 2), the author favours transcurrent movements as having been the cause of ¢ fold-structures, Though he realises that the stage of our knowledge om this particular matter is still incomplete and sketchy, he would like to present the following working-hypothesis. for discussion. Transcurrent movements within the basement following a general north- east, suth-west direction with the north block translated relatively to the north- cast, would introduce a retational strain that could produce the present struc- tures, Within the rigid basement this shearing strain would develop two sets of shearing planes. One of these sets lies closer to the direction of the shearing couple Han the other, and the main slip would occur along these planes (in pur case approximately N,70°E, initial stage). As the thick blanket of Mesozoic sediments is weaker and much more pliable than the “basement”, it reacts differently upon deformation, Instead of developing differential shearing planes, folding occurs in en-echelon pattern, whereby the axial trend lies at a right angle to the direction of maximum com- pression. The maximum compression will be perpendicular to the longest axis uf the strain ellipsoid. (A very rough experiment, whereby a layer of putty was sheared on two boards, produced folds nearly identical with the structures concerned, The experiment was repeated several times and yielded the same results each time. ) In the initial stage the axis of the stvain ctlipseid is approximately 45° to the direction of the shearing couple (in our case about north), bel as the amount al transcurrent movement increases the angle between the direction of the couple and the longest axis of the strain ellipsoid becomes more acule, It may be assumed, therefore, that the structures with the closest trend to north are those which were initiated first, while the anticlines with more north-easterly trend originated at a later stage. If this hypothesis is correct, it would mean that the Nappamilkic and the Betoota antielines are those which were initiated first, Following this first stage of warping the developing anticlines presented a mure rigid body than (he surrounding mmwarped sediments. Therefore, the originally established trend remained constant, even the amount was still in- creasing and the longest axis of the strain ellipsoid moving constantly east of north. With continued movement. other parts of the sediments were fulded but along a more easterly tread (Mt. Howie, Curalle und Morney anticline), while the southern extensions of both anticlinal lines fused together to the Cordillo hulf-come. In the marginal areas of the basin the sedimentary cover of the basement was tow thin to compensate the shear movements and single shear planes may: be expected to pass through into the Mesozoic sediments. The foregoing out- 192 H, WOPRFNER line would presumably explain the restriction of actual folding of cover sedi- ments to the central, thicker portion of the Great Australian Artesian Basin- There are severai reasons for selecting north-east, south-west transcurrent movements, Firstly, this is the most favourable direction to explain the observed trend of the anticlines. Secondly, the north-east, south-west direction is a pre- ferred direction of geological features, not only within the Great Australian Artesian Basin itself, but also within its surrounding older rocks. The age of the folding can only be established within a rather wide time- limit. At the stage of our present knowledge we have to assume that the sediments of the Winton Formation have been deposited in the lower Upper Cretaceous, most probably in Cenomanian time. The Winton is overlain dis- conformably by grits and torrential bedded sandstones thought to be Lawer Tertiary in age. The Tertiary sediments are usually most preminently developed on the limbs of the anticlines and towards the synclines. In several instances the Ter- tiary wedges out completely towards the crest of the anticlines, Within the area described by this paper the Tertiary beds are folded disconfortnably (un- conformably in the case of Morney anticline) with the underlying sediments af the Winton Formation. The oldest, unfolded beds, following on top of the Tertiary grits and sands (usually “duricrusted”) are laterites and Jateritised sands, These, in turn, are overlain by trayertinus, alluvial clays and silts and sand-dunes. The travertines and sand-dunes are considered to be of Quarternary age which would suggest that the laterites ure of late Tertiary age. Assuming that the dating of the grits and torrential bedded sandstones as Tertiary is correct, the ahove-mentianed observutions would give evidence that the folding movements have been initiated not later thun in Upper Cretaceous. time (post-Cenomanian). Subsequently, the Cretaceous sediments were exposed to erosion, but be- came covered again, this time by fresh-water lakes, and the coarse Tertiary grits and sandstones were depusited. While this sedimentation was still well in progress, folding movements were renewed and probably reached a climax in lute Eocene to Oligocene time. Together with vertical uplifts, this last phase finally displaced the water cover into large depressions whereof Lake Eyre, Lake Gregory and several other low-lying salt pans are the last remnants. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The author wishes to express his thanks to Mr. J. L. Bonython, Chairman ol the SANTOS Board, for the permission to publish this article, and also to Mr. R. C. Sprigg, Managing Director of Geosurveys of Australia Limited, for the opportunity to investigate the area. The author was assisted in his field investigations by W, G. Swindon, B.Se., 5. M. Rowe, B.Sc., A, Hess, B.Se., and R L. Chase, B.Se., all of Geosurveys uf Australia Limited. An intensive air reconnaissance was carried out by R- O. Brunnsechweiler, Ph.D., and the author. Particular appreciation is accorded to Mr. R, B. Beckwith, Manager of Cor- dilla Downs Station, for his valuable assistance during the field operations. H. Worrnen Puate 1 Fig. 1.—The western limb of the Haddon syncline about one mile north of Maddon No, 4 bore, looking south. The top layers are strongly silicified, Dip 15°R, (Photo H. Wopfner, ) ak. Fe Best Fig. 2—Part of the western limb of Curalle dome, north of Goppacunda Well, looking south, Dip 16°W. (Photo H, Wopfner.) H, Worrner PLATE 2 Fig. 1—The strongly eroded western limb of the Curalle dome seen from the air. The widening of the dome towards narth can be clearly observed in the top left of picture. The high searp, built up by the eastern limb of the anticline (Beal Range), is in the right far background. Direction of view, NNE. (Photo H. Wopfner. ) THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN 193 REFERENCES Grarssner, M. F., 1956. Erdél-Aufschlufarbeiten in Australien, Erdél-Zeitschr., Heft 2, Vienna. Jack, R. L., 1925. Some Developments in Shallow Water Areas in the North-East of South Australia, Geol. Survey South Australia, Bulletin No. 11. Jack, R. L., 1930, Gcological Structure and other Factors in Relation to Underground Water Supply in Portions of South Australia, Geol. Survey South Australia, Bulletin No. 14. Morr, W. D., 1952. Oil in Queensland, Qneensland Gov. Mining Journal, October. Smiru, E. R., 1958. Notes on Seismic Survey at Haddon Downs, South Australia, unpublished report, Bureau of Mineral Resources, Melbourne. Sprice, R. C., 1958. Petroleum Prospects of Western Parts of Great Australian Artesian Basin, Bull. Amer. Assoc, Pet. Geol., 42, p. 10. Wurrenouse, F. W., 1948. The Geology of the Channel Country of South-Western Queens- land, Bureau of Investigation, Technical Bulletin No. 1. Worrnen, H., 1957. The Geology of the Area West and North-West of Oodnadatta, Final Report for 1956 on Work Carried out on Behalf of SANTOS Ltd. (unpublished). NOTES ON THE GENUS EUCALYPTUS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY C. D. BOOMSMA Summary A revision is made of the geographical locations of a number of species of the genus eucalyptus in South Australia. NOTES ON THE GENUS EUCALYPTUS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA By GC. D. Boomsma*® [Read 18 August 1959] SUMMARY A revision is made of the geographical locations of a number of species of the genus eucalyptus in South Australia. INTRODUCTION Owing to the amount of clearing for agricultural settlement that has taken place of recent years in South Australia, it is almost inevitable that many of the original occurrences of trees of the genus eucalyptus will eventually be known from the records only, rather than from actual sites, The following notes deal with new observations on the geographical oceurrence of a number of species of the genus, Of recent years very little material, if aay, has been collected in South Australia of E. eudeomoides, E. ewartiana, E. gongylocarpa, E. pachyphylla, E, oldfieldii, and EF, viridis. E, albens Migq. my re ty Only two trees have been located near Wirrabara township, in the type arca, which agrée with the type description. However, there are many which agree with the description of E. hemiphloia, amongst the cammonly occurring greybox, HZ. microcarpa, It has been suggested by Pryor (personal communication) that mixed type material formed the basis of the descrip- tion of E. albens. . anceps (R. Br.) Blakely On the south side of Torrens Gorge, Hd, Onkaparinga, approximately three miles east of Athelstone, a sinall outlier of 10-12 stems, C, Boomsma, 1947. . baxteri (Benth) Maiden and Blakely 1, A stunted small tree to 30 ft. high, mature leaves with long acuminate point, bud has a conical operculum, and typical exsert valves to capsule. Mt, Kitchener, R, V, Woods, 1954 (personal communication). This may be the most northerly occurrence of this species. 2. A stnnted small tree to 30 ft. high, Sec, 42, Hd. Waitpinga, now cleared. Mature leaf wider and thicker than type, fruit larger than type, 15 mm. x 15 mm. C. D. Boomsma, 1950. behriana F. v. M. Collections were made from Curtwillia Creek, Cowell, D. Smith, 1956; Wanilla, W. C. Johnstone, 1956; Stockport in the lower north, C. D. Boomsma, 1957: and Mt. Woodfarde, the far north, J. J. Johnsen, 1955. . ealycogona Turez Small island inliers, Sec. 140, Hd. Howe, Southern Flinders Ranges. C. D. Boomsma, 1949. * An officer of the Woods and Forests Department. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1960), Vol, 83. 196 c. D. BOOMSMA E. camaldulensis Dehn Although a generalised occurrence by Burbidge in Trans. Roy, Soc, 1947, includes “water courses throughout §.A,”, and by Black, 1957, includes “all over $.A. except the dry creekless area north of the Great Bight”, an area of 20 acres, half mile east of Minlaton, Boomsma, 1949, is the only knewn occurrence on Yorke Peninsula, and a larger area occurs at Polda, Eyre Peninsula, in the Hds, Sqnire, Tinline and Ulipa, R. French, 1956 (personal communication ), E. cladocalyx F, v. M. (Figs, 3 and 4) Three genetic variants showing some characteristics of E. camaldulensis and E. cladocalyx were noted in Chapmans Gums Swamp, Wanilla, Eyre Peninsula, W. C. Johnstone, 1951; C. D. Boomsma and Pryor, 1958, The form and shape of FE. cladocalyx yaries in the three areas of natural oveurrence, yery crooked to stunted tree to 35 ft. high on Eyre Peninsula; with an improvement in straightness and increase in height on Kangaroo Island to tal) shaft-like trees. to 90 ft. high in the Southern Flinders Ranges. No natural stands haye been found agrecing with the description of the horticultural variety nana. E. cneorifolia D.C. 1. Two small ridge top outliers on lateritic soil in Sec. 381, Hd. Encounter Bay, haye now been cleared. 2. A recently observed occurrence nearby on a friable sandy soil 5 miles south-west of the Back Valley P.O. on Rivington Farm. J. G. Wood, 1959; in the University of Adelaide, Werbarium. E. concinna Maiden and Blakely Along the E,-W. transcontinental railway line, Whynbring, J. Johnson, 1955. E. cosmophylla F. v, M, In areas between two associations, E, obligua and E. cneorifolia, on Kan- garoo Island, and E. obliqua and E. fasciculosa on Fleurieu Peninsula, speci- mens with more than three buds per umbel, and atypical bud characters, C. D. Boomsma, 1947, E. dumosa A. Cunn Smooth budded specimens are found in eastern localities of South Australia, but specimens which are not smooth budded are usually referable to other species. E. elaeaphora F. v. M. Small tree to mallee, 10-15 ft. high, on the upper slopes and summit of two peaks in Elders Range surrounding Wilpena Pound, G. Gross, 1953, and R. French, 1957 (personal communication); I. Brooker, 1959, E_ gamophylla F. y. M, While this species is best known by its perfoliate juvenile foliage, the intermediate foliage, not often secn, is sessile, to shortly petiolate, opposite, to alternate and lanceolate 1-5—2 cm. x4—6 cm. Mature foliage not seen. Mann Ranges, J. Johnson, 1955. E. gillit Maiden No specimens have been located by me, in the vicinity of Wirrabara during the period 1945-1958 which is in the type area, Its most southerly occur- rence appeats to be Biblianda Station, J. Johnson (personal communica- tion). & lead NOTES ON THE GENUS EUCALYPTUS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 197 . intertexta R. T. Baker Mature foliage, robust, coriaceous, avate-lanceolate 7-10 om. * 2-5—4 cm. fruits about twice normal size. Mt. Moulden, Blyth Ranges, J. Johnson, 1955; R. L. Crocker, 1956. . jugalis Naud Probably a “nomen dubium”, Pryor (personal communication), but not E. leucoxylon var. pauperita, J, E. B, Throughout the high rainfall parts of the Southern Flinders Ranges, scattered individuals or small groups up to 50 trees having intermediate characteristics between a box and a gum. They could be genetic variants of E. leucoxylon and a box, the common box is E. microcarpa, C. D. Boomsma, 1947, . largiflorens F. v. M. Several restricted disjunct occurrences either on swamps or along flood plains to water-courses far removed from the large securrence along the Murray River. Mingary Creek, Oakvale Station, and Kalkaroo, J, Johnson, 1953; Halbury, C. D. Boomsma, 1956, . macrorryncha F. v. M. A genetic variant, a single tree with level valves to the fruit, Sevenhills. Pryor and Boomsma, 1953. ». microtheca F.v. M, Large broad-lanceolate foliage, Everard Park. J, B, Cleland, 1954. A num- ber of specimens with enclosed valves examined by L, Johnstone, 1958, were stated to be genetic variants of E. microtheca. Mann Ranges, J. Jolmson, 19595. , obliqua L’Herit Stunted tree to mallee-like, 10 ft. high, fruit with level, to exsert valves. Ridge Road, Parawa, C. D. Boomsma, 1946. . odorata Behr and Schl. Lanceolate to ovate-lanceolate intermediate foliage predominates on trees on the west facing lower slopes of the Mt. Lofty Range, while the lanceolate to narrow lanceolate mature foliage is characteristic of the northern areas to form variety angustifolia, Blakely . oxymitra Blakely Widespread in the vicinity of the far north-western ranges, J. Johnson, 1955; R. Crocker, 1956 (personal communication ). . pauciflora Sieb Genetic variants from Sec. 574 Hd. Caroline, N. Lewis, 1952, pileata Blakely Occasional specimens have been collected from the far north, J. Johnson, 1955; R. Crocker, 1956 (personal communication), . pyriformis Turcz Fruits nearly smooth, Bulgunnia Station, J, Johnson, 1952, . rubida Dean and Maiden A disjunct occurrence of only a few acres in Sec. 304 Hd, Yankalilla, It is adjacent to the E. obliqua and E. fasciculosa associations. C. D, Boomsma, 1947. . rugosa R, Brown and Blakely Ilybrid swarms in the Hundred of Coonarie, Yorke Peninsula; and Fishery Bay, Eyre Peninsula, C. D. Boomsma, 1947; and Boomsma and Pryor, 1958. 198 C. D. BOOMSMA E. terminalis F. y. M. The forms with narrow lanceolate mature leaves, and ovate-globular thick walled fruits with a constricted orifice, usually only a few per umbel at maturity, are referable to E. dichromophloia F. vy, M., L. Johnstone, 1958. Observed by J. Johnson in Musgrave, Mann and Tompkinson Ranges, E. uncinata Turez [ Because specimens are rarely collected, if at all, in South Australia, this species could be regarded as endemic to Western Australia, E. viminalis Labill (Figs. 1 and 2) The rough barked coastal form has been known to occur on Eyre Peninsula since 1951, but verification was not made until 1958 by Pryor and Boomsma. The occurrence is typical for the species being confined to the lower slopes and bottoms of valleys in undulating country on terra-rossa soils, Several hundred trees were seen distributed over Mickera Station, Hd. Sleaford, where it is known as the Mickera Gum. E., vitrea R. T, Baker Ts now regarded to have a hybrid origin, so it is not surprising to record a wider range of characters than in the original description. L. Johnstone, 1952; Pryor, 1955 (personal commumication). E. websteriana Maiden A new record for South Australia, Single specimen of three dozen mature leaves, eight buds and one capsule, Mature foliage bunched together, sub- glaucous, ovate, obovate to obcordate or emarginate. Petioles, young branchlets, peduncles and pedicels glaucous, Buds and influrescence agree with the original description. Capsule larger, 14-0 * 0-8 mm., broad dise gently rising to the base of the small triangular exert valves. Mt, Wood- roofe, 3,000 feet altitude. J. B. Cleland, 18/4/59, State Herbarium 95, 951, 132. Determined by S, T. Blake, 18/6/1951, Maiden refers to cultivated seedlings. ex Tarcoola blocks P. 381, Vol. VIIT, Pt. 5. A New Record for South Australia A mallee, mature leaves somewhat oblong-lanceolate, widely spaced, al- ternate, long acuminate point, petiolate, uel venation indistinct, size 7-5 em, * I-1—1-S cm. Fruit shortly pedicellate, axillary umbels, on short compressed peduncle, cupular shape 7 mm. * 7 mm. with raised rim 2 mm. wide, valyes short, exserted and subulate. J. Johnson, 1955; R. Crocker, 1956; Lothian and Hill, 1958. REFRRENCES Brack, J, M., 1943-57. Flora of South Australia. Govt. Printer, Adelaide, 2nd Ed. Boomsma, ©. D,, 1947, M.Sc, Thesis, University of Adelaide. Bunurince, N, T., 1947. Key to the South Australian species of the genus Eucalyptus L’Merit. Trans. Roy. Soe. §. Aust.. TL (2), pp, 137-67, 1947. Maton, J. H., 1903-25, A critical revision of the genus Eucalyptus, Govt. Printer, Sydney. Puate 1 ©. D, Boomsma “BEETEBE A Sc6T “Wag ‘BNsUILAY Noto] y Oo) sypUUIA “oy "(ULIOZ [R}SPO 'gg6T “Jdog ‘ynsumag aidq ‘erayory "F “Sty O} IEMs ULIO} payooio A]ssoid pue ye ayl[-xoq ysnor Surmoys *( WUOF [Rseoo) syMUWIA “y|—T] “BIq PLATE 2 C. D. Boomsma '9c6] “Weg ‘rms ula, OLA] UTPHIP\A “lays paysoy pur todey ydusqe BUIMOYS “BUpAIsS UWos-jjos xlyooopujza “y—p “Buy “SS6T “dag ‘FNsueg mA ‘ETUR AA SasseaS par ojos myaqgyy “nunjdnuas naoyleoyguoy aie ATOJSIOpUN ayy ut saigeds payeposse uoy “PULOF PUrTpooM YRuULARSg ‘xfij~pooppja “~q~—e “BLY CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA NO. 1 BY G. M. CHIPPENDALE Summary A new name is proposed, Borreria hillii (syn. Spermacoce scabra Ewart). Amended descriptions are given for two species, Bassia spinosa Ewart et Davies and Eucalyptus gongylocarpa Blakely. Additional notes are given for several species, and ten species including two naturalised species are given as new records for Central Australia. CONTRIBUTIONS FO THE FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA No. 1 By G. M, Cutprennare® [Read 8 October 1959] SUMMARY A new name is proposed, Barreria hillit (syn. Spermacoee scahra Ewart). Amended descriptions are given for two species, Bassia spinosa Ewart et Davies and Eucalyptus gangylocarpa Blakely. Additional notes are given for several species, and ten species meluding two naturalised! species are given as ew reeards for Central Australia. Isonrackian Isvetes muellert. A. Br. Top of Ayers Rock in rock pool, D. E, Symon, 14/6/1953 (ADW 9715), This is a new record for Central Australia, and was brought to my notice by Mr, David Symon. GRAMINEAE Eriachne armitii F. Muell. This species was omitted accidentally in the Check List in last years Transactions (Chippendale, 1959). PROTMACEAE Hakea arborescens R. Br. One mile east of Kurundi H.S., Neville Forde, 11/5/1957 (NF 821), A new record for Central Australia, CHENOPODIACEAL Bassia spinosa Ewart et Davies. Subshrub to 30 cm. high, grey, tomentose with branching hairs on stems and leaves, branches often tanzled, more or less pracumbent. Leaves sessile, narrow, oblanceolate or obtuse, 10 mm. to 14 mm. long, 2 mm, to 2-5 mm. wide near apex. Flowers solitary, axillary. Fruiting perianth tube 2 mm. long, attached firmly to stern, mostly with 4 spines, one to 4 mim. long, two shorter divergent at base, the fourth spine often shorter again, Seed vertical or slightly oblique to summit of perianth. Lander Creek, G. F, Vill, 15/6/1911 (G.F.A. 346, Holotype, seen on loan from Melbourne Herbarium), 10 miles cust of Central Mount Wedge HS. R. E. Winkworth, 1/7/1954 (Herb. Aust.f REW 383). Five miles cast of Alice Springs, R. A. Perry. 5/3/1953 (Herb. Aust, RAP 3232), Twenty-five miles west of Haast Bluf Settlement, R. B. Winkworth, 9/6/1954 (IIerb. Aust. REW 317). Fifteen iniles south-west of Alice Springs, R. E. Winloworth, 7/5/1954 (Herb, Aust. REW 262). Three miles south of Angas Downs, M. Lazarides, 9/10/1956 (Herb. Aust, ML, 6183). The above is an amended description, as the species is not well known, and wus not seen by R. H. Anderson at the time of his revision of the genus Bassiar (1923). Examination of fragments of the holotype showed that G, F. Hill's specimen was affected by insects, and it was these affected parts which were * Bolanist, Animul Industry Branch, Department of Territories, Alice Springs, N,T. + The official abbreviation [or the herbariwn in Canberra, cited as “Herb. Ausi.”, is GANB, Trans, Roy, Soc. S, Aust, (1960), Vol, 83, 200 G, M, CHIPPENDALE described by Ewart and Davies as “fruiting perianths connate into a hard mass of about half-inch diameter”. Mr. Burns and Mr. Neboiss of Melbourne Museum agree that the hard masses are “indeed galls caused by insects, possibly fies”. The affinities of this species are with B, quinquecuspis F. Muell., and not with B, paradoxa (R. Br.) F. Muell. as originally stated by Ewart and Davies. Tt is sometimes a common species in mulga scrub, and is alsa found on some low caleareous hills, and in sandy soil on croded flats with scalded patches. AIZOACEAE Trianthema thynchocalyptra F. Muell. Twenty-four miles south of Barrow Creek township, R. A. Perry, 3/9/1955 (Herb, Aust, RAP 5350). This is a new record for Central Australia, and the collector's note states “prostrate mat plant, with pink flowers”. PaAPILIONAGEAE Daviesia chordophylla Mcissn. Twelve miles north-cast of Narwietooma HLS,, M. Lazarides, 15/9/1956 (Herb. Aust. ML 5991). A new record for Central Australia, MiIMOSACEAE Acacia torulosa Benth. Four miles north of Wauchope, Neville Forde, 8/11/1956 (NF 695), A new record for Centra] Australia, CAESALPINIACEAE Cassia curvistyla J. M. Black. 14-2 miles south-east of Tanami, G, Chippen- dale, 3/5/1958 (NT 4267); 17 miles north-east of Lake Mackay, G. Chippendale, 17/6/1957 (NT 3412), These recent records, together with the two localities quoted by Black with his uriginal description (1938) help to show the distribution of this little- collected species. These records were all in sandy soil in Triodia sp. communi- ties, in one case in lateritic sand, and in one other case in an area of burnt Trivia sp. It seems most likely that this species extends over most of the arid area north and south of Tanami. ZYGOPHYLLACEAE Zyvophyllum iodocarpum F, Muell. Twelve miles south-west of Tempe Downs H.S., M. Lazarides, 4/10/1956 (Ilerb, Aust. ML 6120). This is a new record for Central Australia, with the collector’s note: “common in undulating area with low hills and Acacia estrophiolata”. EUPHORBIACEAE Petalostigina quadriloculare F, Muell. var nigrum Fwart et Davies. Five miles north of Kurundi Station, M. Lazarides, 28/8/1956 (Herb, Aust. ML 5866). Five miles south of Wauchope, R. E, Winkworth, 21/3/1955 (IIerb, Aust, KEW 962), Two miles north of Wauchope, R. E, Winkworth, 22/3/1955 (Herb. Aust. REW 979). Ten miles north of Murray Downs HLS., R. E. Winkworth, 29/7/1954 (Herb, Aust. REW 522). Seventeen miles west of Rockhampten Downs turn-off, Barkly Highway, G, Chippendale, 14/8/1955 (NT 1533). Forty-one miles south of Waye Hill HLS., G. Chippendale, 11/7/1956 (NT 2204). Muckaty turn-off, Stuart Highway, C. Chippendale, 11/3/1955 (NT 1075). The description of this variety by Ewart and Davies states: “Fruit black, X-inch diam., glabrous, seeds smooth, dark brown”. Examination of fragments of the varietal types seen on Ioan from Melbourne Herbarium showed that all CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 201 of the aboye specimens were vegetatively identical with these types, A sug> gestion that the original description of the fruit of this varlety may be faulty was checked at Melbourne Herbarium by Miss H. Aston, and it seems clear that the deseriptions were made from fruits which were not in a perfect state. The blackness was due to age, as was also the glabrousness. There were no collector's notes. In the specimens quoted above, the fruit is quotex! in the field as being “apricot-ycllow” and “orange-yellow”, and the capsule is silky pubescent when immature, and appears to lose some of this pubescence with age. A fur- ther specimen in Melbourne Herbarium, matching G. F. Hill’s No, 387, eol- lected by J. McDouall Stuart, North Australia, lat. 20°20’, had a collector's note stating, “Small, bitter, orange-coloured fruit”. This species is sometimes known as Strychnine Bush in the Northern Territory, MaLVACHAE Sida platycalyx F. Muel). ex Benth, Fl, Aust. i.L97, 1863. Synonyms: S. inclusa Benth. Fl. Aust. 7.197, 1863. S. podopetalu F. Muell. et R. Tate in Trans. Roy. Suc. South Australia, 13, $4-109, 1889-1890. 4 won pedatum Ewart in Ewart et Davies FI, Northern Territory, p. 182. 917, The case for the synonymy of 8. inelusa was accurately made hy White (1922). In the case of S. podopetala, the authors separate it as having “nurrower leaves, hy the calyces being not provided with very prominent ridglets and further by the petals emerging beyond the calyx”. In describing $, platycalyx. Bentham states; “Petals broad, shorter than calyx”, but more than. likely he did not sec adequate material. He only quotes “Sturts Creek”... In dried specimens, the buds of this species sometimes give the impression of being mature flowers, but in the field the species varies greatly in the size of leaves on the same plant, and also according to season conditions and habitat. The petals are at length longer than the calyx. The ridges on the calyces is also a variable factor. 'Tiet- ken’s specimens from Glen Helen, June, 1889, und Warman Rocks, 10/6/1889, wml a specimen from Ipilla Gorge, James Range, were examined on loan from Adelaide Nerbarium. A type of Abutilon pedatum seen on loan from Sydney Herbarium had been correctly determined by Miss Neridah Ford as 8. platycalyx. MYRTACEAE Eucalyptus gongylocarpa Blakely. Near King Creek, 234 miles soith of George Gill Range, G. Chippendale, 27/6/1959 (NT 6326). Twenty-eight miles north of Lake Amadeus, G. Chippendale, 28/6/1959 (NT 6343). “Sandy slope at Lake Amadeus, G. Chippendale, 29/6/1959 (NT 6390). Ten miles south- west of Glen Edith, G, phippendale. 24/6/1959 (NT 6274). No description of the buds of this specics appears in literature, and the following description is made from the above specimens: Umbels axillary, slightly deflexed, 3-9 flowered, but mostly 4-7 Rowers peduncles terete 10-15 mm. long, buds pruinose 3-3-5 mn. diameter, pedicels 4-6 mm. long, eperculum hemispherical, truncate at summit with faint ratlizting bidlges, 1-0-1+6 mm. high, tube short conical 2-0-3-5 mm. mostly 3-0-3+5 mim. ong, This species is common in aeolian sands in Triodia pungens associati which are west of the settled areas in Central Australia. ; _— 202 G. M. CHIPPENDALE SOLANACEAE Solanum melanospermum F. Muell. Stirling bore, 20 miles south of Barrow Creek Township, R. A. Perry, 3/9/1955 (Herb. Aust. RAP 5349). This is a new record for Central Australia. RUBIACEAE Borreria hillii nom. nov. Spermacoce scabra Ewart in Flora of the Northern Territory, p. 260, 1917. Ewart’s specific epithet had been used previously in Borreria by K, Schum., 1895. CUCURBITACEAE Cucumis myriocarpus Naud. Temple Bar Creek, eight miles south-west of Alice Springs, G, Chippendale, 22/1/1959 (NT 5327). This is an addition to the naturalised plants of Central Australia. CoMPposiITAE Vernonia cinerea (L,) Less. var. lanata Koster in Blumea I No. 3 (1935), 408. This was recorded as V. cinerea in last year’s Transactions (Chippendale, 1959). Erigeron bonariensis L., Alice Springs, G. Chippendale, 3/4/1958 (NT 4151), This is an addition to the naturalised plants of Central Australia. Fig. 1—Buds of Eucalyptus gongylocarpa Blakely. (Twig is natural size.) CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE FLORA OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 203 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The assistance of interstate botanists is gratefully acknowledged. Figure 1 was drawn by Mr. D. J. Nelson. REFERENCES Anperson, BR. H., 1923. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xlviii, part 3 (1923). “A Revision of the Australian Species of the Genus Bassia”. Brack, J. M., 1938. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62 (2), p. 354. “Additions to the Flora of South Australia, No. 37”. CuipreNDALe, G. M., 1959. Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust., 82 (1959), pp. 321-338. “Check List of Central Australian Plants”. Ewant, A. J., and Davies, O. B., 1917. The Flora of the Northern Territory. Weis C. T., 1922. Queensland Agric. Journal, 17-18 (Jan., 1922), 34-5. “A Western urr’, HENRY KENNETH FRY, D.S.O, M.D., B.SC., DIP.P.H. 1886-1959 Summary HENRY KENNETH FRY, v.s.c., M.D., B.S,, BSC., DIP.P.H. 1886-1959 H. K. Fry was elected a member of this Society in 1923, became a member of its Council from 1933 to 1938, and was President for the last year of this period, Dr. Fry graduated at the University of Adelaide in Science in 1905 and in Medicine in 1908, In 1909 he was awarded the Rhodes Scholarship and pro- ceeded to Oxford, where he gained the B.Sc. degree in 1912 and the Diploma in Public Health. His post-graduate study was in the subject of Anthropology. Returning to Australia in 1913, he joined the Northern Territory Health Service and in the Territory found an outlet for his training in anthropology through his interest in the Australian aboriginal. After serving for some time in the far north, he took up private practice but continued in his academic leanings and in 1934 gained his degree of M.D in the University of Adelaide and was also made a Fellow of the Royal Australian College of Physicians. During the later years of his life, he served as Medical Officer of Health for the City of Adelaide. Dr. Fry always maintained an active interest in anthropology and for many years was a member of the University Board for Anthiopologioal Research. He took part in a number of University field expeditions to Central Australia — in- cluding those to Hermannsburg, Cockatoo Creek, Mount Licbig, the Granites, Ernabella and Yuendumu., He was especially interested in social anthropology and made a special study of some aspects of the social structure of Central Australian tribes, on which subject he published a number of recognised authori- lalive papers. Most of his anthropological papers are contained in the Transactions of this Society, his main works being: 1931 A table showing the Class Relations of the Aranda. 1932 Genealogical studies of Anstralian tribal systems. 1931+ Kinship and descent among the Australian aborigines. 1950 Aboriginal Social Systems. A major anthropological contribution, “Fear in Primitive Society”, was published by the Anthropological Society of South Australia as No, 1 of its Occasional Publications (1938). He was among the foundation members of this Society. Kenneth Fry will always be remembered for his quiet, friendly personality and for the patient tenacity with which he applicd himself to his chosen problems of study. T.D.C. LIST OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING THE YEAR 1958-59 Summary LIST Oct., 1958. Nov., 1958, Apr., 1959. May. 1959. June, 1959. July, 1959. Aug., 1959. Sept., 1959. OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING THE YEAR 1958-59 Mr. K. H. Nortucore: “The Problems of Classification, with Special Reference to Soils”. Mr. L, W. Parkin; “Geological Progress in South Australia in the Post-war Period” (Presidential Address). Dr. K. Tuomson: “Rugiri, a newly discovered ceremonial site in the Western Desert, Northern Territory”. Dr. J. N. Buacx: “Light, Climate, Leaf Area and the Growth of Plant Communities”, Sma Ronap FisHer: “Tobacco and Lung Cancer”, Dr. A. F. Birp: “The Physiology of Root Attraction in Plant Parasitic Nematodes”, Mk. D. E. Symon: “The History and Domestication of Subterranean Clover”. Dr. D. J. Surron: “Palaeomagnetism”. BALANCE SHEET Summary ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED ) Receipts and Payments for Year ended 30th September, 1959. £ ed, To Balance, 1/10/50 698 18 3 », Subscriptions 359 17 5 », Government Grant 1,750 0 0 » Sale of Publications, ete. 431 12 1 >» Rent of Rooms .. MN wl * 5 2 0 >> Interest— Endowment Fund £239 11 7 Savings Bank of S.A, he ie 44 14 § —————._ 284 6 3 £3,729 16 § to By Printing and Eubtiehing. Volume 82, Reprints, etc. > Library Assistants » Printing and Stationery ea » Postage and Duty y Stamps, etc. » Cleaning .. . > Insurance .. » Lighting » Sundries » Balance— Savings Bank of 5.A., Rundle St. £598 8 Less Outstanding Cheques 43 15 Audited and found correct. Adelaide, 5th October, 1959. F. M. ANGEL N. S. ANCEL, A.U.A, Com. ENDOWMENT FUND Receipts and Payments for Year ended 30th September, 1959. » 2,678 13 3 554 13 £3,729 16 Hon, { Auditors, & s. d. To Balance, 1/10/58 . 6110 0 0 >, Interest— Inscribed Stock .. £234 1 7 Gas Co. AS.AS.M., M.I.MLM., 36 Woodcroft Avenue, St. Georges, S.A. . , M.B., B.S., Magill Road, Tranmere, Adelaide. 1950. Bonnin, N. I, M.B., B.S., F-R.C.S. (Eng.), F\R.A.C.S,, 40 Barnard Street, North BonytHon, Sm J. Lavincron, 263 East Terrace, Adelaide. 1945. “*Boomsara, C. D., M.Sc., B,Se.For., 6 Celtic Avenue, South Road Park, S.A. 1950, 1930, 1957, 195¢). 1944, 1931. 1933, 1945. 190g, 1958. 159, 1927, 1951. 1958. 1958, 1959. 1954. 1953, 1927, 1435, 1939, 1943, 1sd4. 1922. LIST OF FELLOWS aig ~ Bagores, es H. M,, Dept, of Entomology, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, Na. » Adelaide. Burek, W, G,, BA. o/v Country Lending Service, Public Library, South Austrailia “Humans, Mes N. T., M.Se, C.5.0B,0., Diy, Plant Industry, P.O. Box Lvy, Can- yerra, ACL, Burvon, R. S., D-Se., Physics Dept., University af Adelaide—Conneil, 1946-99, Burine, [., 51 Richmond Road, Westbourne Park, $.A, SCamPuriL, Prom T. D., D.D.Se., DSe., 24 Lynington Street, Tusinare, S.A— Council, 1928-32, 1935, 1942-45: Vice-President, 1932-34; President, 1934-35. Carnopus, B. B., R.D-Gen., St. Mark’s College, North Adelaide, S.A, Canter, A. N., B,Sc,, 7 Madeline Street, Burwood, E,13, Victoria. *CurrEnvAue, G. M., B.Sc., Lindsay Avcnue, Alice Springs, N.T. a le MB... BS,, 7 Walter Street, Hyde Park, Adelaide, §.A—T'seasuret, Cioran, EB, A, Hydroelectric Connnission, Hobart, Tus, Coutiryen, F. 8., Coology Department, University ol Queensland. *Corron, B. C,, F.10Z,8., J.P, S.A, Museum, North ‘Terrace, Adelaide—Couneil, L045. 46, 1948-49; Vice-President, 1949-50, 1951; President, 1950-51; Programme Sec- retary, 1959- Crawrorp, A. H., B.Sc... Dept. of Mines, Adelaide. Day, B., Ph.D., S.A. Museum—Prozramme Seeretary, 1957-59, Disa By ds ©, Phw., B.se, c/o Messrs. Simpson & Brookman, 26 Pirie Street, Adelaide, S.A, Deranp, GC, M.. MB. B.S... D.P.H,, D.T.M., 29 Gilbert Street, Goodwoed, S.A.— Council, 1949-51, 1954-39: Vice-President, 1951-52, 1953-54; President, 1952-53, Dix, EB, V,, Box 12, Aldgate, S.A. ; Doub, K, M., M.Ag.Se.. Wuite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No, 1), Adelaide. Dunrnor, P, fh, G., WSe, 13 Walton Ave. Clearview, S.A, Dunstonr, 8. M. Li. M.B. B.S., 170 Puynehiim Road, St. Peters, Adelaide. Dwvyzr, J. M., MLB. BS., 105 Port Road, Hindmarsh, S.A. *akniny, Miss C. M.. M.Sc. F.LS., University of Adeluide—Couneil, 194348, "Epmonps, 8, J,, BA MSe, Ph.D., Zoology Departmant, University of Adelaidi— Council, 1954-55; Frogramme Seeretiry, 1955-56; Seoretury, 1956-57. *Rngquisr, A. G., 19 Farrell Street, Glenelg. 5,A—Couneil, 1949-53, “Eicuewr, H,, Drrernat. State Herbarium, Botanic Garden, Adelaide, Mevorr, D, B.. B.Sc, Dept, of Zoolozy, University, North ‘Verrace, Adelaide, S.A, “Finvrayson, H. H., JOS Ward Street, North Adelaide—Conneil, 1937-40. Yisimn RB. H., 21 Seaview Road, Lynton, South Australia. *Fonpes, B. G,, Ph.D, HGS. 9 Flinders Road, Millerest, S.A. Forn, A. W., F.LGS,, A.C.C,S,, 380 South Terrace, Bankstown, N.S.W, Torve. N., Dip.Foe,, éS1RO., Canberra, A.C.T- Grisow. A, A. A.W.A.S.M., Mines Department, Adelaide. *Grarssneg, M, F,, D.Se,, oo Geolozy Department, University of Adelaide—Council, 1933-54; Vice-President, 1958-59. Gonrrry, FF, K., 5 Robert Street. Payneham, South Australia. {Gornsack, H., Coromandel Valley, S.A. Green, Miss L, M A., B.A M.Sc,, Dept. of Anatomy and Histology, University. Adelaide, S.A. Gnoss, CG, FL, M.Su. South Anstralian Musenm, Adclide—Sevretury, 1950-53. Guppy, D. J., B.Se., ¢/o WA, Petroleum Co., 251 Adelaide Terrace, Perth, W.A, *Harte, H. M., O.B-F., c/o S.A. Museum, Narth Terrace, Adelnide—Verrv Medal, 1946; Cawneil, 1951-34, 1950-53, 1956; Vice-President, 1954-36, 1937-048; Presi- dent, 1936-37; Treasurer, 1938-50, 1953-56. Tars,, 9, R,, Téa Tree Gully, §.A. {Hancocr, N. 1, 3 Bewdley, 66 Beresford Road, Rose Bay, NS.W- "Hansen, 1. V., BA, Queen Elizabeth Sehoul, Crediten, Devan, England. *Hanpy, Mus. J. B. (nec A. C. Beckwith), M.Se., Box 63, Sutitlitoa, Tas. Hanns, J. R., B.Sc, c/o Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1). Adelaide, Havnacn, J. F., B.Se,, 64 Pleasant Avenue, Clandore, S.A. Herriot, R. 1, B.AgrnSo., 49 Halsbury. Avenuc, Kingswood, S.A. Hocxwe, L. IL, Kauri Parade, Seacliff, S.A, H,. D.Se.. & Vardon Street, Seacombe Gardens, 5A, 132 Fisher Street, Fullarton, S.A. S., J.P. 238 Payneham Road, Puyneham, $.A- S.AS.M,, 10 Bellevne Place, Unley Park—Crunesil, 1OS7-59 Horwtirz, H, G, Db. *Hossretp, P. S,. Ph.D. Hunarg, D. S. W., M.P *Hurtron, J. T., BiSe., a, ‘ * 210 Hate of Election 1928. 1d5. 1550. 1957 1558. 1954, 1939, 1uda. 1933, 1922. 1958. 1948, 193], 1953, J939, 16%. 1920. T95u, 1443. TA4R 1945, 1951, 1852. 1934. 1958. 1991, 1933, 1925, 1938, 1936. 1957. 1944, 1944, 1945. 1930. SSB, 15937. 1944, 1929. 1936. LIST OF FELLOWS Trout, P., 1d Wyatt Road, Burnside, S.A, °Jessuy, R, W,, M.So,, Division of Plant Industry, €.S.0R.0., P.O. Box 109, City, Canberra, A.C,T. *Jouns, R. K,, B.Se., Depurtrnent of Mines, Adelaide, S,A, Jounson, B., B.Se.Agr., Ph, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, Na. 1), Adelaide, *Jornsos, W,, B.Sc, (Honx.), 33 Ryau Avenue, Woodville West, S.A Kears, A. L., BE, 44 LeFevre Terrace, North Adelaide, TR RSEAR, or M,, Ph.D,, MLB, F.R.G.5., Khakhar Buildings, GP Tank Road, Bom- ay, India, *King, D., M-Sc., ¢/a Commercial Bank of Australia, King Willian St., Adelaide, S.A, *Kureman, A, W.,_PhD.. Dept. of Geology, University of Adelaide—Seenstury, 1945- 48: Vice-President, 1948-49, (950-51; Prevident, 1949-50. Lennon, G. A. M.D., B.S., F.B.C.P., c/o. Elder's Trustee and Executor Co. Lid., 37 Currie Street, Adelaide, 51A, Linpsay, TY, A., LLO Cross Road, Highgate, 8,A. Lorman, T, K. N., N.D.IT, (N.Z.), Director, Botanic Carden, Adelaide—Treavurer, 1952-53; Council, 1953-57; Vice-President, 1957-58; President, 1988, (959, “Lupsxook, Mrs, N. A. M.A, PhD., DLC, F.G.$., Department of Mines, Adelaide —Council,, 1958-59, Marnzer, D, A, B.Sc. (Hons.), Waite Institute (Private Mail Bay, No. 1), Adelaide, Mausuatn, T, J., MAgrSe, Ph.D. C.8...8.0., Division of Soils (Private Mall Bag, No, 1), Adelaide—Councll, 1948-52. Martm, Miss H. A., 43 Dunrobin Road, Brighton, $.A. Mayo, Sov Heasent, LL.B, O.C., 19 Marlborough Strect, Cullege Park, S.A, Mayo, G. M, E., B.Ag.Sc,, Ph.D,, 146 Melbourne Street, North ‘Adelaide. McCanrruy, Miss D, F., B.A., B.Se., 17 Brookside Ave, ‘Tranmere. MeQui nies, ‘i N., M.B.E., B.Sc,, B.Agr.Se., Roseworthy Agricultural College, Ruse- wotthy, 5S A, i*Mives, K. R., D.Sc. B.G.S§., 11 Church Road, Mitcham, S.A. Mines, J. A. R,, M.A.. M.D., B.Chir. (Cant.), University of Otago, N,Z Minwe, K. Li, F.C.A., 14 Burlington Street, Walkerville, S.A, Minciam, V. H., 30 Wainhouse Street, Torrunsville, S.A. Minas, RK, G., B.Sc,, 5 Myrtle Rd, Seaclift, S.A, Mire FP, J., South Australian Museum, Novth ‘Terrace, Adelaide, S.A —!'rewvurer, 1959-. Mirenenp, Puor. Sir M. L,, M-Sa, ¢/o Elder's Trustee and Execntor Qo. Ltd, 37 Curie Street, Adeluide. {MircHELL, Pror, Sin W., K.C.M.C,, M.A,, D.Se., Fitzroy Terrace, Prospeet, SuA. Moontouser, F, W,, M-Se., Chief lospector of Fisheries, Simpsim Builetings, Gawler Place, Adelaide. *Mountronp, C, P., 25 First Avenue, St. eters, Adelaide, “Muse, Ivan A., B.Se.. (Hons.), Dept. of Mines, Adelaide: Musnecn, J, W., Engineering and Water Supply Dept., Victoria Square, Adelaide Ninwes, A, R., B.A., R.D.A., 62 Sheffield Street, Malvern, SiA. *Nontucote, KL, BAgrSe., ADAS., C.S.LK.0,, Division of Snils, Private Mall Bay, No. 1, Adelaide, Ocxrnpen, G. P., B.A., 108 Hockey Stroct, Whyalla South, S.A- O'Duusecoin, E. S., B.Sc. 9 Vinall Street, Dover Gardens, S.A, *Pargm, 1, W., M.S, A/S.T.C., Mines Dept,, Adelaide — Sweretany, 1953.56, Vice-President, 1956-57, 1958-59: President, 1957-38. Parxinson, K, J.. B.Sc, Birelwood, SA. Pauiy, A. G., M.A., B.Se., 10 Milton Avenue, Fullarton Estate, $.A. *Piver, O, S., D,Se., C.8,1.8.0., Division of Soils, Private Mail Bag, No 1, Adolaide— Verco Medal, 1957; Council, 1941-43; View-President, (943-45, 1946-47: Pree sident, 1945-1946, Powntr, J. K,, B.Sc, Waile Institute {Private Mail Bag, No. |), Adcdaide. SUA, §Parscorr, Pror. J. A. C.B.E., DSe., FRAGT, FURS, 82 Cross Road, Myrtle Bank, S.A.—Vereo Medal, 1938; Council, 1927-30. 1935-39; Vice-President, 1930-32; President, 1932-33; Editor, 1055-. *Prncie, Miss L. A. B., Box 878, G:P.O., Adelaide. *Pryon, L, D., M.Sc, Dip.For,, 32 La Perouse Street, Griffith, Canberra, A.C.T- *Rattican, J. I,, MSe., Box 229r. G.P.0.. Melbourne, Vivtoria, RicemaAn, D. §., M.Sc., B.Agr.Se.. €,5.L8.0., Division of Biochemistry, Adelaide. Rrepe., W. R., B.Se., e/a Scripps Institution of Oceanography. Dept. of Valoean- tology, University of California. La Jolla, Galifornia, U.S.A, LIST OF FELLOWS all Date ol Election 1997, Rex, G. B.,. 42 Woymouth Avenue, Glandore, S.A, 1953, Kocurs, Pror, Wi PR. PRD, PAA, Zoology Dopartment, University uf Adeluide. 1951, Rowx, S, A. 32 Shelley Street, Firle, $A. 1950. Rupp, Prov. Ti, A,, BSe,, A.M., University of Adelaide, S.A, Wal. Russeun, L. D., efo Adelaide Boys’ High School, West Termec, Adelaide, S.A, T45. Byotitn, J. B., Old Penalo Mstate, Penola, S.A, 1933. Souwnmmms, M., M.B. B.S., 175 North Terrace, Adelaide, 1959. ScHonpe, K., 23 French Strect, Netherby, S.A. 195). Scorn, T. D., M.Sc. S.A. Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S\A,— Programme Secretary, 1953-54, 1996-57; Seeretory, 1957-59. 1957. SHARMAN, G. B., B.Sc., Department of Zoology, University, North Yerrace, Adelalde, S.A. 1925, *Sreanun, H., Part Elliot, S.A, 1996. "Smear, K., D.Se., Wisheries Research Div., €,S.1.R.0,. Division of Misheries and Ocrauography, University of W.A., Nedlands, W.A. 1954. Stutrmreuw, AR. C., BiSe., e/o Department of Mines, Adelaide, 1934. Semsrcecp, R, C,, 57 Canterbury Avermie, Trinity Gardens, S.A. 1925. tSaurn, 54 Tom Basu, Rt. B.A,, 25 Currie Street, Adelaide: i94l. *Sanns, T. L, BiSe., Dept, of Geography, University of Sydney, N.S.W. 1941. °Sourucerr, R. V.. M.D., B.S., D.T.M. & Il, 13 Jasper Street, Hyde Park, SA— Corneil, 1949-51, 1952-53, 1987-. Trewsurer, 1951-32; Vige-Pregident, 1933-54, 1955-56; President, 1954-55, i936, Sournwoon, A, BR. M.D, MLS. (Adel,), M.R.C.P., 170 North Terrace, Adeltide. 17. *Sercer, R. L., PHD., Botany Depattnent, University of Adelaide—fSoimcil, 1951-52, 1958-59; Procramme Secretary, 1959-53. 1956, +°S price, R. C., MSc. 5 Baber Street, Somerton Park: 1951, Stesusan, Rev. W. RL 8 Blairgowrie Roacl, St. Georves, S.A, 137. Srunuinc, M. B., BeAg.Se., Horticultaral Branch, Department af Azticulhiie, Box 9OLE, G.P.O., Adeliide. Idd. °Spry, A. H., M.Sc., Geology Department, University of Tasmania, 1938, *Sternens, ©, G,, D.8e,, GS.1R-0.. Division of Soils, Private Mail Bay, No. 1. Ade laide—Veren Medal, 1959; Council, 1952-54; Vice-President, 1954-55, 1958-57; President, 1955-56, 1955, Swarm, C. D., M,B., B.S.. 220 Esplanade, Largs North, §,A, 1932. Swas, D.C,, M.Sc., Waite Institute {Private Mail Bag. No. 1), Adelaide—Swernraryy, 1940-42; Vice-President, 1946-47, 1948-49; Presidlent, 1947-45; Couneil, 1953-58. 1951. Swinsx, P., M.Ag.Se., 11 Wall Street, Norwood, 8.A, 1994, Syaions, 1, G., 55 Marray Street, Lower Mitelion, S.A—Editar, 1947-55, Cine, 1955-58. ; 1958, Tayion, D. J., Dept. of Entomology, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, Nu 71), Advlwide, S.A, 1929, *Tayron, J. K, BA M.Se., C.S.1.1.0., Division of Sails, Private Mail Bag, Ne, 1, Aclelaide—Cauneil, 1940-43, 1947-50; Llbrartan, 1951-52; Viec-Presidlent. 1952- 53, 1M54-55: Prevident, 1953-54; Counuil, 1955. 1955. Trarcnen, D,, B.Sc,, Department of Minus, Adelaide, 1948, °Tnosas, & M., M.Sc, (Wales), Department of Zoology, University af Adrlalle— Secretary, 1948-50; Coancil, 1950-53; Vice-President. 1955-56, 1957-58: Mresident. 1956-57; Assistant Eclitor, 1958-. 1988. *Trioxras, Mrs, 1, M. (nee P, M. Mawson), M,Se... 18 Dunhice Ave., Brizlitun, S.A, 1957. ‘Tnostas, J., B.Sc., Woodleigh Road, Blackwood, S.A, 1940, *4'Hoarrsaw, Cart. J. M., 135 Military Moaad, Semaphore Sonth, §-A- 1959; Tromsow, B. P.. M.Sc. 33 Oaklands Road, Parkholme, §.4, 1923. “Tinpane, N. Bi, B.Se.. South Australian Museusa, Adelaide—Vercoa Meddul, 1956; Secretary, 1935-36; Council, 1946-47; Vice-President, 1947-48, 1949-50; President, 1948-49. Librarian, 1952-.. : 1955, “Tucker, B. M., B.Sc., C.S.1.8,0;, Division of Soils, Private Mall Bag, No. 1, Adolaide. 1959, ‘Twipane, C. R., Ph.D. MSe., Dept. of Geovraphy, University, North Terrace, Adelaice, S.A. W950, "Tyten, M. J. Dept. of Physiolosw, University, Adelaide, 8.4, 1950, Verret, J. T., Box 92, Port Lincoln, S.A. 1953. Watrastan, Tl. A. B.A. MLA. PhD., Wayne State University, Doetrait, Michigan, U.S.A, 1954, Wess, B, P., MSc, Mines Dept, Rundle Street, Adelaide, 1954, Werns, C. B., B.Ag.Sc., Broadlees, Waverley Ridge, Crafers, S.A, 1946. *°Wuirrnr, A, W.-G., M.Sc., Mines Department, Adelaide. 212 Date of Election 1950. 1946. 1938. 1933. 1954. 1944. 1923. 1957, 1949, 1944. LIST OF FELLOWS WiiaMs, L. E., “Dumosa,” Meningie, S.A. *Witson, A. F., D.Sc., Dept. of Geology, University of W.A., Nedlands, W.A. *Wirson, J. O., 42 Wilson Terrace, DaCosta Park, Glenelg, S.A. *WomersLey, H., F.R.E.S., A.L.S. (Hon. causa), S.A. Museum, Adelaide — Verco Medal, 1943; Secretary, 1936-37; Editor, 1937-43, 1945-47: President, 1943-44; Vice-President, 1944-45; Rep. Fauna and Flora Protection Committee, 1945: Treasurer, 1950-51, 1956-59. *Womers.ey, H. B. §., Ph.D., Botany Department, University of Adelaide. Womerscey, J. §., B.Sc., Dept. of Forests, Lae, New Guinea. *Woop, Pror. J. G., D.Sc., Ph.D., F.A.A., Botany Dept., University of Adelaide—Verco Medal, 1944; Council, 1938-40; Vice-President, 1940-41, 1949-43; Rep. Fauna and Flora Board, 1940-; President, 1941-42; Council, 1944-48. Woons, R. V., B.Sc., Mt. Crawford, S.A. Yeates, J. N., A.M.LE., A.M.I.M.E., Highways and Local Government Dept., Adelaide. Zoumer, W. J., Dip.For., F.L.S. (Lon.), 7 Rupert Street, Footscray West, W.12, Vict. GENERAL INDEX Summary GENERAL INDEX Names printed in italics as separate entries indicate that the forms are new to science, Absolute Gravity Values, Determina- tion of the, on the Summits of a Number of Prominent Hills in the Mount Lofty Ranges: I. A. Munnne = 119 Acarina, (Some) trom Australia and New Guinea Paraphagic upon Mil- lipedes and Cockroaches and on Beetles. of the Family Passalidae; H, Womersley ‘d a of 31 Adelaide Systern, Maynesite of the: Petrography and Descriptive strati- graphy: B. G, Forbes 1-9 Aeolian Landforms: The Sand Ridge Deserts of South Australia and, Related, of the Quatemary Arid Cycles: "D. King: 99 Amphibolurus adelaidensis (Gray); Observations on the Diet and Size Variation of, on the Nullarbor Plain: M. J. Tyler - . I Anelassorhynchus adelaidensis be 92 Arhynchite hiscocki _. a - 90 Bluck, J. Nv: The Relationship be- tween Uhimination and Global Radiation 83-87 Boomsma, C. C.: Notes on the Genus BR neal, ats in Sofia 4 Austraha .. 195-198 Borreria hillii a 7 » 202 Central Australia, Contributions to the Flora of: G. M. Chippendale 199 Central Australia, the Charnockitic Granites and Associated Granites of — 37 Charnnckitic (The) Granites and As- sociated Granites of Central Aus- tralia 37 Chippendale, G. M.: Contributions to the Flora uf Central Australia 199-203 Classificatory Systems of Kinship: H. K. Fry 11 Consideration (A) of the Spccies Previously Included with Helip- deruen albicans (A, Gunn.) DC: P, Wilson... 163 Cormiathen ta the Flora of Goniral Australia: G, M. Chippendale 199 Cotton, Bernard C.: Distorted Cow- ries . 109-110 Cowrics, Distorted: B. G. Cotton. LO9 Dict and Size Variation of Amphi- bolavas adelatdensis (Gray) on the Nullarbor Plain: M. J. Tyler .. 111 Evhiuroidea; Some Australian Echin- roids; $. J. Edmonds , p 89 Kelipta alatocarpa be wa rr 77 Edmonds, S$. J.: Some Australian Eohiuratds (Eechiurvidea) - _. 89-98 Eucalyptus, Notes on the Genus in South Australia; C, BD. Boomsma . 195 Finlayson, H, H.: On Rattus greyi Cray and its Derivatives 123-147 Finlayson, H. Hi: Nomenclature of Notomys (Muridaue) in the Lake Eyre Basin L 79-82 Flora of Central Australia, Contri- butions to the: G, M. Chippendale 199 Torbes, B. G.: Magnesite of the Ade aide System! Petrography and De- scriptive Stratigraphy 1 Fry, H. K.; Classificatory: Systems of Kinship : 11-19 Fry, Henry Kenucth, An ‘Appreciation 204 Creat Australian Artesian Basin, on Some Structural Deyelopment in the Central Part of the: Hi Wopfner 179 Helipterum albicans (A. c er DC.,, « Consideration of the Species Pre- viously Inclided with: P. CG, Wilson i = 163 Helipterum saxatile vs a _ 166 Heterocheylus lombardinti sie pal Kinship, Classificatory Systems of; H. kK. Fry 11 King, D.: The Sand Ridve Deserts of South Australia and Related Aeolian Landforms of the Quatern- ary Arid Cycles... 5 2 99-108 Laelaptoseius navae-zelandiae 31 Lake Eyre Basin, Nomenelature of Notomys (Muridae) in the: H. H, Finlayson ta ae - . 79 Leptolaclaps (Acarina, Mesostig- mata), New Records of Species from Australia and New Zealand: H, Woinersley 25 Magnesite of the Adelaide System Petrography — and Descriptive Stratigraphy: B. G. Forhes 1 Melville, R.: An Aberrant Species of Eulipta from Australia ; 717-18 Mount Lofty Tanges, Determination of the Absolute Gravity Values on the Summits of a Number of Pro- minent Hills: 1, A. Mumme w L119 Miumme, T. A.: Determination of the Absolute Gravity Values on the Summits of a Number of Promi-: nent Hills in the Mosnt Lofty Ranges . »2 119-121 214 GENERAL INDEX Netomys (Muridac), Nomenclature of, in the Lake Eyre Basin; H. H. F inlayson 79 Nullarbor Plain, Ohservations on the Diet and Size Variation of Amphi- holurus adelaidensis (Gray) (Rep- tilia, Agamidae); M. J. Tyler ~~ 111 Ochetostoma australiense =. 93 On Some Structurat Developments in the Central Part of the Great Australian Artesian Basin: H. Wopfner .. . . he . LT9 Pristolaelaps obovata —... - 33 Rattus greyi and its Derivatives: If. I. Finlayson h 123 Rattus greyi pelori 140 Relationship (The) Betw ein Tlu- mination and Global Radiation: J. N. Black = = a 83 Sand Ridge Deserts of South Aus- tralia and Related Aeolian Land- forms of the Quaternary Arid Cycles; D. King 99 Southcutt, R. V.; Notes on the. genus S phaeratarsus (Acarina, Smutri- didae ) 149-161 Sphacratarsus, Notes on the Genus: » ¥, Southcott - . . 149 Thalassema sydniense ... Tyler, M. J.: Observations on the Diet and Size Variation of Amphi- holurus adelaidensis (Gray) Wilson, A, F.; The Charnaockitic Granites and Associated Granites of Central Australia Wilson, Paul G.: A Consideration of the ‘Species Previously Included with Helipterum albicans (A. Cunmn,) DC. ; Wopfner, H.: On. Some Structural Development in the Central Part of the Great Australian Artesian Basin , z Womersley, ‘HL: A New Genus and Species, Laelaptoseius novae- zelandiae from New Zealand (Aca- rina, Aceosejidae ) Womersley, H.; A Second Species of Pristolaelaps (Acarina, Laelapti- dae) from Australia .. 7 Womersley, H.: New Records of Species of Leptolaelaps (Acarina, Mesostigmata) from Australia and New Zealand Womersley, H.: Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea Para- phagic Upon Millipedes and Cock- roaches and on Beetles of the Family Passalidae i. 89 111-117 37-76 163-177 179-193 31-32 . 33-35 25-29 _ 21-24 6 ete ee enn Q - i ae wpb mn yl RCS i Bu - a ha By > * s - 2 CONTENTS B. G. Forses: Magnesite of the Adelaide hae Petrography and De- scriptive Stratigraphy Sete ile cma) gaze. a rae ag H. K. Fry: Classificatory Systems of Kinship... ms H. WomenstEy: Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea Paobaats upon Millipedes and Cockroaches and on Beetles of the Family DENCE EN Mogae TM tou rend Pk AE te tae a H. Womerstey: New Records of Species of frolcelans (Acarina, Meso- stigmata) from Australia and New Zealand... mmm H. Womerstey: A New Genus and Species Laelaptoseius novae- zelandiae from New Zealand (Acarina, Aceosejidae) 0 em H. Womerstey: A Second Species of Pristolaelaps VES “‘Eaclaptidad) from Australia See AE ecm eR es ee eet e 2, ‘A. F. Wuson: The Chamnockitic Biabiies and ASS Giants of Centrale Anstralia 8s. ie ee ed ae as R. Metvixe: An Aberrant Species of Eclipta from Australia ee gees H. H. Frtayson: Nomenclature of Notomys (Muridae) in the Lake Eyre Basin. | Set Spe cca Re ee rai Sea J. N. Brack: The Ralatioashtp pores Whumination Sal Global Radiation S. J. Evmonps: Some Australian Echiuroids (Echiuroidea ) xs D. Kine: The Sand Ridge Deserts of South Australia and Related Aeolian Landforms of the Quaternary Arid Cycles... ~~. ms Brernarp C, Corton: Distorted Cowries Duce 2 eaten ant ees M. J. Tyter: Observations on the Diet and Size Variation of ‘Ate hibolahes adelaidensis (Gray) (Reptilia, Agamidae) on the Nullarbor Plain .... I. A. Mumme: Determination of the Absolute Gravity Values on the Summits of a Number of Prominent Hills in the Mount Lofty Ranges H. H. Foxtayson: On Rattus greyi Gray and its Derivatives =. R. V. Sourucotr: Notes on the Genus Sphaerotarsus (Acarina, Smarididae) Pau. CG. Wison: A Consideration of the Species Previously Included within Helipterum albicans (A. Cunn.) DC... s... H. Woprner: On Some Structural Development in the Central Part of the : Creat Australian Artesian Basin’. 0 ok nee C. D; Boomsma: Notes on the Genus Eucalyptus in South Australia... CG. CurepenpALE: Contributions to the Flora of Central Australia, No. 1... Henry Kenneth Fry, D.S.0., M.D., B.S., B.SC., DIP,P.H., 1886-1959 __...... List of Lectures, 1958-1959" oe ie ae eat Falance-Gheebc paar 2 aie eee Seay i a lr aces he 72h. alt Awards of the Sir Joseph Verco ‘Medal and List of Fellows, 1959... eee tee aa ee eee ee ee econ TE